13.07.2013 Views

RBS 2308, RBS 2309, EBB-01 and EBB-06 User's Guide

RBS 2308, RBS 2309, EBB-01 and EBB-06 User's Guide

RBS 2308, RBS 2309, EBB-01 and EBB-06 User's Guide

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.

P<strong>01</strong>2350C<br />

Ericsson GSM System<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 R3A


BINDER LABEL<br />

Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.<br />

XSN/KIS Fredrik Hammar 4/0<strong>01</strong> 59-EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen<br />

Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File<br />

XSN/KIS Benn Degeryd 2005-<strong>01</strong>-14 D<br />

HEADING<br />

XXX<br />

LZN xxx xxx<br />

R-state<br />

Cutting mark<br />

98 65<br />

H:\Project\Highscore\Klara dokument\R1B\<strong>RBS</strong> 2109\2109 binderlabel_portrait.doc<br />

Ericsson GSM<br />

System<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>,<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0027<br />

R3A<br />

28<br />

38<br />

47<br />

54<br />

Fontsize 10<br />

Fontsize 14<br />

Fontsize 12<br />

Fontsize 10<br />

1 (1)


Doc nr: 2/0<strong>01</strong> 59-EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen Rev C<br />

Ericsson GSM System EN/LZT 720 0027 R3A<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong>


CAPTION LIST<br />

Document No.<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<br />

<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Date<br />

2005-<strong>01</strong>-14<br />

Rev<br />

B<br />

Introduction<br />

Personal Health <strong>and</strong> Safety Information<br />

System Safety Information<br />

Tools <strong>and</strong> Instruments<br />

Installation of <strong>RBS</strong><br />

Antenna System Tests<br />

Site Installation Tests<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> Site Integration<br />

Maintenance<br />

Glossary<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> Installation Instructions<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> Maintenance Instructions<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> Installation Instructions<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> Maintenance Instructions<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

10<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

14


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

E


Copyright<br />

© Ericsson 2005 — All Rights Reserved<br />

Disclaimer<br />

No part of this document may be reproduced in any form without the written<br />

permission of the copyright owner.<br />

The contents of this document are subject to revision without notice due to<br />

continued progress in methodology, design <strong>and</strong> manufacturing. Ericsson shall<br />

have no liability for any error or damage of any kind resulting from the use<br />

of this document.<br />

Trademark List<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


Contents<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

1 Introduction 1<br />

1.1 Product Overview 2<br />

1.2 Target Groups 3<br />

1.3 Installation <strong>and</strong> Integration Process Overview 4<br />

1.4 Radio Site Implementation Process 5<br />

1.5 <strong>RBS</strong> Library Overview 8<br />

1.6 Release History 8<br />

2 Personal Health <strong>and</strong> Safety Information 11<br />

2.1 Introduction 11<br />

2.2 Hazard Symbols <strong>and</strong> Admonitions 12<br />

2.3 General Safety Precautions 13<br />

2.4 Electric Shock Hazards 14<br />

2.5 Energy Hazards 15<br />

2.6 Fire Hazard 16<br />

2.7 Heat Hazards 17<br />

2.8 Mechanical Hazards 18<br />

2.9 Radio Frequency Exposure Hazards 19<br />

2.10 Laser Hazards 20<br />

2.11 Chemical Hazards 21<br />

2.12 Other Hazards 23<br />

3 System Safety Information 27<br />

3.1 Introduction 27<br />

3.2 Admonitions <strong>and</strong> Safety Symbols 28<br />

3.3 Batteries 29<br />

3.4 Electrical Installation 30<br />

3.5 Electrostatic Discharge 31<br />

3.6 Equipment H<strong>and</strong>ling 32<br />

3.7 Ground Connection 33<br />

3.8 Lightning Protection 33<br />

4 Tools <strong>and</strong> Instruments 35<br />

4.1 Tools for Installation of <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong> 35


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

4.2 Equipment for Antenna System Tests 36<br />

4.3 Equipment for Site Installation Tests 37<br />

4.4 Equipment for <strong>RBS</strong> Site Integration 37<br />

4.5 Equipment for Maintenance 38<br />

4.6 Kit Specifications 38<br />

5 Installation of <strong>RBS</strong> 41<br />

5.1 Introduction 41<br />

5.2 Preconditions 41<br />

5.3 Torque Settings 42<br />

5.4 Installation Procedure 43<br />

6 Antenna System Tests 81<br />

6.1 Checking the Installation 83<br />

6.2 Calibrating the Antenna Tester 84<br />

6.3 Performing DTF Tests 87<br />

6.4 Naming a DTF Measurement 90<br />

6.5 Calculating the Feeder Attenuation 91<br />

6.6 Calculating the Feeder Delay 93<br />

6.7 Performing SWR Test 95<br />

6.8 Naming an SWR Measurement 97<br />

6.9 Performing Concluding Routines 98<br />

6.10 SWR ↔ Return Loss Conversion Table 1<strong>01</strong><br />

7 Site Installation Tests 103<br />

7.1 Preconditions 103<br />

7.2 Inspecting Cable Connections 104<br />

7.3 Checking AC Mains <strong>and</strong> DC Power Supply 104<br />

7.4 Switching on <strong>RBS</strong> 105<br />

7.5 Testing Fan Unit 107<br />

7.6 Setting IDB Parameters 108<br />

7.7 Reading Fault Status 133<br />

7.8 Testing External Alarms 134<br />

7.9 Performing Concluding Routines 136<br />

8 <strong>RBS</strong> Site Integration 141<br />

8.1 Testing Transmission 142<br />

8.2 Bringing the <strong>RBS</strong> into Service 144<br />

8.3 Making Test Calls on the Air Interface 145<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

8.4 Performing Concluding Routines 149<br />

9 Maintenance 155<br />

9.1 Introduction 155<br />

9.2 Preconditions 155<br />

9.3 Fault Localisation Using OMT 156<br />

9.4 Troubleshooting Using the <strong>RBS</strong> Indicators 173<br />

9.5 HW Replacement 185<br />

10 Glossary 223


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


1 Introduction<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

This User’s <strong>Guide</strong> consists of the chapters listed below. Each chapter is briefly<br />

summarised.<br />

Introduction<br />

This chapter.<br />

Personal Health <strong>and</strong> Safety Information<br />

Contains personal health <strong>and</strong> safety information that applies when working<br />

with Ericsson system products.<br />

System Safety Information<br />

Contains system safety information that applies when working with Ericsson<br />

system products.<br />

Tools <strong>and</strong> Instruments<br />

Contains lists of all recommended tools <strong>and</strong> instruments.<br />

Installation of <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong><br />

Describes activities for:<br />

• Installation of the mounting base<br />

• Connection of cables<br />

• Connection of external antenna<br />

• Mounting the radio cabinet on the mounting base<br />

Antenna System Tests<br />

Describes the site specific antenna tests that should be performed on site.<br />

Site Installation Tests<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

Describes the site specific tests that should be performed on-site.<br />

1


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

<strong>RBS</strong> Site Integration<br />

Describes how to integrate an <strong>RBS</strong> site into a network.<br />

Maintenance<br />

Describes first line Maintenance. This means that swap repair is carried out<br />

on site <strong>and</strong> that only replaceable units are h<strong>and</strong>led.<br />

Glossary<br />

Contains abbreviations <strong>and</strong> acronyms used in the text.<br />

1.1 Product Overview<br />

The <strong>RBS</strong> is a GSM EDGE micro base station for both indoor <strong>and</strong> outdoor micro<br />

cell applications. It is a small yet complete station, with transceivers, switching<br />

functions <strong>and</strong> transmission.<br />

The <strong>RBS</strong> can be mounted on a mast/pole as easily as it can be fitted to a wall.<br />

Figure 1 <strong>RBS</strong> Overview<br />

2 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

IXU Interface <strong>and</strong> Switching Unit<br />

MBU Mounting Base Unit<br />

MCB Multicasting Box<br />

RRU Remote Radio Unit<br />

RXBP RX B<strong>and</strong>pass Filter<br />

TIM Transmission Interface Module<br />

External optional battery backup is possible, as well as the option of having<br />

integrated antennas within the base station.<br />

1.2 Target Groups<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes the target group for this manual, which is all personnel<br />

involved in activities relating to the installation <strong>and</strong> integration of an <strong>RBS</strong> site.<br />

Chapters Introduction, Safety Instructions <strong>and</strong> Tools <strong>and</strong> Instruments<br />

used by all groups<br />

Cabinet Installation<br />

Antenna System Tests<br />

Site Installation Tests<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> Site Integration<br />

Fault H<strong>and</strong>ling<br />

YES NO<br />

TEMSON/OFF<br />

*<br />

CLR<br />

1 2 3<br />

4 5 6<br />

7 8 9<br />

0 #<br />

Installation<br />

OMT<br />

Test <strong>and</strong> Integration<br />

Figure 2 Chapters Related to Specific Target Groups<br />

P008221B<br />

During the whole Radio Site Implementation (RSI) process <strong>and</strong> the product’s life<br />

cycle, the target groups require documents in addition to the above mentioned<br />

manuals to complete the work.<br />

3


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Qualifications for Installation Personnel<br />

Ericsson recommends that installation personnel possess the following skills:<br />

• Technical college or equivalent education with an emphasis on electrical<br />

engineering<br />

• Familiarity with the equipment used during the installation process<br />

• Knowledge of antenna systems<br />

• Appropriate training <strong>and</strong> medical certificate for working at heights<br />

• Good underst<strong>and</strong>ing of technical English<br />

Qualifications for Test <strong>and</strong> Integration Personnel<br />

Ericsson recommends that testing <strong>and</strong> integration personnel possess the<br />

following skills:<br />

• Basic Ericsson <strong>RBS</strong> 2000 Operation <strong>and</strong> Maintenance knowledge.<br />

Personnel should be familiar with the tools <strong>and</strong> instruments recommended<br />

in the chapters Antenna System Tests, Site Installation Tests, <strong>and</strong> <strong>RBS</strong><br />

Site Integration.<br />

• Basic GSM knowledge<br />

• Basic <strong>RBS</strong> 2000 knowledge<br />

• Good underst<strong>and</strong>ing of technical English<br />

1.3 Installation <strong>and</strong> Integration Process Overview<br />

This section describes the overall Installation <strong>and</strong> Integration process. This<br />

process covers the work that follows the Installation Engineering process:<br />

testing the antenna system, installing the cabinet, performing site installation<br />

tests, <strong>and</strong> integrating the site into the network. A process overview is shown<br />

below.<br />

4 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


P009519B<br />

Installation Engineering<br />

Antenna System Tests<br />

Cabinet Installation<br />

Site Installation Tests<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> Site Integration<br />

Figure 3 The Installation <strong>and</strong> Integration Process<br />

1.4 Radio Site Implementation Process<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

This section describes the overall Radio Site Implementation process, of which<br />

the Installation <strong>and</strong> Integration process is a part. The Radio Site Implementation<br />

process covers the work from the initial stages of receiving an order, planning<br />

<strong>and</strong> designing the entire network, to installing the <strong>RBS</strong> sites <strong>and</strong> integrating<br />

them into the network.<br />

Contract is signed<br />

Radio Site<br />

Installation Engineering<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

Network Design<br />

Civil Works<br />

Installation & Integration<br />

Site Acquisition<br />

Figure 4 The Radio Site Implementation Process<br />

For further information about the planning process, see:<br />

Acceptance (of site)<br />

P007657B<br />

5


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Radio Site Installation<br />

Engineering Manual<br />

Network Planning Process<br />

EN/LZT 302 <strong>06</strong>9<br />

The Network Planning process consists of the following activities:<br />

• Dimensioning of network<br />

• Dimensioning of equipment for radio, transmission, switching, operation<br />

<strong>and</strong> maintenance<br />

• Defining <strong>and</strong> ordering market adaptation products, for example programs<br />

for national signalling towards the public telephone network<br />

• Measurement of radio frequency <strong>and</strong> interference<br />

• Producing digital maps <strong>and</strong> data<br />

Site Acquisition<br />

The Site Acquisition process is performed in close cooperation with the Civil<br />

Works process <strong>and</strong>, to some extent, with the Engineering process.<br />

The Site Acquisition process consists of the following activities:<br />

• Searching for sites <strong>and</strong> obtaining a site appraisal<br />

• Outlining the site design <strong>and</strong> evaluating the cost<br />

• Negotiating <strong>and</strong> signing leasing contracts<br />

• H<strong>and</strong>ling permits <strong>and</strong> arranging a h<strong>and</strong>over to the Engineering personnel<br />

Civil Works<br />

The Civil Works process is performed in close cooperation with the Site<br />

Acquisition process <strong>and</strong> the Engineering process.<br />

The Civil Works process consists of the following activities:<br />

• Preparing a detailed civil works design of the site<br />

• Updating the costs for the site construction<br />

• Arranging the site construction<br />

• Performing a site inspection <strong>and</strong> h<strong>and</strong>ing over an as-built document to<br />

the Engineering personnel<br />

6 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


Engineering<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

The Engineering process begins when the Site Acquisition <strong>and</strong> Civil Works<br />

processes are complete.<br />

The Engineering process consists of the following activities:<br />

• Measuring <strong>and</strong> collecting information about sites<br />

• Designing the antenna <strong>and</strong> radio configuration, <strong>and</strong> producing cable<br />

drawings<br />

• Making drawings showing the positions of the antenna <strong>and</strong> <strong>RBS</strong> equipment<br />

• Defining areas of responsibility between the purchaser <strong>and</strong> the contractor<br />

• Producing site-specific information in the Site Installation Documentation.<br />

For more information about the results from the site engineering process, see:<br />

Radio Site Installation<br />

Engineering Manual<br />

Installation <strong>and</strong> Integration<br />

EN/LZT 302 <strong>06</strong>9<br />

The work involved in this process is performed by installation personnel, <strong>and</strong><br />

test <strong>and</strong> integration personnel.<br />

Installation personnel are responsible for the following activities:<br />

• Installing the antenna system<br />

• Installing the <strong>RBS</strong><br />

• Earthing the <strong>RBS</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

• Connecting a power supply to the <strong>RBS</strong><br />

• Connecting the antenna system to the <strong>RBS</strong><br />

• Installing cable ladders <strong>and</strong> cable ducts<br />

• Installing battery backup<br />

• Installing PCM cables<br />

The test <strong>and</strong> integration personnel are responsible for the following activities:<br />

• Performing the tests specified in the contract <strong>and</strong> integrating the site<br />

• Troubleshooting if tests indicate a fault<br />

7


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

• Recording the test results in the Site Installation Documentation, which is<br />

returned to the engineering personnel<br />

1.5 <strong>RBS</strong> Library Overview<br />

For information on the <strong>RBS</strong> library <strong>and</strong> other manuals related to the <strong>RBS</strong>, see:<br />

1.6 Release History<br />

1.6.1 R2A to R3A<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 2000 Library Overview LZN 302 73<br />

Except for editorial changes, such as the correction of spelling, grammar, <strong>and</strong><br />

layout, this manual has been revised as follows:<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> Maintenance <strong>and</strong> Installation Instructions <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> Maintenance<br />

<strong>and</strong> Installation Instructions have been added as appendices to the manual.<br />

See release history in each appendix.<br />

Tools <strong>and</strong> Instruments<br />

• Updated the product number of the OMT Kit<br />

• Updated the reference to the Hardware Reference Manual<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> Integration<br />

• Deleted a wrongly placed picture<br />

Installation of <strong>RBS</strong><br />

• Updated the figure for the <strong>RBS</strong> installation process<br />

Antenna System Tests<br />

• Updated with the P-GSM 900 frequency<br />

• Added a new example for calculating the total feeder delay<br />

• Deleted an extra, wrongly placed test record<br />

Maintenance<br />

• Updated the step lists to grids<br />

8 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


1.6.2 R1A to R2A<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

• Updated the references to the Hardware Reference Manual<br />

• Updated the DC voltage range<br />

• Updated the corrective actions for the external alarms<br />

• Updated the instructions for the TIM replacement<br />

• Updated the instructions for the replacement of the Y link cable<br />

• Deleted some of the screenshots<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong><br />

Information about <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong> has been added to the document.<br />

Personal Health <strong>and</strong> Safety Information<br />

New safety chapter.<br />

System Safety Information<br />

New safety chapter.<br />

Installation of <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong><br />

• Section Tightening Torques added<br />

• Section Installing the MBU on a Wall updated with a figure that shows<br />

connection of site earthing to the MBU<br />

• Section Installing the IXU (Master <strong>RBS</strong> Only) updated with a new figure for<br />

earthing of outer shield only<br />

• Updated figure for strapping cables using the appropriate cable tie anchor<br />

• Updated figure for installation of the top sunshield<br />

Antenna System Tests<br />

• Section Calculating Feeder Delay added<br />

Site Installation Tests<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

• Updated figure for RRU <strong>and</strong> IXU interface panels<br />

9


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

1.6.3 R1A<br />

• Section Connecting OMT updated with text explaining what to do if an<br />

extended OMT cable is connected<br />

• Section Defining Transmission Interface E1, 120 updated with information<br />

about ports C <strong>and</strong> D as a multidrop pair<br />

• Section Reading Fault Status updated with information about what is<br />

displayed when an MO fault is selected<br />

• Test record for St<strong>and</strong>-alone updated with a check for external alarms<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong> Maintenance<br />

• Updated figures for RRU <strong>and</strong> IXU interface panels<br />

• Torque value added for mounting of the TIM<br />

• Updated figure for disconnecting the power cable from the RRU<br />

• New figure for removal of the fan unit<br />

Appendix: Fault List Micro<br />

New fault list including all alarms related to all micro cabinets.<br />

This is the first release of this manual.<br />

10 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

2 Personal Health <strong>and</strong> Safety Information<br />

2.1 Introduction<br />

This document presents the personal health <strong>and</strong> safety information that applies<br />

when working with Ericsson system products. The instructions included are<br />

m<strong>and</strong>atory to ensure personal safety while working with Ericsson system<br />

products.<br />

Note: Reduce the risk of accidents by studying all the information carefully<br />

before starting work. If questions arise regarding health <strong>and</strong> safety<br />

information, contact the supervisor or the local Ericsson company for<br />

clarification.<br />

For information on product safety for Ericsson system products, see:<br />

Local Regulations<br />

2.1.1 Target Group<br />

System Safety Information,<br />

Ericsson System Products<br />

124 46–2886<br />

Local regulations, first <strong>and</strong> foremost national regulations, override the<br />

information in this document. Where applicable local regulations are not<br />

available, the information herein prevails.<br />

Product Exclusion Indication<br />

The information in this document covers personal health <strong>and</strong> safety aspects<br />

of all Ericsson system products. As all the information does not apply to a<br />

specific product, the readers must familiarize themselves with the potential<br />

hazards indicated on the product they are working with to underst<strong>and</strong> which<br />

document parts apply to their product.<br />

The target group for this health <strong>and</strong> safety information is personnel who work<br />

with Ericsson products. All personnel who work with engineering, installation,<br />

test, <strong>and</strong> operation <strong>and</strong> maintenance of Ericsson products must familiarize<br />

themselves with this information.<br />

2.1.2 Educational Requirements<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

The safety instructions in the relevant manuals or documents require that<br />

persons performing work on Ericsson products have the necessary education,<br />

11


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

training <strong>and</strong> competence required to perform work correctly. For certain work,<br />

additional or special training may be required, for example authorization for<br />

Authorized Service Providers (ASP). ASP is an Ericsson certification procedure.<br />

A good underst<strong>and</strong>ing of technical English is required, or of the language that<br />

the information is presented in, to ensure that these <strong>and</strong> other instructions<br />

can be understood <strong>and</strong> complied with.<br />

2.2 Hazard Symbols <strong>and</strong> Admonitions<br />

This section presents the types of admonitions <strong>and</strong> hazard symbols used in all<br />

Ericsson documentation. There are three levels of personal health <strong>and</strong> safety<br />

admonitions that indicate risk to persons: danger, warning <strong>and</strong> caution. Hazard<br />

symbols are used to indicate these <strong>and</strong> to present various other hazards.<br />

The admonition levels for personal health <strong>and</strong> safety are presented in order<br />

of severity, with danger being the highest level, warning the intermediary<br />

<strong>and</strong> caution the lowest. When admonitions are encountered anywhere in a<br />

document, the information included should be read <strong>and</strong> any instructions should<br />

be followed.<br />

2.2.1 Personal Health <strong>and</strong> Safety Admonitions<br />

Personal health <strong>and</strong> safety admonitions are used to indicate hazardous<br />

activities <strong>and</strong> are normally preceded by the common hazard symbol shown in<br />

the figure below, or in specific cases by specialized symbols, see Section 2.2.2<br />

Special Hazard Symbols on page 13.<br />

P002643A<br />

Figure 5 Safety Hazard Symbol<br />

The hazard symbol is common for all three admonition levels. The three<br />

admonition levels are defined below:<br />

Danger! Indicates that there is an imminent hazard that is likely<br />

to result in death or serious injury.<br />

Note: Danger can be accompanied by other symbols<br />

depending on the country of operation.<br />

Warning! Indicates that there is a potential hazard that could<br />

result in death or injury.<br />

Caution! Indicates a hazard that could result in minor or<br />

moderate injury.<br />

12 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


2.2.2 Special Hazard Symbols<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

This section presents special hazard symbols used to indicate the risk of<br />

chemical, electric shock, fire, heat, laser <strong>and</strong> Radio Frequency (RF) exposure<br />

hazards:<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0387A<br />

Figure 6 Chemical Hazard Symbol<br />

P002645A<br />

Figure 7 Electrical Hazard Symbol<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0385A<br />

Figure 8 Fire Hazard Symbol<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0274A<br />

Figure 9 Heat Hazard Symbol<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0341A<br />

Figure 10 Laser Hazard Symbol<br />

P002644A<br />

Figure 11 RF Exposure Hazard Symbol<br />

2.3 General Safety Precautions<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section presents general safety precautions to ensure that persons are not<br />

injured when working with equipment.<br />

• Items of jewelry, for example rings, watches <strong>and</strong> necklaces should be<br />

removed as they can catch on moving parts, or when lifting equipment.<br />

• Pay attention to the hazard labels <strong>and</strong> other information labels on products.<br />

13


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

• Never remove or cover hazard symbols as this can endanger persons<br />

working with the product.<br />

• Only use the tools described, in the manner indicated, in instructions.<br />

2.4 Electric Shock Hazards<br />

This section provides information <strong>and</strong> instructions relating to equipment<br />

operating on voltage that entails an electric shock hazard.<br />

Note: This information only applies to products marked with the electric shock<br />

hazard symbol.<br />

The term Electric Shock Hazard is defined below:<br />

Electric Shock<br />

Hazard<br />

Hazard at voltage equal to or above 42.4 V peak or<br />

60 V DC.<br />

Danger!<br />

Electric shock risk. Avoid both direct <strong>and</strong> indirect contact with parts connected<br />

to mains power as this is likely to be fatal. Switch off the mains power before<br />

starting work.<br />

Danger!<br />

Improper electrical installation may cause fire or electric shock that is likely to<br />

be fatal. Only a qualified <strong>and</strong> authorized electrician is permitted to install or<br />

modify electrical installations.<br />

Note: Only qualified electricians are allowed to work directly with equipment<br />

that presents an electric shock hazard.<br />

Note: AC mains installation must be carried out according to local regulations.<br />

2.4.1 Safety Precautions for Working with Electrical Equipment<br />

The following precautions must be observed when working with electrical<br />

equipment:<br />

• The AC mains is switched off.<br />

14 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

• Equipment exposed to moisture is protected with a tent or other equipment.<br />

• Power cables are installed according to instructions.<br />

• Installed cables are always clearly marked with labels.<br />

• All personnel are familiar with <strong>and</strong> underst<strong>and</strong> the warning signs on<br />

equipment.<br />

• Only tested electrical tools are used.<br />

• Holes are never drilled in equipment, or walls, without ensuring that there<br />

are no concealed cables.<br />

2.5 Energy Hazards<br />

2.5.1 Batteries<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section provides information on how to avoid energy hazards.<br />

The term energy hazard is defined below:<br />

Energy Hazard Hazard at a stored energy level of 20 J or an available<br />

continuous power level of 240 VA.<br />

This section provides instructions <strong>and</strong> information on the proper h<strong>and</strong>ling<br />

of batteries.<br />

Note: Where Ericsson is not the supplier of battery equipment, see the<br />

manufacturer’s information on battery safety.<br />

Caution!<br />

Improper h<strong>and</strong>ling of batteries can result in the batteries short-circuiting, which<br />

can result in serious injury due to high energy levels. Exercise the necessary<br />

care when working with batteries.<br />

15


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Lithium Batteries<br />

Warning!<br />

Switching poles when replacing lithium batteries can result in an explosion<br />

that can lead to injury. Always ensure that lithium batteries are connected to<br />

the right poles.<br />

2.5.2 Capacitors <strong>and</strong> Uninterruptible Power Systems<br />

This section provides information on how to avoid energy hazards in Capacitors<br />

<strong>and</strong> Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS).<br />

Warning!<br />

High energy levels are present in this unit. Improper h<strong>and</strong>ling of the unit can<br />

lead to short circuiting that can result in serious injury. Exercise care when<br />

working with this unit.<br />

Note: Some capacitors <strong>and</strong> UPSs have energy levels above 240 VA. If this is<br />

the case this is indicated on the product with a voltage hazard.<br />

2.5.3 Safety Precautions for Avoiding Energy Hazards<br />

The following precautions must be observed when working with batteries <strong>and</strong><br />

other units that present an energy hazard:<br />

• All metallic objects worn, such as wrist watches, rings, bracelets, <strong>and</strong> so<br />

on are removed.<br />

• Disconnect the charger power supply until the work is complete.<br />

• Only use insulated tools.<br />

2.6 Fire Hazard<br />

This section provides instructions <strong>and</strong> information on safety precautions for<br />

preventing fire.<br />

16 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Warning!<br />

In the event of a fire, evacuate the building or equipment site <strong>and</strong> raise the fire<br />

alarm at the closest alarm point, or call the emergency number. Do not re-enter<br />

a burning building under any circumstances.<br />

Warning!<br />

Heater in operation. Do not block the heater vents or place combustible<br />

materials close to the unit, as this can cause a fire that can endanger life.<br />

2.6.1 Fire Precautions<br />

Note: When working with the installation or maintenance of equipment that<br />

involves interfering with the fire sectioning of a building, this should be<br />

carried out as quickly as possible.<br />

Fire can spread to neighboring rooms. When working on equipment cable<br />

ducts, channels <strong>and</strong> access holes might have to be opened, thereby interfering<br />

with the fire sectioning of the building. The instructions below have to be<br />

followed when work has been completed to restore the building’s fire sectioning:<br />

1. Close the cable ducts <strong>and</strong> fire doors (if applicable) as soon as possible.<br />

2. Seal cable ducts according to the regulations for the building.<br />

3. Minimize the amount of inflammable material.<br />

4. Remove empty packaging material from the equipment site.<br />

5. Check that there is a functioning powder or carbon dioxide fire extinguisher<br />

for electric apparatus at the equipment site.<br />

2.7 Heat Hazards<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes how to avoid injury from hot surfaces or hot air in<br />

equipment.<br />

17


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Caution!<br />

Parts inside this equipment attain high temperatures during normal operation,<br />

which can cause burns to the skin if touched without heat protective clothing.<br />

Always use heat protective clothing when working with equipment containing hot<br />

surfaces, or switch the equipment off <strong>and</strong> allow it to cool before starting work.<br />

Caution!<br />

A heater, producing hot air, is in use in this equipment. Direct contact with hot<br />

air can lead to burns. When the heater is in operation, avoid close contact<br />

with the heater air evacuation vent.<br />

2.8 Mechanical Hazards<br />

This section provides information on mechanical hazards in equipment<br />

containing sharp edges or rotating blades.<br />

Caution!<br />

Sharp metal edges may exist that can cause cuts to the skin or clothing. Wear<br />

protective gloves when h<strong>and</strong>ling this equipment.<br />

Caution!<br />

Rotating fan blades can cause injury to body parts that come into contact with<br />

the blades. Blades in fan units continue to rotate for a period of time, even after<br />

the fan has been switched off. Wait until fans have stopped rotating completely<br />

before starting work on or near fans.<br />

18 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


2.9 Radio Frequency Exposure Hazards<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

This section provides instructions <strong>and</strong> information on potential hazards related<br />

to radio frequency (RF) electromagnetic field (EMF) exposure from fixed radio<br />

transmitters (as opposed to mobile phones).<br />

2.9.1 General RF Safety Information<br />

Caution!<br />

Excessive RF exposure can result in potentially adverse health effects. If it is<br />

suspected that RF exposure limits may be exceeded, ensure that transmitting<br />

antennas are switched off, or reduce output power whilst working with, or<br />

near, antennas.<br />

Note: RF exposure limits are specified by national <strong>and</strong> international health<br />

authorities in st<strong>and</strong>ards, regulations or guidelines. The limits include<br />

wide safety margins to protect from potentially harmful tissue heating.<br />

2.9.2 RF Safety for Installation <strong>and</strong> Maintenance Personnel<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

It is important that all personnel working with the installation <strong>and</strong> maintenance<br />

of transmitting equipment <strong>and</strong> antennas have basic knowledge regarding RF<br />

safety. They must have been informed or trained to be observant of potential<br />

risks of RF exposure exceeding specified safety limits, <strong>and</strong> be aware of<br />

precautionary measures necessary for differing situations.<br />

Caution!<br />

Do not st<strong>and</strong> or work in front of an operational antenna, unless it has been<br />

verified or documented that RF exposure levels are within specified safety limits.<br />

19


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Caution!<br />

Always be aware of other RF transmission antennas located close to the<br />

antenna you will be working with. If the RF exposure level is unknown, contact<br />

the equipment operator or ensure that measurements are done to verify that<br />

levels are below specified safety limits before starting work.<br />

Caution!<br />

Broken or disconnected RF cables can lead to exposure levels reaching, or<br />

exceeding, specified safety limits. Repair or reconnect cables before starting<br />

work.<br />

Note: Working outside of the main transmission direction of ordinarily<br />

configured antennas is in most situations possible, since the RF<br />

exposure does not normally reach specified safety limits in these<br />

directions.<br />

2.10 Laser Hazards<br />

2.10.1 Class 1 Laser<br />

2.10.2 Class 3 Laser<br />

This section provides information on working with products that have devices<br />

that communicate through optical fibres using laser.<br />

Note: This information only applies to products marked with the laser hazard<br />

symbol, stating the class of laser in use.<br />

This section provides information on working with equipment containing Class<br />

1 laser.<br />

Products containing a Class 1 laser, according to IEC/EN 60825, are safe<br />

to use <strong>and</strong> therefore have no requirements for cautions or warnings during<br />

operation or maintenance procedures.<br />

This section provides information on working with equipment containing Class<br />

3 laser.<br />

20 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Danger!<br />

Never look directly into the end of a fiber optic cable, or other laser source.<br />

Equipment that transmits laser light can cause permanent eye damage. Switch<br />

off the laser before starting work on laser equipment.<br />

Safety Precautions for Working with Class 3 Laser<br />

The following precautions must be observed when working with products<br />

containing a Class 3 laser hazard symbol:<br />

• Never look into the light emitting end of a functioning optical fibre.<br />

• Switch off units producing the laser signal before disconnecting an optical<br />

fibre.<br />

2.11 Chemical Hazards<br />

This section provides information on chemical hazards that can be present<br />

in products.<br />

2.11.1 Beryllium Oxide Hazard<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section provides information on Beryllium Oxide (BeO). BeO is a restricted<br />

substance that is contained in certain components in some Ericsson products.<br />

If a product contains BeO, this is clearly marked on the unit containing BeO.<br />

The BeO hazard symbol is shown in the figure below.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0382A<br />

Figure 12 BeO Hazard Symbol<br />

Note: This information only applies to products marked with the BeO symbol.<br />

21


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Danger!<br />

This product contains Beryllium Oxide (BeO), which can cause injury to skin or<br />

mucous membranes severe enough to endanger life or cause permanent injury.<br />

BeO dust is created by chafing, filing, or breakage <strong>and</strong> is extremely dangerous<br />

if inhaled, even for only a few seconds. Particles penetrating the skin through<br />

wounds or abrasions are liable to cause chronic ulcerations. Do not h<strong>and</strong>le<br />

components containing BeO without protection.<br />

Symptoms of BeO Poisoning<br />

Symptoms of BeO poisoning are respiratory distress, cyanosis (grey-blue<br />

discoloration of the skin <strong>and</strong> mucous membranes), or both. These symptoms<br />

may develop within a week, or after a period of several years.<br />

Safety Precautions for Working with Components Containing BeO<br />

The following precautions must be observed when working with components<br />

containing BeO:<br />

• Do not carry loose components in pockets, bags, or containers, or tamper<br />

with them in any way that could cause breakage or disintegration.<br />

• Do not apply excessive heat during soldering.<br />

• Do not break open components for inspection.<br />

• Store components in their original packaging <strong>and</strong> do not mix them with<br />

other components.<br />

• Ensure that components do not become mechanically damaged.<br />

• Use care when replacing defective components.<br />

• Do not blow on exposed surfaces due to the danger of BeO dust.<br />

• In case of accident, or if you feel unwell, seek medical advice immediately<br />

<strong>and</strong> show the label where possible.<br />

2.11.2 Battery Acid Hazard<br />

This section provides information on chemical hazards related to lead-acid<br />

batteries.<br />

22 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Caution!<br />

Excessive heat can cause battery casing to soften <strong>and</strong> warp, potentially allowing<br />

acid to escape. In contact with the skin, acid can cause injury, <strong>and</strong> if breathed<br />

in, can affect the airways. Use protective equipment when replacing batteries.<br />

Caution!<br />

Batteries can leak electrolyte if improperly h<strong>and</strong>led. Electrolyte in contact with<br />

skin or eyes can cause injury. In the event of electrolyte injuries, rinse the<br />

affected area with water <strong>and</strong> seek medical attention immediately. Use protective<br />

equipment when replacing batteries.<br />

Safety Precautions for Working with Lead-acid Batteries<br />

The following precautions must be observed when working with lead-acid<br />

batteries:<br />

• Eye wash facilities, <strong>and</strong> protective gloves or aprons are available.<br />

2.11.3 Gas Explosion Hazard<br />

Open-cell lead acid batteries can give off gases that in the event of a fire<br />

can cause an explosion that is likely to be fatal. All battery areas must be<br />

adequately ventilated <strong>and</strong> protected from fire.<br />

Danger!<br />

Do not use open-cell lead acid batteries. Open-cell lead acid batteries give off<br />

hazardous gases that, if ignited, can cause an explosion that is likely to be fatal.<br />

2.12 Other Hazards<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section includes safety instructions <strong>and</strong> rules for the following hazards:<br />

• H<strong>and</strong>ling Heavy Goods<br />

23


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

• Working at Height<br />

2.12.1 H<strong>and</strong>ling Heavy Goods<br />

This section provides instructions <strong>and</strong> rules for h<strong>and</strong>ling heavy goods.<br />

Note: Follow local regulations for safety clothing <strong>and</strong> safety equipment for<br />

hoisting <strong>and</strong> moving goods.<br />

Falling Objects<br />

Warning!<br />

Risk for falling objects, work at height in progress. Falling objects can cause<br />

serious injury or even be fatal. Always wear a helmet <strong>and</strong> avoid st<strong>and</strong>ing in<br />

the danger area.<br />

Overloading<br />

Warning!<br />

Overloading, or other wrong use of lifting devices, can cause serious injury to<br />

anyone hit by falling equipment. Do not create an angle exceeding 90 between<br />

lifting straps as this increases the strain on them <strong>and</strong> can cause them to snap.<br />

Caution!<br />

The equipment is heavy. Lifting the equipment without the aid of a lifting device<br />

can cause injury.<br />

24 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


Unsecured Equipment<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Caution!<br />

Tip risk! Unsecured equipment can tip over if not secured properly, causing<br />

injury to personnel. Secure products with a high center of gravity as soon as<br />

possible to avoid accidents.<br />

2.12.2 Working at Height<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section provides information about working at height.<br />

For information on climbing instructions for working at height, see:<br />

Safe Climbing LZY 213 715/02<br />

Safety Precautions for Working at Height<br />

The following precautions must be observed when working at height:<br />

• Personnel have the appropriate training <strong>and</strong> medical certificate.<br />

• A full-body safety harness <strong>and</strong> safety helmet are available.<br />

• Adequate protective clothing, essential in cold <strong>and</strong> wet weather, is available.<br />

• All lifting devices are tested <strong>and</strong> approved, <strong>and</strong> ready for use.<br />

• All personnel in the area are wearing helmets.<br />

25


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

26 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


3 System Safety Information<br />

3.1 Introduction<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

This document presents the system used for presenting system safety<br />

information for Ericsson products. The instructions included are m<strong>and</strong>atory to<br />

ensure product safety while working with Ericsson products.<br />

Local regulations must be taken into consideration. The system safety<br />

information in this document is in addition to local regulations.<br />

Note: Reduce the risk of accidents by studying all the instructions carefully<br />

before starting work. If questions arise regarding the safety instructions,<br />

contact the supervisor or the local Ericsson company for clarification.<br />

For information on personal health <strong>and</strong> safety for Ericsson system products,<br />

see:<br />

Local Regulations<br />

3.1.1 Target Group<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

Personal Health <strong>and</strong> Safety<br />

Information, Ericsson System<br />

Products<br />

124 46–2885<br />

Local regulations, first <strong>and</strong> foremost national regulations, override the<br />

information in this document. Where applicable local regulations are not<br />

available, the information herein prevails.<br />

Product Exclusion Indication<br />

The information in this document covers system safety information for all<br />

Ericsson system products. As all the information does not apply to a specific<br />

product, the readers must familiarize themselves with the potential hazards<br />

indicated on the product they are working with to underst<strong>and</strong> which document<br />

parts apply to their product.<br />

The target group for this system safety information is personnel who work<br />

with Ericsson products. All personnel who work with engineering, installation,<br />

test, <strong>and</strong> operation <strong>and</strong> maintenance of Ericsson products must familiarize<br />

themselves with this information.<br />

27


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

3.1.2 Educational Requirements<br />

The product safety instructions in the relevant manuals or documents require<br />

that persons performing work on Ericsson products have the necessary<br />

education, training <strong>and</strong> competence required to perform work correctly. For<br />

certain work, additional or special training may be required, for example<br />

authorization for Authorized Service Providers (ASP). ASP is an Ericsson<br />

certification procedure.<br />

A good underst<strong>and</strong>ing of technical English is required, or of the language<br />

that the information is presented in, to ensure that these instructions can be<br />

understood <strong>and</strong> complied with.<br />

3.2 Admonitions <strong>and</strong> Safety Symbols<br />

This section presents the types of admonitions <strong>and</strong> safety symbols used in all<br />

documents for Ericsson system products. There are two types of system safety<br />

admonitions that indicate risk to products: Do! <strong>and</strong> Stop!. When admonitions<br />

are encountered anywhere in a document, the information included should be<br />

read <strong>and</strong> any instructions should be followed.<br />

The figures below show the symbols used to indicate product safety<br />

admonitions:<br />

Figure 13 Do Safety Symbol<br />

Figure 14 Stop Safety Symbol<br />

The terms Do! <strong>and</strong> Stop! are defined below:<br />

Do! Indicates an action that must be performed to prevent<br />

equipment damage, software corruption, data loss or<br />

service interruption.<br />

Stop! Indicates that action must be avoided to protect<br />

equipment, software, data or service.<br />

The term ‘‘Note’’ is used to present important information that might otherwise<br />

be overlooked.<br />

3.2.1 Special Hazard Symbols<br />

This section presents special hazard symbols used to indicate the risk of<br />

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD):<br />

28 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


3.3 Batteries<br />

P002646A<br />

Figure 15 Electrostatic Discharge Hazard Symbol<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

This section provides information on damage that can be caused to products<br />

containing batteries that are damaged.<br />

3.3.1 Overheated Batteries<br />

Caution!<br />

Do! Check batteries for signs of overheating. The casing surrounding<br />

overheated batteries can be soft <strong>and</strong> warped. Replace damaged batteries<br />

according to instructions.<br />

If it is suspected that batteries are overheated, check the following:<br />

• The internal temperature of the equipment is below +60 C (140 F).<br />

• Batteries have not leaked.<br />

Corrective Actions<br />

1. Replace overheated batteries.<br />

2. Treat leakages from batteries as described in Section 3.3.2 Treating<br />

Hazardous Waste from Leaks on page 29.<br />

3.3.2 Treating Hazardous Waste from Leaks<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

Caution!<br />

Do! Check batteries for acid leakage. Acid can corrode the product. Replace<br />

leaking batteries according to instructions.<br />

29


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

In case of spillage of hazardous substances, there should always be sufficient<br />

absorbers or neutralizing materials available on site. There is a danger of<br />

spillage occurring when installing, removing, replacing or servicing batteries.<br />

The absorbers <strong>and</strong> neutralizing materials must be suitable for the hazardous<br />

substances involved. Typical neutralizing agents are shown inTable 1 on page<br />

30.<br />

Table 1 Typical Neutralizers<br />

Typical Neutralizers Chemical Compound<br />

Baking soda (bicarbonate) NaHCO 3<br />

Sal soda Na 2 CO 3 IOH 2 O<br />

Soda ash Na 2 CO 3<br />

Note: Absorbers <strong>and</strong> neutralizing products will vary, depending on the country<br />

<strong>and</strong> battery manufacturer. Consult the battery manufacturer for specific<br />

details of absorbers <strong>and</strong> neutralizing materials.<br />

3.4 Electrical Installation<br />

This section provides information on ensuring that AC <strong>and</strong> DC powered<br />

products are not damaged due to improper installation.<br />

Caution!<br />

Stop! Do not install or modify AC or DC powered equipment unless you are a<br />

qualified <strong>and</strong> authorized electrician. Improper installation work can seriously<br />

damage the equipment.<br />

3.4.1 Safety Precautions for Working with Electrical Installations<br />

The following precautions must be observed when working with electrical<br />

installations:<br />

1. Ensure that approved circuit breakers or fuses are installed.<br />

2. Ensure that the cables used have a sufficient cross-sectional area in<br />

accordance with product requirements <strong>and</strong> local laws <strong>and</strong> regulations.<br />

3. Ensure that conductors are connected according to the connection diagram.<br />

4. Label the cables correctly.<br />

5. Check the installation work upon completion.<br />

30 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


3.5 Electrostatic Discharge<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

This section provides information <strong>and</strong> instructions on Electrostatic Discharge<br />

(ESD) product safety. ESD is defined below.<br />

ESD A static electric charge accumulates when a body rubs<br />

against clothes, slides against a chair, when shoes rub<br />

against a floor, or when ordinary plastics are h<strong>and</strong>led,<br />

<strong>and</strong> so on. The electrostatic charge can remain for a<br />

considerable length of time <strong>and</strong> is discharged when the<br />

body comes into contact with conductive material.<br />

An ESD wrist strap must be used when working with ESD sensitive components,<br />

even in equipment rooms fitted with ESD protective floor covering. Although<br />

ESD floor covering reduces the risk of ESD, if the wrong type of shoes are<br />

used, or if the person is already charged when they enter the room, the floor<br />

covering in itself does not protect from this, <strong>and</strong> therefore an ESD wrist strap<br />

must be used.<br />

Figure 16 ESD wrist strap<br />

<strong>01</strong>_0250A<br />

The ESD wrist strap contains a resistor with resistance greater than 1 M in the<br />

cable to protect the operator. The resistance value is low enough to discharge<br />

the electrostatic voltage. The ESD wrist strap must be connected to ground.<br />

Instructions for ESD Wrist Strap Use<br />

1. Place the ESD wrist strap around your wrist <strong>and</strong> insert the connector at the<br />

other end to the ground (earth) terminal on the equipment.<br />

2. Always use the wrist strap when <strong>and</strong> where its use is required.<br />

Note: Test the ESD wrist strap regularly.<br />

31


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

3.5.1 H<strong>and</strong>ling Printed Board Assemblies <strong>and</strong> IC Components<br />

Note: Treating all components as if they are ESD sensitive, whether they<br />

have IC components or not, reduces the risk for ESD <strong>and</strong> significantly<br />

reduces the operating time between failure.<br />

Caution!<br />

Stop! This product contains components sensitive to ESD. Use an approved<br />

ESD wrist strap, connected to the product grounding point, to avoid damaging<br />

these components.<br />

Caution!<br />

Do! Always use an approved ESD wrist strap when working with sensitive<br />

equipment. Damage to components mounted on printed board assemblies can<br />

occur if an ESD wrist strap is not used.<br />

3.5.2 Storing <strong>and</strong> Transporting Printed Board Assemblies <strong>and</strong> IC<br />

Components<br />

When storing or transporting printed board assemblies or IC components,<br />

ensure one of the following:<br />

• The item is stored or transported in its original packaging, or in other<br />

anti-ESD material.<br />

• The item is stored or transported in a conductive material, or a special IC<br />

carrier that either short-circuits or insulates all leads of the components.<br />

3.6 Equipment H<strong>and</strong>ling<br />

This section provides information on how to avoid damage to products when<br />

h<strong>and</strong>ling them.<br />

32 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


Do!<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Caution!<br />

Tip risk! This equipment has a high center of gravity without all units installed.<br />

Secure the equipment before opening the door.<br />

Caution!<br />

Stop! Never lift a unit by the cables as this can damage the equipment.<br />

3.7 Ground Connection<br />

This section provides information on product grounding (earthing) safety.<br />

Note: The terms “grounding” <strong>and</strong> “earthing” are synonyms.<br />

Caution!<br />

Do! Products not connected to ground risk being damaged by overvoltage or<br />

overcurrent. Always connect products to ground according to instructions.<br />

3.8 Lightning Protection<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section provides information on protecting products from damage due to<br />

lightning where a lightning protection system is available.<br />

Caution!<br />

Do! Connect products to the lightning protection system to protect the<br />

equipment from transient surges.<br />

33


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

34 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


4 Tools <strong>and</strong> Instruments<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

This section contains lists of all tools <strong>and</strong> instruments recommended for the<br />

complete installation of the <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>.<br />

4.1 Tools for Installation of <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong><br />

Table 2 Basic Tools for Installation<br />

Description Specification<br />

Adjustable spanner 10" –<br />

Drilling machine –<br />

Knife (1)<br />

Measuring tape (1)<br />

Pen –<br />

Screwdrivers (1)<br />

–<br />

6 m<br />

Torx: T20 <strong>and</strong> T30<br />

Screwdrivers 3 mm <strong>and</strong> 5.5 mm<br />

Side cutting pliers (1)<br />

Snip nose pliers –<br />

Socket set (1)<br />

Spirit level (1)<br />

–<br />

10 – 19 mm<br />

Torque wrench 5 – 25 Nm<br />

U wrenches (1)<br />

Wire stripper (1)<br />

–<br />

13 mm, 16 mm, 17 mm, 20 mm <strong>and</strong><br />

22 mm<br />

0.2 – 6 mm 2<br />

(1) Included in Personal Tool Set, Product Number LTT 6<strong>01</strong> 135/1.<br />

Table 3 Special Tools for Installation<br />

4.1.1 Documentation<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

Description Specification Product Number<br />

Crimping tool set for grounding LTT 6<strong>01</strong> 86<br />

Torque wrench for N connector LSS 103 25/1<br />

Torque wrench for TNC connector LTT 6<strong>01</strong> 93<br />

The following documents are required for the installation procedure:<br />

35


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

• Completed <strong>and</strong> approved record prepared during site preparation<br />

• Site Installation Documentation (prepared by the Installation Engineering<br />

department)<br />

St<strong>and</strong>ard Site Material<br />

Installation Instructions<br />

4.2 Equipment for Antenna System Tests<br />

Table 4 Test Equipment for Antenna System Tests<br />

EN/LZT 720 0<strong>01</strong>4<br />

Description Specification Product Number<br />

Antenna Tester<br />

Set<br />

Anritsu Site Master<br />

S331C<br />

LPK 102 1<strong>01</strong>/8<br />

The Anritsu Site Master S331C is recommended for the Antenna System Tests,<br />

but the following Site Master models can still be used if available: S251A/B <strong>and</strong><br />

S331A/B for GSM 800/900/1800/1900 antenna systems.<br />

4.2.1 Documentation<br />

The following documents are required for the antenna system tests:<br />

• Site Installation Documentation<br />

• A test record<br />

For more detailed information on the Anritsu Site Master, see:<br />

Anritsu Site Master User’s<br />

<strong>Guide</strong> (included in Antenna<br />

Tester Set)<br />

Note: Instructions for Site Master models S251A/B <strong>and</strong> S331A/B for GSM<br />

800/900/1800/1900 antenna systems are not included in this document.<br />

When using any of these models ensure that all necessary accessories<br />

are included. See:<br />

St<strong>and</strong>ard Tools <strong>and</strong> Equipment<br />

Catalogue<br />

LZT 720 0<strong>01</strong>3<br />

36 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


4.3 Equipment for Site Installation Tests<br />

Table 5 Test Equipment for Site Installation Tests<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Description Specification Product Number<br />

Fluke 79 III Multimeter LPK 102 024/3<br />

OMT Kit OMT Kit <strong>and</strong> SW cable NTM 2<strong>01</strong> 2289/5<br />

Torx T20 (1)<br />

Torx screwdriver –<br />

(1) Included in Personal Tool Set, product number LTT 6<strong>01</strong> 135/1.<br />

4.3.1 Documentation<br />

The following documents are required for the site installation tests:<br />

• A completed test record from antenna system tests<br />

• A test record for site installation tests<br />

OMT User’s Manual (included<br />

in OMT Kit )<br />

4.4 Equipment for <strong>RBS</strong> Site Integration<br />

Table 6 Test Equipment for <strong>RBS</strong> Site Integration<br />

EN/LZN 720 00<strong>01</strong><br />

Description Specification Product Number<br />

Loop forward/<br />

backward board<br />

4.4.1 Documentation<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

Transmission test board LPY 107 757/1<br />

TEMS Kit GSM 800/1900 FAB 8<strong>01</strong> 2524<br />

TEMS Kit GSM 900/1800/1900 FAB 8<strong>01</strong> 2523<br />

The following document is required for the <strong>RBS</strong> site integration:<br />

TEMS Investigation GSM<br />

Manual (included in TEMS Kit)<br />

LZT 108 2684<br />

37


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

4.5 Equipment for Maintenance<br />

Table 7 Basic Tools for Maintenance<br />

Description Specification<br />

Adjustable spanner 10" –<br />

Knife (1)<br />

Screwdrivers (1)<br />

–<br />

Torx: T20 <strong>and</strong> T30<br />

Screwdrivers 3 mm <strong>and</strong> 5.5 mm<br />

Side cutting pliers (1)<br />

Snip nose pliers –<br />

Socket set (1)<br />

Torque wrench (1)<br />

U wrenches (1)<br />

Wire stripper (1)<br />

–<br />

–<br />

5 – 25 Nm<br />

13 mm, 16 mm <strong>and</strong> 17 mm, 20 mm<br />

<strong>and</strong> 22 mm<br />

0.2 – 6 mm 2<br />

(1) Included in Personal Tool Kit, product number LTT 6<strong>01</strong> 135/1.<br />

Table 8 Special Tools for Maintenance<br />

4.5.1 Documentation<br />

Description Specification Product Number<br />

Fluke 79 III Multimeter LPK 102 024/3<br />

OMT Kit – NTM 2<strong>01</strong> 2289/5<br />

Torque wrench for N connectors LSS 103 25/1<br />

Torque wrench for TNC connectors LTT 6<strong>01</strong> 93<br />

The following documents are required for the maintenance work:<br />

4.6 Kit Specifications<br />

OMT User’s Manual (included<br />

in OMT Kit)<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong><br />

2109, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

Hardware Reference Manual<br />

For a specification of all required kits, see:<br />

EN/LZN 720 00<strong>01</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0058<br />

38 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

St<strong>and</strong>ard Tools <strong>and</strong> Equipment<br />

Catalogue<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0<strong>01</strong>3<br />

39


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

40 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


5 Installation of <strong>RBS</strong><br />

5.1 Introduction<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

This document describes how to install the <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>.<br />

Target Group<br />

The target group for this instruction is personnel involved in the installation of<br />

an <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

5.2 Preconditions<br />

This section provides preconditions that must be met before starting the<br />

installation work.<br />

Note: Specific preconditions exist for wall <strong>and</strong> pole mounting.<br />

Documentation<br />

This section presents additional documents required for the installation<br />

procedure.<br />

Ensure that the following documents are available:<br />

• Completed <strong>and</strong> approved record prepared during site preparation<br />

• Site Installation Documentation (prepared by the Installation Engineering<br />

department)<br />

General Preconditions<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

St<strong>and</strong>ard Site Material Installation Instructions EN/LZT 720 0<strong>01</strong>4<br />

Before starting site work, ensure the following:<br />

• Site access permission received<br />

• Ordered <strong>RBS</strong>, equipment, specified tools <strong>and</strong> other necessary facilities<br />

have been delivered<br />

• Site power is available<br />

• Site Grounding Point is available<br />

41


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Note: The terms earthing <strong>and</strong> grounding are synonymous.<br />

• Transmission line from the BSC is available<br />

• During outdoor installation, protection for the <strong>RBS</strong> is available in case of<br />

bad weather<br />

Note: After installation, if the surrounding temperature changes between hot<br />

<strong>and</strong> cold, then to avoid humidity damage the <strong>RBS</strong> must not be left<br />

without power for more than 48 hours.<br />

To switch on the <strong>RBS</strong>, see Chapter Site Installation Tests:<br />

If any of the above preconditions cannot be complied with, then contact the site<br />

supervisor or person responsible for the activity that has been missed.<br />

Additional Preconditions for Wall-Mounted <strong>RBS</strong><br />

Before installing the <strong>RBS</strong> on a wall, ensure that the following preconditions<br />

are met:<br />

• The type of fasteners are suitable for the kind of wall material on which<br />

the <strong>RBS</strong> is to be mounted<br />

• The contact surfaces on the Mounting Base Unit (MBU) are supported by<br />

the wall. If not, then a wall bracket is required<br />

If any of the above preconditions cannot be complied with, then contact the site<br />

supervisor or person responsible for activity that has been missed.<br />

Additional Preconditions for Pole-Mounted <strong>RBS</strong><br />

Before installing the <strong>RBS</strong> on a pole, ensure that the following preconditions<br />

are met:<br />

• The pole must have the required diameter 60 – 114 mm<br />

• A wall bracket is available<br />

• A mast fixture set is available<br />

If any of the above preconditions cannot be complied with, then contact the site<br />

supervisor or person responsible for activity that has been missed.<br />

5.3 Torque Settings<br />

This section presents the recommended torque values to be used when<br />

installing the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

The tools needed for the installation are found in Chapter Tools <strong>and</strong> Instruments.<br />

42 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


Table 9 Recommended Torque<br />

Dimension<br />

Torque<br />

Ncm Nm lbf-in lbf-ft<br />

M3 110 +/- 7 – 9.7 +/- 0.6 – –<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Notes<br />

M3 80 +/- 7 – 7.1 +/- 0.6 – Reduced torque for<br />

plastic covers<br />

M4 260+/- 15 – 23.1 +/-<br />

1.3<br />

M4 170 +/- 15 – 15.1 +/-<br />

1.3<br />

– –<br />

M6 – 8.8 +/- 0.5 – 6.5 +/- 0.4 –<br />

M8 – 21 +/- 1.3 – 15.5 +/- 1 –<br />

M10 – 41 +/- 2.5 – 30.2 +/-<br />

1.8<br />

5.4 Installation Procedure<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

– Reduced torque for<br />

captive screws<br />

This section describes the installation procedure for the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

–<br />

43


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Figure 17 The <strong>RBS</strong> Installation Process<br />

44 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


5.4.1 Unpacking <strong>RBS</strong><br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Unpack the <strong>RBS</strong> on-site. To avoid damage, the <strong>RBS</strong> should not be unpacked<br />

elsewhere <strong>and</strong> then transported to site.<br />

Caution!<br />

Stop! This product contains components sensitive to ESD. Use an approved<br />

ESD wrist strap, connected to the product grounding point, to avoid damaging<br />

these components.<br />

In order to avoid damage to components due to electrostatic discharges during<br />

unpacking, personnel must not come in contact with the connectors of the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

Ensure that the correct material has been delivered. If the material is damaged,<br />

complain immediately to the supervisor or the transport company.<br />

5.4.2 Installing the Wall Bracket<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

Note: This section is only applicable for walls with very rough surfaces or<br />

when the <strong>RBS</strong> is to be mounted on a pole.<br />

This section describes how to install the wall bracket.<br />

The wall bracket is for use as a complement to the mounting interface of the<br />

Mounting Base Unit (MBU). Typical applications are rough surfaces <strong>and</strong> other<br />

conditions where the mounting interface for the MBU is not flat. The plate must<br />

also be used if the <strong>RBS</strong> is to be installed on a pole. See applicable section<br />

below.<br />

45


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

5.4.2.1 Installing the Wall Bracket on a Wall (Alternative)<br />

1. Place the drilling template in the position where the <strong>RBS</strong> is to be<br />

located.<br />

2. Use a spirit level to check that the drilling template is horizontal.<br />

3. Mark the position of the holes to<br />

be drilled.<br />

Note: The wall bracket must not<br />

be used as a drilling template,<br />

to avoid damaging the rust<br />

protection surface.<br />

4. Remove the template <strong>and</strong> drill the holes for the fasteners.<br />

5. Install the wall bracket <strong>and</strong><br />

secure it in position with all the<br />

screws provided.<br />

UP<br />

DRILL TEMPLATE FOR WALL BRACKET<br />

6. Loosen the four nuts, on which the MBU is to be hung, until only a few<br />

threads remain exposed.<br />

5.4.2.2 Installing the Wall Bracket on a Pole (Alternative)<br />

1. Choose the appropriate holes. See Figure below.<br />

46 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

Recomended holes<br />

Alternate holes<br />

UP<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>50B<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>51A


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

B<br />

A<br />

A<br />

UP<br />

Figure 18 Installation Alternatives<br />

A Holes used for vertical poles<br />

B<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

A B<br />

B Holes used for horizontal poles<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>52A<br />

2. Ensure that the washers are mounted correctly <strong>and</strong> attach the two clamps<br />

with the screws <strong>and</strong> washers. See Figure below.<br />

Note: Ensure that the recess is attached in the correct direction.<br />

Figure 19 Fastening Clamps to the Wall Bracket<br />

UP<br />

Recess<br />

3. Position the wall bracket on the pole <strong>and</strong> mount the clamps, tightening<br />

the screws alternately to avoid bending them. Ensure that the washers<br />

are mounted correctly.<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>71A<br />

47


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Recess<br />

Figure 20 Installing the Wall Bracket on the Pole<br />

5.4.3 Installing the MBU<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>70B<br />

This section describes how to install the Mounting Base Unit (MBU) on a wall or<br />

wall bracket.<br />

5.4.3.1 Installing the MBU on a Wall<br />

1. Place the drilling template in the position where the <strong>RBS</strong> is to be<br />

situated.<br />

2. Use a spirit level to check that the drilling template is horizontal.<br />

3. Mark the position of the<br />

applicable holes to be drilled.<br />

Note: To avoid damaging the<br />

rust protection surface, the MBU<br />

must not be used as a drilling<br />

template.<br />

DRILL TEMPLATE FOR WALL BRACKET<br />

4. Remove the template <strong>and</strong> drill holes for the fasteners most suitable<br />

for the wall material.<br />

5. Insert the fasteners <strong>and</strong> tighten them, remembering to leave enough<br />

threads protruding to hang the MBU on.<br />

48 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

UP<br />

Recomended holes<br />

Alternate holes<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0234B


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

6. Hang the MBU on the bolts,<br />

applying just enough downward<br />

pressure to ensure that the<br />

screws fit in the keyholes.<br />

7. Tighten the four bolts.<br />

8. Connect site earthing to the<br />

MBU.<br />

Note: In configurations with<br />

more than one RRU <strong>and</strong> a 2-wire<br />

DC Supply, an extra earthing<br />

cable must be connected<br />

between the <strong>RBS</strong>s.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

8 - 9 mm<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>20A<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>90B<br />

49


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

5.4.3.2 Installing the MBU on a Wall Bracket<br />

1. Install the MBU on the four<br />

screws situated on the wall<br />

bracket. Ensure that the<br />

fastening screws are properly<br />

fitted in the key holes.<br />

2. Use a spirit level to check that the MBU is positioned vertically.<br />

3. If the MBU is not in a vertical<br />

position the then inclination can<br />

be corrected by adjusting the<br />

four distance nuts on the wall<br />

bracket. To do this, the MBU<br />

must be removed. Leave the<br />

locking nuts on the fastening<br />

screws.<br />

Note: Do not loosen the inner<br />

nuts. The inner nuts secure<br />

the fastening screws to the wall<br />

bracket.<br />

Locking Nut<br />

Fastening screws<br />

Distance Nut<br />

Inner Nut<br />

50 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>80A<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>79A


4. When the wall bracket is<br />

correctly adjusted, put back the<br />

MBU <strong>and</strong> tighten the four locking<br />

nuts.<br />

5. Connect site earthing to the<br />

MBU.<br />

5.4.4 Connecting Power<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

Note: In configurations with<br />

more than one RRU <strong>and</strong> a 2-wire<br />

DC Supply, an extra earthing<br />

cable must be connected<br />

between the <strong>RBS</strong>s.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

8 - 9 mm<br />

This section describes how to connect the power cable(s) to the <strong>RBS</strong>. The<br />

section includes instructions for both AC <strong>and</strong> DC cables.<br />

Danger!<br />

Electric shock risk. Avoid both direct <strong>and</strong> indirect contact with parts connected<br />

to mains power as this is likely to be fatal. Switch off the mains power before<br />

starting work.<br />

Danger!<br />

Improper electrical installation may cause fire or electric shock that is likely to<br />

be fatal. Only a qualified <strong>and</strong> authorized electrician is permitted to install or<br />

modify electrical installations.<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>90B<br />

51


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Note: Protective Earth must be connected to the earth terminal when<br />

connecting power supply.<br />

The Protective Earth terminal is located in the MBU, indicated by the earth<br />

symbol, see the Figure below.<br />

Figure 21 Protective Earth<br />

Note: Protective Earth connection is essential.<br />

1. Remove the MBU cover from the MBU.<br />

2. Cut the cable to the appropriate length.<br />

3. Remove the cable insulation <strong>and</strong><br />

strip the conductors.<br />

52 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0308A


4. Mount all cable inlet parts.<br />

5. Route the cable into the inlet<br />

<strong>and</strong> tighten the cable gl<strong>and</strong>.<br />

5.4.4.1 Connecting AC Mains<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

This section describes how to connect AC Mains cable (if applicable).<br />

1. Ensure that the site power is turned off.<br />

2. Connect the AC cable to the<br />

dedicated terminals.<br />

RRU<br />

1<br />

0<br />

AC<br />

1<br />

DC<br />

1<br />

0 0<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0309A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0310A<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>19A<br />

53


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

3. Ensure that the protective earth<br />

is properly connected.<br />

L L<br />

L = Line<br />

PE = Protective Earth<br />

4. If DC is not to be connected, put back the MBU cover onto the MBU.<br />

5.4.4.2 Connecting DC Supply<br />

This section describes how to connect the DC supply cable (if applicable).<br />

1. Ensure that the site power is turned off.<br />

2. Connect the DC cable to the<br />

dedicated terminals. If 2-wire is<br />

used, set the ground selector to<br />

2-W.<br />

PE = Protective Earth<br />

54 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

2-W<br />

PE<br />

PE<br />

48 V<br />

48 V_RTN<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>81A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0511B


3. If 3-wire is used, set the ground<br />

selector to 3-W.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

PE = Protective Earth<br />

4. Ensure that the protective earth is properly connected.<br />

5. Put back the MBU cover.<br />

5.4.5 Replacing the Flash Card (If Applicable)<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

3-W<br />

PE<br />

48 V<br />

48 V_RTN<br />

This section describes how to replace the existing flash card in the IXU. This is<br />

done only if a flash card, preloaded with site specific data, is provided.<br />

For information about preloading the flash card, see Chapter Maintenance.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0510B<br />

55


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

1. Remove the cover. Remove the<br />

existing flash card by pulling up<br />

the adjacent black plastic lever<br />

<strong>and</strong> then pushing it down to eject<br />

the card.<br />

2. Insert the new flash card, push<br />

it in, <strong>and</strong> reset the release lever<br />

(ensuring that the card is in<br />

position).<br />

3. Put back the cover.<br />

5.4.6 Installing the IXU<br />

Flash<br />

Card<br />

This section describes how to install the Interface <strong>and</strong> Switching Unit (IXU)<br />

on the MBU.<br />

Note: This section is valid only for the master <strong>RBS</strong>. IXU is not used in<br />

extension <strong>RBS</strong>s.<br />

56 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0366A<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>57A


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

1. Hook the IXU onto the MBU, <strong>and</strong><br />

secure it with the two screws<br />

under the MBU.<br />

2. Connect the IXU AC/DC cable.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

3. Loosen the eight screws on the IXU <strong>and</strong> open the cover.<br />

4. Connect the Y link cable to the<br />

applicable connection port on<br />

the IXU, see Table below.<br />

Y link Y link Y link<br />

1-4 5-8 9-12<br />

Y link Y link Y link<br />

1-4 5-8 9-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0365B<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>74B<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>55B<br />

57


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Note: Dummy plugs must be inserted in the unused cable inlets.<br />

Table 10 Y link Connection Port<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> Connection Port<br />

RRU 1 Y link 1 – 4<br />

RRU 2 Y link 5 – 8<br />

RRU 3 Y link 9 – 12<br />

Connecting External Cables<br />

This section describes how to connect different external equipment, for example<br />

MINI LINK or transmission, see Figure below.<br />

Note: To simplify the cable connections, the connection frame on the IXU<br />

can be removed.<br />

EXT.ALARM 1-4 -48V<br />

LINK<br />

Figure 22 Connection Ports on the IXU<br />

PORT A PORT C PORT B PORT D<br />

58 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0211A


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

1. Remove the connection frame<br />

from the IXU.<br />

2. Remove the cable gl<strong>and</strong> parts<br />

<strong>and</strong> remove the sealing insert.<br />

Route the cable through the<br />

cable gl<strong>and</strong> parts <strong>and</strong> strip the<br />

cable insulation. Cut the cable<br />

screen according to the figure.<br />

3. Strip the conductors <strong>and</strong> fold<br />

back the cable screen over the<br />

inner part of the cable gl<strong>and</strong>.<br />

4. Insert the cable into the most<br />

suitable inlet <strong>and</strong> tighten the<br />

cable gl<strong>and</strong>.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

10 mm<br />

10 mm<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>26A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0463B<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0464B<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0512A<br />

59


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

5. Strip the conductors <strong>and</strong> loosen<br />

the termination blocks. Fasten<br />

the conductors by inserting a<br />

screwdriver in the upper slot.<br />

6. If applicable, connect the<br />

external alarm cables. See also<br />

Figure 22 on page 58.<br />

7. If applicable, connect the −48 V<br />

LINK cable. See also Figure 22<br />

on page 58.<br />

Max 3.5 mm<br />

EXT.ALARMS<br />

EXT. Alarm. 1<br />

EXT. ALARM.1. RTN<br />

EXT. Alarm. 2<br />

EXT. ALARM.2. RTN<br />

EXT. Alarm. 3<br />

EXT. ALARM.3. RTN<br />

EXT. Alarm. 4<br />

EXT. ALARM.4. RTN<br />

- 48 V<br />

LINK<br />

60 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

48 V<br />

48 V_RTN<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0229A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0209A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0514A


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

8. Connect the applicable<br />

transmission cables. The<br />

figure shows port A, but is also<br />

valid for port C, B, <strong>and</strong> D.<br />

For information on how to<br />

connect <strong>and</strong> earth PCM lines,<br />

see:<br />

• Page 62 for 75 coaxial cable<br />

• Page 63 for 100/120 twisted<br />

pair<br />

9. Put back the connection frame.<br />

10. Select transmission impedance<br />

for each port, using the selector<br />

switches on the underside of the<br />

Transmission Interface Model<br />

(TIM).<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Port A<br />

100/<br />

120 75<br />

11. Close the IXU cover <strong>and</strong> fasten the screws.<br />

TIM<br />

PORT A<br />

PORT. A. IN. P. LINE<br />

PORT. A. IN. N. LINE<br />

PORT. A. IN. GND<br />

PORT. A. OUT. P. LINE<br />

PORT. A. OUT. N. LINE<br />

PORT. A. OUT. GND<br />

Port A Port C Port B Port D<br />

100/<br />

120 75<br />

100/<br />

120 75<br />

100/<br />

120 75<br />

100/<br />

120 75<br />

Port C<br />

100/<br />

120 75<br />

Port B<br />

100/<br />

120 75<br />

Port D<br />

P<strong>01</strong>02<strong>01</strong>0A<br />

100/<br />

120 75<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>54D<br />

61


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Connecting PCM Coaxial 75<br />

1. Connect the inner conductors to<br />

P.LINE <strong>and</strong> the outer conductors<br />

to N.LINE.<br />

PORT A<br />

PORT. A. IN. P. LINE<br />

PORT. A. IN. N. LINE<br />

PORT. A. IN. GND<br />

PORT. A. OUT. P. LINE<br />

PORT. A. OUT. N. LINE<br />

PORT. A. OUT. GND<br />

2. Connect the capacitor included between IN.N.LINE <strong>and</strong> IN.GND.<br />

3. Connect the jumper wire included between OUT.N.LINE <strong>and</strong> OUT.GND.<br />

Figure 23 Connecting PCM Coaxial 75<br />

P<strong>01</strong>02<strong>01</strong>0A<br />

62 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1354A


Connecting PCM Twisted Pair 100/120<br />

1. Connect the twisted pairs to<br />

P.LINE <strong>and</strong> N.LINE.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

PORT A<br />

PORT. A. IN. P. LINE<br />

PORT. A. IN. N. LINE<br />

PORT. A. IN. GND<br />

PORT. A. OUT. P. LINE<br />

PORT. A. OUT. N. LINE<br />

PORT. A. OUT. GND<br />

2. Earth the cables according to the following instruction:<br />

Inner <strong>and</strong> outer<br />

shield<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

Connect the inner shield to the terminator block, <strong>and</strong><br />

the outer shield to the cable gl<strong>and</strong>, see Figure 24 on<br />

page 63.<br />

Outer shield only Fit the shield to the cable gl<strong>and</strong>, see Figure 25 on<br />

page 64.<br />

Figure 24 Earthing Inner <strong>and</strong> Outer Shield<br />

P<strong>01</strong>02<strong>01</strong>0A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1352A<br />

63


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Figure 25 Earthing Outer Shield Only<br />

5.4.7 Installing the RRU<br />

This section describes how to install the Remote Radio Unit (RRU).<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1353A<br />

Note: To avoid damage, do not place the RRU on its connectors, see Figure<br />

below.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0470A<br />

Figure 26 Do Not Place the RRU on its Connectors<br />

Note: Do not install any equipment on the RRU before mounting it on the MBU.<br />

64 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Caution!<br />

The equipment is heavy. Lifting the equipment without the aid of a lifting device<br />

can cause injury.<br />

1. Hang the RRU onto the upper<br />

hinge. Position the lower hinge<br />

<strong>and</strong> tighten the screw.<br />

2. Remove the protection cover under the RRU.<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>22C<br />

65


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

3. Open the left side cover on the<br />

RRU, connect the Y link cabl,e<br />

<strong>and</strong> close the cover. Connect<br />

the AC/DC cable.<br />

4. Close the RRU using the clasps.<br />

5.4.8 Connecting Earth Cables<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>73B<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>25A<br />

This section describes how to connect the earth cables to the RRU <strong>and</strong> the IXU.<br />

1. Connect the earth cables from<br />

the earthing point to both IXU<br />

(master) <strong>and</strong> RRU.<br />

66 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0228A


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Note: If an Omni Antenna is to be installed on the RRU, the RRU earthing<br />

cable must be connected after the omni antenna bracket has been<br />

mounted.<br />

5.4.9 Installing the Fan Unit (If Applicable)<br />

This section describes how to install the fan unit.<br />

1. Install the fan on top of the RRU<br />

<strong>and</strong> fasten the three screws.<br />

2. Connect the power cable to the<br />

RRU.<br />

5.4.10 Installing RXBP (If Applicable)<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes how to install the Receiver B<strong>and</strong> Pass filter (RXBP) on<br />

the RRU <strong>and</strong> how to connect the cables.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0496A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0543A<br />

67


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

1. Install the RXBP on the RRU<br />

<strong>and</strong> tighten the screws.<br />

2. Connect the first cable from<br />

connection port RXBP 1 on<br />

the RXBP to connection port<br />

RXBP 1 on the RRU. Connect<br />

the other cable from connection<br />

port RXBP 2 on the RXBP to<br />

RXBP 2 on the RRU.<br />

RXBP<br />

RX 2<br />

RX 1<br />

RXBP 2<br />

RXBP 1<br />

RXBP<br />

RX 2<br />

RXBP 2<br />

RX 1 RXBP1<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>75A<br />

RXBP 1 RXBP 2<br />

3. Connect the RX antenna cables to connection port RX 1 <strong>and</strong> RX 2 on<br />

the RXBP, <strong>and</strong> tighten with the appropriate torque wrench. See Table<br />

9 on page 43.<br />

For more information about antenna connections, see:<br />

Site Installation Documentation<br />

5.4.11 Installing the MCB (If Applicable)<br />

This section describes how to install the Multicasting Box (MCB) on the RRU<br />

<strong>and</strong> how to connect the cables.<br />

68 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>72A


5.4.11.1 Combining Function<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

1. Install the MCB to connector<br />

TX(/RX) 2 on the RRU. Fasten it<br />

with the two short screws.<br />

2. Connect the first cable between<br />

connection port TX(/RX) on<br />

the MCB <strong>and</strong> TX(/RX) 1 on the<br />

RRU. Connect the second cable<br />

between connection port ANT 2<br />

<strong>and</strong> LOAD on the MCB.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

ANT 1<br />

ANT 2<br />

TX(/RX)<br />

MCB<br />

TX(/RX)<br />

LOAD<br />

ANT 2 LOAD<br />

3. Connect the antenna cable to connection port ANT 1.<br />

For more information about antenna connections, see:<br />

Site Installation Documentation<br />

ANT 1<br />

ANT 2<br />

TX(/RX)<br />

MCB<br />

TX(/RX)<br />

LOAD<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>87A<br />

TX (/RX) 1<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>88A<br />

69


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

4. Strap the cables using the<br />

appropriate cable tie anchor.<br />

5. Install the MCB protection cover<br />

under the RRU <strong>and</strong> fasten the<br />

two screws.<br />

70 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2173A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0370A


5.4.11.2 Multicasting Function<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

1. Remove the protection cover<br />

from connector TX(/RX) 2 on<br />

the RRU <strong>and</strong> install the MCB to<br />

it. Fasten it with the two short<br />

screws.<br />

2. Connect the first cable between<br />

connection port TX(/RX) on the<br />

MCB <strong>and</strong> TX(/RX) 1 on the RRU.<br />

Cover connection port LOAD<br />

with protection cover removed<br />

from connection port TX(/RX) 2.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

ANT 1<br />

ANT 2<br />

TX(/RX)<br />

MCB<br />

TX(/RX)<br />

LOAD<br />

Protection cover<br />

3. Connect the antenna cables to connection ports ANT 1 <strong>and</strong> ANT 2.<br />

For more information about antenna connections, see:<br />

Site Installation Documentation<br />

ANT 1<br />

ANT 2<br />

TX(/RX)<br />

MCB<br />

TX(/RX)<br />

LOAD<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>87A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0519A<br />

71


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

4. Strap the cables using the<br />

appropriate cable tie anchor.<br />

5. Install the MCB protection cover<br />

under the RRU, <strong>and</strong> fasten the<br />

two screws.<br />

Note: Ensure that cables are<br />

not squeezed or damaged by<br />

the cover.<br />

72 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2173A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0370A


5.4.11.3 Splitting/Highway Function<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

1. Connect the cable between<br />

connection port TX(/RX) <strong>and</strong><br />

LOAD on both the MCBs.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

2. Remove the protection covers from connector TX(/RX) 1 <strong>and</strong> TX(/RX) 2<br />

on the RRU. Install the MCBs to the connection ports. Fasten each of<br />

them with two short screws.<br />

ANT 1<br />

ANT 2<br />

TX(/RX)<br />

MCB<br />

TX(/RX)<br />

LOAD<br />

3. Connect the antenna cables to connection ports ANT 1 <strong>and</strong> ANT 2<br />

on both MCBs.<br />

For more information about antenna connections, see:<br />

Site Installation Documentation<br />

ANT 1<br />

ANT 2<br />

TX(/RX)<br />

MCB<br />

TX(/RX)<br />

LOAD<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0564A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0558B<br />

73


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

4. Strap the cables using the<br />

appropriate cable tie anchor.<br />

5. Install the MCB protection cover<br />

under the RRU <strong>and</strong> fasten the<br />

two screws.<br />

5.4.12 Installing the Integral Omni Antenna (If Applicable)<br />

This section describes how to install the integral Omni Antenna on the RRU.<br />

1. Remove the RRU earthing cable if it has been previously installed. See<br />

Section 5.4.8 Connecting Earth Cables on page 66<br />

74 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2173A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0370A


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

2. Mount the Omni Antenna bracket on top of the RRU, <strong>and</strong> tighten the captive<br />

screws.<br />

3. Install the RRU earthing cable.<br />

Figure 27 Mounting the Antenna Bracket<br />

4. Attach the antenna on the bracket. Use the two captive screws on each<br />

side of the antenna.<br />

5. Route <strong>and</strong> fasten the antenna cable with two clamps on the right side of<br />

the RRU.<br />

6. Secure the antenna with the sunshield, see Section 5.4.16 on page 77.<br />

Figure 28 Installing the Omni Antenna<br />

<br />

<br />

75


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

5.4.13 Installing the Integral Sector Antenna (If Applicable)<br />

This section describes how to install a Sector Antenna on the RRU.<br />

1. Attach the Sector Antenna on the front of the RRU. Secure it with four<br />

screws.<br />

Figure 29 Installing the Sector Antenna<br />

5.4.14 Connecting <strong>RBS</strong> Antenna Cables<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1293A<br />

This section describes how to connect antenna cables when a MCB or integral<br />

antenna is not used.<br />

1. Connect the <strong>RBS</strong> jumpers to connection port TX(/RX) 1 <strong>and</strong> TX(/RX) 2,<br />

<strong>and</strong> tighten with the appropriate torque wrench. See Table 9 on page<br />

43.<br />

76 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0579B


2. Strap the cables using the<br />

appropriate cable tie anchor.<br />

3. Install the protective cover under<br />

the RRU.<br />

5.4.15 Testing the Installation<br />

The <strong>RBS</strong> is now ready for the site installation tests.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

The site installation tests should be performed directly after the completion of<br />

the <strong>RBS</strong> installation, see Chapter Site Installation Tests.<br />

After the installation <strong>and</strong> integration testing is completed, return to Section<br />

5.4.16 on page 77.<br />

5.4.16 Installing the Sunshields<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes how to install the sunshields.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2173A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0565A<br />

77


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Different sunshields are used depending on whether or not components are<br />

installed on the front of the RRU.<br />

1. If the fan unit or integral Omni Antenna are not used, install the top sunshield<br />

<strong>and</strong> fasten two screws either to the RRU or the IXU. See Figure below.<br />

2. If the fan unit is used, install the fan cover on top of the RRU. See Figure<br />

below.<br />

78 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0232C<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0515A


3. Attach the front sunshield to the left sunshield.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

4. Close the front sunshield <strong>and</strong> attach it to the top shield (fan cover) <strong>and</strong> to<br />

the right sunshield.<br />

5. Lock the shield.<br />

5.4.17 Performing Concluding Routines<br />

This section describes the routines to be completed before leaving the site.<br />

Note: Ericsson strongly advises that when cleaning up after installing the<br />

<strong>RBS</strong>, the personnel performing the installation pay particular attention<br />

to the environment. Primarily, recycle all waste materials that can be<br />

recycled <strong>and</strong> sort waste so that it can be disposed of according to<br />

local regulations.<br />

Table 11 Objects to Be Recycled or Disposed of After <strong>RBS</strong> Installation<br />

Item Sort or Recycle?<br />

Cable insulation from<br />

crimping, brazing or<br />

welding<br />

Packing chips<br />

Foam<br />

Polystyrene<br />

Bubble plastic<br />

Cable tie clippings<br />

Sorted with plastics<br />

Paper <strong>and</strong> wood Paper recycling<br />

Waste metal from cable<br />

ladders<br />

Pieces of cable<br />

Nuts, bolts, washers <strong>and</strong><br />

screws<br />

Recycled or sorted as metals<br />

Note: All packing material should be recycled, <strong>and</strong> shock absorbers disposed<br />

of, in accordance with local recycling regulations.<br />

5.4.17.1 Updating the Site Installation Documentation<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

1. Check the Site Installation Documentation for deviations from the<br />

installation.<br />

2. Update the documents with the changes that apply.<br />

3. Send the documents to the person responsible for Site Installation<br />

Engineering.<br />

79


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

5.4.17.2 Performing Final Checks<br />

Before leaving the site, make sure that the following tasks have been completed:<br />

Table 12 Checklist<br />

Check the following: OK<br />

1. All cables are properly routed <strong>and</strong> connected.<br />

2. All sunshields are properly installed.<br />

3. The site is clear of waste materials.<br />

4. The Site Installation Documentation is updated.<br />

5. The modified Site Installation Documentation has been<br />

h<strong>and</strong>ed over to the person responsible for the site.<br />

6. The <strong>RBS</strong> is powered up if the surrounding temperature<br />

changes between hot <strong>and</strong> cold <strong>and</strong> the <strong>RBS</strong> installation is not<br />

completed within 48 hours. (1)<br />

(1) See Chapter Site Installation Tests.<br />

80 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


6 Antenna System Tests<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

This chapter describes the tests, Distance To Fault (DTF) <strong>and</strong> St<strong>and</strong>ing Wave<br />

Ratio (SWR), used to verify the antenna system installation. The tests also<br />

include measuring the feeder length to calculate feeder system loss <strong>and</strong> delay.<br />

The tests described are valid for GSM 800/900/1800/1900 passive antenna<br />

systems for <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>.<br />

Equipment for Antenna System Tests<br />

The Anritsu Site Master S331C is recommended for the tests described in<br />

this chapter.<br />

The following Site Master models can be used, if available:<br />

• S120A for GSM 800/900<br />

• S235A for GSM 1800/1900<br />

• S251A/B for GSM 800/900/1800/1900<br />

• S331A/B for GSM 800/900/1800/1900<br />

Note: Instructions for these older instruments are not included in this manual.<br />

81


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

External Power<br />

Serial Interface<br />

Battery Charging<br />

Soft Keys<br />

Mode<br />

MODE<br />

Frequency/<br />

Distance<br />

Amplitude<br />

Sweep<br />

FREQ/DIST<br />

AMPLITUDE SWEEP<br />

Site Master<br />

12.5-15V DC<br />

2<br />

3 4<br />

5 6<br />

7 8<br />

9 0<br />

Save setup<br />

Limit<br />

Save display<br />

On/Off<br />

Print<br />

Figure 30 Anritsu Site Master S331C<br />

RF Out/Reflection 50W<br />

Back Lighting<br />

Start cal<br />

Recall display<br />

Contrast<br />

Escape/Clear<br />

Auto scale<br />

Up/Down arrow<br />

Recall setup<br />

Marker<br />

Enter<br />

Run/hold<br />

System Menu<br />

P009531B<br />

The keys mentioned in the instructions in this chapter are shown in the figure<br />

above. In the instructions a ‘‘key’’ is marked with the text describing its function,<br />

while a ‘‘soft key’’ has its text displayed on the screen (next to the key).<br />

For more detailed information on the Antritsu Site Master, see:<br />

Preconditions<br />

Anritsu Site Master User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Before starting the tests, ensure the following:<br />

• For the DTF Tests, that the installation of feeder cables with jumpers is<br />

complete prior to testing<br />

• For the SWR Test, that the connection of antennas <strong>and</strong> feeder cables with<br />

jumpers is complete prior to testing. It is recommended not to cover the<br />

connectors with sealing tape until all testing is complete.<br />

• A test record for recording the test results is available<br />

82 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


Work Process for Antenna System Tests<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

This section describes the order in which to perform the tests. When the exit<br />

criteria for each procedure are fulfilled, the tester enters the results in the test<br />

record, then returns to the work process for the next step.<br />

Checking the Installation<br />

Calibrating the Antenna Tester<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0285B<br />

Performing DTF Tests<br />

Naming a DTF Measurement<br />

Calculating the<br />

Feeder Attenuation<br />

Calculating the<br />

Feeder Delay<br />

Performing SWR Test<br />

Naming an<br />

SWR Measurement<br />

Performing<br />

Concluding Routines<br />

Figure 31 Work Process for Antenna System Tests<br />

The work order can be altered or tests can be removed due to local<br />

circumstances. In this event, an investigation of the consequences must<br />

be carried out. If the work order is changed or tests are removed, then the<br />

department responsible for this manual must be notified <strong>and</strong> agree to changes,<br />

or the responsibility is automatically transferred to the person making the<br />

decision.<br />

6.1 Checking the Installation<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes how to check that the antenna system installation is<br />

correct.<br />

83


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

1. Verify that the installation is installed in accordance with the Site Installation<br />

Documentation.<br />

2. Check that all cables or connectors are free of damage, <strong>and</strong> that all cables<br />

(feeders <strong>and</strong> jumpers) are properly marked.<br />

3. Check that all connectors are properly connected <strong>and</strong> tightened.<br />

4. Check that the bend radius specification of all feeders <strong>and</strong> jumpers has<br />

not been exceeded.<br />

5. Verify the antenna directions against the Site Installation Documentation.<br />

Consider magnetic influences from nearby metallic objects <strong>and</strong> deviations<br />

from magnetic north when using the compass.<br />

6. Check that the correct cable is connected to the correct antenna.<br />

7. Record remarks, if any, in the test record <strong>and</strong> forward them to the person<br />

responsible for the site installation.<br />

6.2 Calibrating the Antenna Tester<br />

This section describes how to calibrate the Site Master, to achieve accurate<br />

Test results <strong>and</strong> to compensate for Test Port Extension Cables.<br />

The calibration includes selecting <strong>and</strong> setting the frequency range before the<br />

calibration, performing the calibration <strong>and</strong> entering the cable parameters in<br />

the Site Master.<br />

Note: The Site Master must be calibrated each time the frequency range<br />

is changed.<br />

6.2.1 Selecting Frequency Range<br />

The Site Master also needs to be calibrated if one of the following<br />

messages is shown in the display: ‘‘CAL OFF’’ or ‘‘↑ C’’.<br />

This section describes how to select <strong>and</strong> set the correct frequency range in<br />

the Site Master.<br />

1. Press the FREQ/DIST key.<br />

2. Press the F1 soft key.<br />

3. Enter the Start frequency in MHz, from the table below. Press ENTER.<br />

4. Press the F2 soft key.<br />

5. Enter the Stop frequency in MHz, from the table below. Press ENTER.<br />

6. Check that the FREQ (MHz) scale in the display area indicates the correct<br />

frequency start <strong>and</strong> stop values.<br />

84 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


Table 13 Start <strong>and</strong> Stop Frequencies<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

System Start Freq. (MHz) Stop Freq. (MHz)<br />

GSM 800 800 1000<br />

GSM 900 800 1000<br />

GSM 1800 1700 1900<br />

GSM 1900 1800 2000<br />

6.2.2 Performing Calibration<br />

This section describes how to perform the calibration of the Site Master.<br />

To calibrate the Site Master, a Precision Open/Short/Load is needed; this<br />

is shown in the figure below.<br />

Test Port Extension Cable<br />

MODE<br />

FREQ/DIST AMPLITUDE SWEEP<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

Site Master<br />

2<br />

3 4<br />

5 6<br />

7 8<br />

9 0<br />

Figure 32 Connecting the Open/Short/Load<br />

1<br />

Load<br />

3<br />

2<br />

Open<br />

Short<br />

P009530A<br />

For correct calibration results, ensure that the Open/Short/Load is connected<br />

at the end of the Test Port Extension Cable, at the same point where the test<br />

object is to be connected.<br />

1. Connect the Test Port Extension cable.<br />

2. Ensure that the correct frequency range is selected.<br />

3. Press the START CAL key.<br />

4. Connect the ‘‘Open’’ <strong>and</strong> press ENTER. Wait for the measurement to be<br />

completed.<br />

85


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

5. Repeat step 4 for ‘‘Short’’ <strong>and</strong> ‘‘Load’’ according to the step-by-step<br />

instructions on the screen.<br />

6. When the calibration is complete, disconnect the calibration equipment<br />

from the Test Port Extension Cable.<br />

After the calibration, the display shows ‘‘CAL ON’’ as long as the calibration<br />

is valid.<br />

6.2.3 Entering Cable Parameters<br />

To achieve accurate DTF test results, the correct cable parameters, velocity<br />

factor, <strong>and</strong> attenuation (dB/m) for the feeder type must be entered.<br />

1. Press the MODE key <strong>and</strong> select ‘‘DTF-SWR’’ by using the Up/Down arrow<br />

key. Press ENTER.<br />

2. Press the DTF-AID soft key.<br />

3. Use the Up/Down arrow key to select ‘‘CABLE LOSS’’. Press ENTER.<br />

4. Enter the cable loss in dB per metre for the type of feeder being tested,<br />

from the table below. Press ENTER.<br />

5. Use the Up/Down arrow key to select ‘‘PROP VEL’’. Press ENTER.<br />

6. Enter the relative velocity for the type of feeder being tested, from the<br />

table below. Press ENTER.<br />

Table 14 Velocity Factor <strong>and</strong> Attenuation for Different Cables<br />

Feeder Type<br />

Andrew<br />

Velocity<br />

Factor<br />

(PROP<br />

VEL)<br />

Attenuation, dB/m (CABLE LOSS)<br />

GSM<br />

800<br />

GSM<br />

900<br />

GSM<br />

1800<br />

GSM 1900<br />

1/4-in. LDF1 0.86 0.124 0.129 0.189 0.195<br />

1/4-in. FSJ1 (flex) 0.84 0.179 0.186 0.270 0.278<br />

3/8-in. LDF2 0.88 0.1<strong>06</strong> 0.110 0.161 0.166<br />

86 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Table 14 Velocity Factor <strong>and</strong> Attenuation for Different Cables<br />

Feeder Type<br />

Andrew<br />

Velocity<br />

Factor<br />

(PROP<br />

VEL)<br />

Attenuation, dB/m (CABLE LOSS)<br />

GSM<br />

800<br />

GSM<br />

900<br />

GSM<br />

1800<br />

GSM 1900<br />

3/8-in. FSJ2 (flex) 0.83 0.121 0.127 0.185 0.191<br />

1/2-in. LDF4 0.88 0.<strong>06</strong>6 0.<strong>06</strong>9 0.1<strong>01</strong> 0.104<br />

1/2–in. FSJ4 (flex) 0.81 0.107 0.112 0.166 0.171<br />

7/8-in. LDF5 0.89 0.037 0.039 0.058 0.<strong>06</strong>0<br />

1 1/4-in. LDF6 0.89 0.027 0.028 0.042 0.043<br />

1 5/8-in. LDF7 0.88 0.022 0.023 0.035 0.036<br />

Note: If the cable type is not found in the table above, the values must be<br />

taken from the manufacturer’s specifications.<br />

6.3 Performing DTF Tests<br />

The purpose of the Distance To Fault (DTF) test is to verify that there are no<br />

bad connections or other faults (for example sharp bends) in the feeder system.<br />

It also measures the length of the feeder system to be used in the feeder<br />

attenuation calculation.<br />

It is recommended to perform the DTF tests during the installation phase,<br />

before the antennas are connected.<br />

6.3.1 Connecting DTF Test Setup<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section contains test setups <strong>and</strong> information about how to connect the test<br />

equipment for the DTF tests.<br />

1. Connect the 50 st<strong>and</strong>ard load to the antenna connector of the feeder.<br />

See figure below.<br />

2. Connect the test equipment to the <strong>RBS</strong> jumper. See figure below.<br />

87


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Test Equipment<br />

Figure 33 DTF Test Setup<br />

<strong>RBS</strong><br />

Jumper Feeder<br />

Antenna<br />

Antenna<br />

Jumper<br />

3. Check that all connections are properly connected <strong>and</strong> tightened.<br />

6.3.2 Testing Feeder Installation<br />

50 W<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0260A<br />

1. Check that the Site Masters display shows ‘‘CAL ON’’, indicating that the<br />

Site Master is calibrated. If the display shows ‘‘CAL OFF’’, calibrate the Site<br />

Master according to Section 6.2 Calibrating the Antenna Tester on page 84.<br />

2. Ensure that the test equipment is connected according to Section 6.3.1<br />

Connecting DTF Test Setup on page 87.<br />

3. Press the FREQ/DIST key to set the frequency.<br />

4. Press the D1 soft key, enter the desired start value (usually 0.0 m) <strong>and</strong><br />

press ENTER.<br />

5. Press the D2 soft key, enter the desired stop value (usually a slight<br />

overestimation of the total length of the feeder system) <strong>and</strong> press ENTER.<br />

6. Press the AMPLITUDE key to set the scale.<br />

7. Press the TOP soft key, enter 1.2 <strong>and</strong> press ENTER.<br />

8. Press the LIMIT EDIT soft key <strong>and</strong> enter 1.05. Press ENTER.<br />

Note: Ensure that Limit is ON by pressing the LIMIT ON/OFF soft key.<br />

9. Wait while the Site Master is calculating (6 to 22 seconds depending on<br />

selected display resolution).<br />

10. Observe the waveform. Examples of acceptable <strong>and</strong> unacceptable DTF<br />

measurement results are shown in the figures below.<br />

11. Check that no reflections are above 1.05 SWR (31.5 dB Return Loss). See<br />

Table 19 on page 102, if necessary.<br />

88 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


Example of an Acceptable DTF Measurement<br />

CAL ON LIM ON 259 POINTS RECALL<br />

1.20<br />

1.00<br />

0.0<br />

M1:1.<strong>01</strong>,2.3m<br />

2:+0.07,<br />

+38.6m<br />

DTF DTF1<br />

DIST (m)<br />

M3=OFF<br />

M4=OFF<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

50.0<br />

Figure 34 Example of an Acceptable DTF Measurement<br />

Example of an Unacceptable DTF Measurement<br />

CAL ON LIM ON 259 POINTS RECALL<br />

1.20<br />

1.00<br />

0.0<br />

M1:1.<strong>01</strong>,2.3m<br />

2:+0.07,<br />

+38.6m<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

DTF DTF2<br />

DIST (m)<br />

M3=OFF<br />

M4=OFF<br />

50.0<br />

ON/OFF<br />

EDIT<br />

DELTA<br />

(M2 - M1)<br />

MARKER<br />

TO<br />

PEAK<br />

MARKER<br />

TO<br />

VALLEY<br />

BACK<br />

ON/OFF<br />

EDIT<br />

DELTA<br />

(M2 - M1)<br />

MARKER<br />

TO<br />

PEAK<br />

MARKER<br />

TO<br />

VALLEY<br />

BACK<br />

Figure 35 Example of an Unacceptable DTF Measurement<br />

P007951A<br />

P007952A<br />

89


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

6.3.3 Measuring Feeder Length<br />

This section describes how to measure the feeder length, based on the result of<br />

the test in chapter Section 6.3.2 Testing Feeder Installation on page 88.<br />

1. Press the MARKER key.<br />

2. Press the M1 soft key.<br />

3. Press the EDIT soft key <strong>and</strong> place the M1 marker at the near end of the<br />

feeder using the UP/DOWN arrow key. See figure below.<br />

CAL ON LIM ON 259 POINTS RECALL<br />

1.20<br />

1.00<br />

0.0<br />

M1:1.<strong>01</strong>,2.3m<br />

2:+0.07,<br />

+38.6m<br />

DTF DTF1<br />

DIST (m)<br />

M3=OFF<br />

M4=OFF<br />

Figure 36 Placing the M1 <strong>and</strong> M2 Markers<br />

50.0<br />

4. Press the BACK soft key <strong>and</strong> then the M2 soft key.<br />

ON/OFF<br />

EDIT<br />

DELTA<br />

(M2 - M1)<br />

MARKER<br />

TO<br />

PEAK<br />

MARKER<br />

TO<br />

VALLEY<br />

BACK<br />

P007951A<br />

5. Press the EDIT soft key <strong>and</strong> place the M2 marker at the far end of the<br />

feeder, using the UP/DOWN arrow key. See figure above.<br />

6. Press the DELTA (M2–M1) soft key <strong>and</strong> enter the 2 value as the feeder<br />

length in the test record.<br />

7. Create a unique trace name according to Section 6.4 Naming a DTF<br />

Measurement on page 90. Save the measurement by pressing the SAVE<br />

DISPLAY key. Type in the trace name using the alphanumeric soft keys,<br />

<strong>and</strong> press ENTER.<br />

6.4 Naming a DTF Measurement<br />

This section describes how to give the measurement a unique name that is<br />

traceable to a specific antenna system on a specific site.<br />

90 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


1. Find the cell ID in the Site Installation Documentation.<br />

2. Read the label text on the jumper being measured.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

3. Combine the measurement type, cell ID <strong>and</strong> label text (a unique name<br />

with a maximum of 16 characters).<br />

The following example illustrates these steps:<br />

1. The cell ID found in the Site Installation<br />

Documentation is "SOF007_A".<br />

2. The text on the feeder label is "Cell A: DX1".<br />

3. The type of measurement is DTF, so the name of<br />

the measurement is "DTFSOF007ADX1".<br />

Example 1 Naming a DTF Measurement<br />

6.5 Calculating the Feeder Attenuation<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes how to calculate the attenuation of the feeder system.<br />

1. Use the feeder length measured in Section 6.3.3 Measuring Feeder Length<br />

on page 90.<br />

2. Find the attenuation value (dB/m) for the cable type in the table below.<br />

Calculate the total attenuation for each feeder <strong>and</strong> jumper, by multiplying<br />

the length in meters by the attenuation per meter.<br />

3. Add the attenuations for the feeder <strong>and</strong> the jumpers, see Table 15 on page<br />

92.<br />

4. Enter the result of the calculation in the test record.<br />

5. Repeat the DTF test, <strong>and</strong> calculate the feeder attenuation for all antenna<br />

feeders on the site.<br />

91


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Table 15 Attenuation for Different Cables<br />

Feeder Type<br />

Andrew<br />

Attenuation, dB/m (CABLE LOSS)<br />

GSM 800 GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900<br />

1/4-in. LDF1 0.124 0.129 0.189 0.195<br />

1/4-in. FSJ1 (flex) 0.179 0.186 0.270 0.278<br />

3/8-in. LDF2 0.1<strong>06</strong> 0.110 0.161 0.166<br />

3/8-in. FSJ2 (flex) 0.121 0.127 0.185 0.191<br />

1/2-in. LDF4 0.<strong>06</strong>6 0.<strong>06</strong>9 0.1<strong>01</strong> 0.104<br />

1/2-in. FSJ4 (flex) 0.107 0.112 0.166 0.171<br />

7/8-in. LDF5 0.037 0.039 0.058 0.<strong>06</strong>0<br />

1 1/4-in. LDF6 0.027 0.028 0.042 0.043<br />

1 5/8-in. LDF7 0.022 0.023 0.035 0.036<br />

Note: If the cable type is not found in the table above, then the values must be<br />

taken from the manufacturer’s specifications.<br />

Example of Calculating the Total Feeder Attenuation (GSM 900)<br />

A B<br />

A + B = Total feeder attenuation<br />

Figure 37 Example of Calculating the Total Feeder Attenuation<br />

92 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P008453A


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

See figure in this chapter for feeders <strong>and</strong> jumpers<br />

mentioned in the example.<br />

The frequency b<strong>and</strong> is GSM 900.<br />

The feeder length has been measured at 40 m.<br />

1. Cables used:<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> jumper (A):<br />

Andrew 3/8-in. LDF2<br />

Length: 2 m<br />

The attenuation is 0.110 dB/m.<br />

See the table in this chapter.<br />

Total cable attenuation for the <strong>RBS</strong> jumper:<br />

2 x 0.110 = 0.22 dB<br />

Feeder (B):<br />

Andrew 1/2-in. LDF4<br />

Length: 40 m<br />

The attenuation is 0.<strong>06</strong>9 dB/m.<br />

See the table in this chapter.<br />

Total cable attenuation for the antenna feeder:<br />

40 x 0.<strong>06</strong>9 = 2.76 dB<br />

2. Total attenuation:<br />

0.22 + 2.76 = 2.98 dB<br />

3. Enter the results in the test record.<br />

Example 2 Calculating the Total Feeder Attenuation<br />

6.6 Calculating the Feeder Delay<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes how to calculate the total delay in the feeder system.<br />

1. Use the feeder length measured in Section 6.3.3 Measuring Feeder Length<br />

on page 90.<br />

2. Find the delay value (ns/m) for the cable type in Table 16 on page 94.<br />

Calculate the total attenuation for each feeder <strong>and</strong> jumper, by multiplying<br />

the length in metres with the delay per metre.<br />

3. Add the delay for the feeder <strong>and</strong> the jumpers.<br />

4. Enter the result of the calculation in the test record.<br />

5. Calculate the feeder delay for all antenna feeders.<br />

93


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Table 16 Delay Specifications for Different Cables<br />

Feeder Type Andrew Delay,<br />

ns/m<br />

1/4-in. LDF1 3.9<br />

1/4-in. FSJ1 (flex) 4.0<br />

3/8-in. LDF2 3.8<br />

3/8-in. FSJ2 (flex) 4.0<br />

1/2-in. LDF4 3.8<br />

1/2-in. FSJ4 (flex) 4.1<br />

7/8-in. LDF5 3.7<br />

1 1/4-in. LDF6 3.7<br />

1 5/8-in. LDF7 3.8<br />

Note: If the cable type is not found in the table above, the values must be<br />

taken from the manufacturer’s specifications.<br />

See figure in the previous chapter for feeders <strong>and</strong> jumpers<br />

mentioned in the example.<br />

The feeder length has been measured at 40 m.<br />

1. Cables used:<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> jumper (A):<br />

Andrew 3/8-in. LDF2<br />

Length: 2 m<br />

The delay is 3.8 ns/m.<br />

See the table in this chapter.<br />

Delay for antenna jumper:<br />

2 x 3.8 = 7.6 ns<br />

Feeder (B):<br />

Andrew 1/2-in. LDF4<br />

Length: 40 m<br />

The delay is 3.8 ns/m.<br />

See the table in this chapter.<br />

Feeder delay:<br />

40 x 3.8 = 152 ns<br />

2. Total delay:<br />

7.6 + 152 = 159.6 ns ≈ 160 ns<br />

3. Enter the results in the test record.<br />

Example 3 Calculating the Total Feeder Delay<br />

94 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


6.7 Performing SWR Test<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

The purpose of the St<strong>and</strong>ing Wave Ratio (SWR) test is to verify that the antenna<br />

system functions correctly when it is completely installed. The test verifies that<br />

the SWR is not too high, <strong>and</strong> that the signal is not reflected back into the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

6.7.1 Connecting SWR Test Setup<br />

This section describes how to connect the SWR test setup.<br />

1. Connect the test equipment to the <strong>RBS</strong> jumper, see figure below.<br />

2. Check that all connections are properly connected <strong>and</strong> tightened.<br />

Test Equipment<br />

Figure 38 Test Setup<br />

6.7.2 Testing the Antenna System<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

<strong>RBS</strong><br />

Jumper<br />

Feeder<br />

Antenna<br />

Antenna<br />

Jumper<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0263A<br />

1. Check that the Site Master’s display shows ‘‘CAL ON’’, indicating that the<br />

Site Master is calibrated. If the display shows ‘‘CAL OFF’’, calibrate the Site<br />

Master according to Section 6.2 Calibrating the Antenna Tester on page 84.<br />

2. Ensure that the test equipment is connected according to Section 6.7.1<br />

on page 95.<br />

3. Press the AMPLITUDE key to set the scale.<br />

4. Press the TOP soft key, enter 2.0 <strong>and</strong> press ENTER.<br />

5. Press the LIMIT EDIT soft key, enter 1.4 <strong>and</strong> press ENTER.<br />

Note: Ensure that Limit is in ON-mode by pressing the LIMIT ON/OFF<br />

soft key.<br />

6. Observe the trace in the frequency range according to the table below.<br />

95


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Table 17 Measurement Frequency Range for Passive Antenna Systems<br />

System Start Freq. (MHz) Stop Freq. (MHz)<br />

GSM 800 824 894<br />

E-GSM 900 880 960<br />

P-GSM 900 890 960<br />

GSM 1800 1710 1880<br />

GSM 1900 1850 1990<br />

7. Check that no SWR levels are over 1.4 (= 15.6 dB RL) between the<br />

frequencies stated in the table above. For conversion between VSWR <strong>and</strong><br />

Return Loss see Table 19 on page 102. Enter the test result in the<br />

test record. For examples of approved <strong>and</strong> unapproved waveforms, see<br />

figures below.<br />

8. Create a unique trace name in accordance with Section 6.8 Naming an<br />

SWR Measurement on page 97. Save the measurement by pressing the<br />

SAVE DISPLAY key. Type in the trace name using the alphanumeric soft<br />

keys, <strong>and</strong> press ENTER.<br />

9. Repeat the SWR test for each feeder on the site.<br />

Example of an Acceptable SWR Measurement<br />

CAL ON LIM ON 259 POINTS RECALL<br />

2.00<br />

1.4<br />

1.00<br />

800.0<br />

M1:1.03,889.9MHz<br />

M2:1.19,959.7MHz<br />

SWR ANTENNA 900<br />

FREQ (MHz)<br />

M3=OFF<br />

M4=OFF<br />

1000.0<br />

Figure 39 Example of an Acceptable SWR Measurement<br />

96 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

M1<br />

M2<br />

M3<br />

M4<br />

ALL<br />

OFF<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0265A


Example of an Unacceptable SWR Measurement<br />

CAL ON LIM ON 259 POINTS RECALL<br />

2.00<br />

1.4<br />

1.00<br />

800.0<br />

M1:1.03,889.9MHz<br />

M2:1.19,959.7MHz<br />

SWR ANTENNA 900<br />

FREQ (MHz)<br />

M3=OFF<br />

M4=OFF<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

1000.0<br />

M1<br />

M2<br />

M3<br />

M4<br />

ALL<br />

OFF<br />

Figure 40 Example of an Unacceptable SWR Measurement<br />

6.8 Naming an SWR Measurement<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0277A<br />

This section describes how to give the measurement a unique name traceable<br />

to the correct antenna system on the correct site.<br />

1. Find the cell ID in the Site Installation Documentation.<br />

2. Read the label on the jumper measured.<br />

3. Combine the measurement type, cell ID, <strong>and</strong> label text (a unique name<br />

with a maximum of 16 characters).<br />

The following example illustrates these steps: Site Installation Documentation<br />

1. The cell ID found in the Site Installation<br />

Documentation is "SOF007_A".<br />

2. The text on the feeder label is "Cell A: DX1".<br />

3. The type of measurement is DTF, so the name of<br />

the measurement is "SWRSOF007ADX1".<br />

Example 4 Naming an SWR Measurement<br />

97


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

6.9 Performing Concluding Routines<br />

This section describes the actions to be taken before leaving the site, <strong>and</strong><br />

provides a checklist.<br />

6.9.1 Completing Test Record<br />

The form below is to be filled out during site work, <strong>and</strong> must be completed<br />

before leaving the site.<br />

98 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


Test Record for Antenna System Tests<br />

Date:<br />

Site No:<br />

Tester's Name:<br />

Test Instrument:<br />

Anritsu Site Master S_______<br />

Installation Check<br />

DTF Test<br />

SWR Test<br />

Cable Marking:<br />

Signatures<br />

Responsible for the Record<br />

Customer Acceptance<br />

Remarks<br />

Feeder Length<br />

Total Feeder Attenuation<br />

Total Feeder Delay<br />

SWR/Return Loss<br />

Site Name:<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> Serial No:<br />

Serial Number:<br />

RRU 0 RRU 1 RRU 2<br />

TX(/RX)1<br />

TX(/RX)2<br />

RX1*<br />

RX2*<br />

* If applicable<br />

RRU 0 RRU 1 RRU 2<br />

TX(/RX)1<br />

TX(/RX)2<br />

RX1*<br />

RX2*<br />

* If applicable<br />

RRU 0 RRU 1 RRU 2<br />

TX(/RX)1<br />

TX(/RX)2<br />

RX1*<br />

RX2*<br />

* If applicable<br />

RRU 0 RRU 1 RRU 2<br />

TX(/RX)1<br />

TX(/RX)2<br />

RX1*<br />

RX2*<br />

* If applicable<br />

Date: Name:<br />

Date: Name:<br />

Figure 41 Test Record for Antenna System Tests<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>2352B<br />

99


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

6.9.2 Making a Test Record Supplement<br />

The figure below is an example of a printout from the Site Master Software<br />

Tools. This should be added as a supplement to the test protocol, <strong>and</strong> included<br />

in the Site Installation Documentation.<br />

VSWR<br />

1,200<br />

1,175<br />

1,150<br />

1,125<br />

1,100<br />

1,075<br />

1,050<br />

1,025<br />

1,000<br />

0<br />

Limit: 1,05<br />

M1<br />

5<br />

Resolution: 259<br />

BiasTee: OFF<br />

Date: 02/23/20<strong>01</strong><br />

Model: S331B<br />

10<br />

15<br />

Distance To Fault<br />

DTFSOF007ADX1<br />

M1: 1,<strong>01</strong>4 @ 2,132m M2: 1,008 @ 40,698m<br />

20<br />

25<br />

30<br />

Distance (0,0 - 50,0m)<br />

CAL: ON(COAX)<br />

Output Power: -30,00 dBm<br />

Time: 04:18:45<br />

Serial#: 00028071<br />

Figure 42 Example of a DTF Measurement Plot<br />

35<br />

40<br />

M2<br />

45<br />

50<br />

P007955A<br />

After saving all test results in the Site Master, the test results must be<br />

transferred to a PC using the serial cable <strong>and</strong> the Site Master Software Tools.<br />

See the instructions below. For further instructions, see:<br />

Anritsu Site Master User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

1. Connect the Site Master to the PC’s serial port, using the serial cable.<br />

2. Start the Site Master Software Tools on the PC.<br />

3. Click the Start Plot Capture button in the Site Master Software Tools.<br />

4. Select the desired plots from the Plots Download dialog box <strong>and</strong> click OK.<br />

5. Save the plots to the PC.<br />

6. Print the plots from the Site Master Software Tools, <strong>and</strong> insert them in<br />

the Site Installation Documentation.<br />

100 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


6.9.3 Filling in the Checklist<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

The following checklist is not m<strong>and</strong>atory but is strongly recommended. Local<br />

procedures <strong>and</strong> safety regulations must be evaluated <strong>and</strong> included in this<br />

checklist.<br />

Table 18 Checklist<br />

Check the following: OK<br />

1. That all outdoor antenna system connectors are covered with<br />

sealing tape.<br />

2. That the test record is filled in.<br />

3. That the Site Installation Documentation is completed with the<br />

test record <strong>and</strong> the test record supplements.<br />

6.10 SWR ↔ Return Loss Conversion Table<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section provides the corresponding St<strong>and</strong>ing Wave Ratio (SWR)<br />

measurements for a range of Return Loss values, if needed.<br />

1<strong>01</strong>


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Table 19 Conversion Table<br />

Return<br />

Loss<br />

(dB)<br />

SWR Return<br />

Loss (dB)<br />

SWR Return<br />

Loss (dB)<br />

SWR<br />

4.0 4.42 16.0 1.38 28.0 1.08<br />

6.0 3.<strong>01</strong> 16.2 1.37 28.5 1.07<br />

8.0 2.32 16.4 1.36 29.0 1.07<br />

10.0 1.92 16.6 1.35 29.5 1.07<br />

10.5 1.85 16.8 1.34 30.0 1.<strong>06</strong><br />

11.0 1.79 17.0 1.33 30.5 1.<strong>06</strong><br />

11.2 1.76 17.2 1.32 31.0 1.05<br />

11.4 1.74 17.4 1.31 31.5 1.05<br />

11.6 1.71 17.6 1.30 32.0 1.05<br />

11.8 1.69 17.8 1.29 32.5 1.04<br />

12.0 1.67 18.0 1.29 33.0 1.04<br />

12.2 1.65 18.5 1.27 33.5 1.04<br />

12.4 1.63 19.0 1.25 34.0 1.04<br />

12.6 1.61 19.5 1.23 34.5 1.03<br />

12.8 1.59 20.0 1.22 35.0 1.03<br />

13.0 1.58 20.5 1.21 35.5 1.03<br />

13.2 1.56 21.0 1.20 36.0 1.03<br />

13.4 1.54 21.5 1.18 36.5 1.03<br />

13.6 1.53 22.0 1.17 37.0 1.02<br />

13.8 1.51 22.5 1.16 37.5 1.02<br />

14.0 1.50 23.0 1.15 38.0 1.02<br />

14.2 1.48 23.5 1.14 38.5 1.02<br />

14.4 1.47 24.0 1.13 39.0 1.02<br />

14.6 1.46 24.5 1.12 39.5 1.02<br />

14.8 1.44 25.0 1.12 40.0 1.02<br />

15.0 1.43 25.5 1.11 40.5 1.<strong>01</strong><br />

15.2 1.42 26.0 1.10 41.0 1.<strong>01</strong><br />

15.4 1.41 26.5 1.10 41.5 1.<strong>01</strong><br />

15.6 1.40 27.0 1.09 42.0 1.<strong>01</strong><br />

15.8 1.39 27.5 1.08 42.5 1.<strong>01</strong><br />

102 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


7 Site Installation Tests<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

This section describes the test procedure for site installation tests.<br />

7.1 Preconditions<br />

Before starting the tests, ensure the following:<br />

• A completed test record for Antenna System Tests is available<br />

• The nominal AC mains voltage <strong>and</strong>/or DC supply on the site is known<br />

Note: The information above can be found in:<br />

Site Installation Documentation<br />

• A test record is available<br />

• Chapter Safety Instructions has been read<br />

7.1.1 Documentation<br />

The list below displays the manual required for site installation tests.<br />

Table 20 Required Manual for Site Installation Tests<br />

Product Name Description Product Number<br />

OMT User’s Manual Included in OMT Kit EN/LZN 720 00<strong>01</strong><br />

7.1.2 Before Starting Test Procedure<br />

Before starting the test procedure, ensure the following:<br />

• All personal rings, wrist watches, <strong>and</strong> other metallic objects are removed<br />

before working with the power system<br />

• The necessary tools, instruments, <strong>and</strong> documentation are available<br />

7.1.3 Work Process for Site Installation Tests<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes the order in which to perform the tests. When the exit<br />

criteria are fulfilled, the tester should enter the results in the test record, <strong>and</strong><br />

return to the work process for the next step in the process.<br />

103


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>0216B<br />

Inspecting the<br />

Cable Connections<br />

Verifying AC Mains<br />

<strong>and</strong>/or DC Power Supply<br />

Switching on the <strong>RBS</strong><br />

Setting the<br />

IDB Parameters<br />

Reading Fault Status<br />

Performing<br />

Concluding Routines<br />

Testing Fan Unit<br />

Testing External Alarms<br />

Figure 43 Work Process for Site Installation Tests<br />

The work order can be altered or tests can be removed due to local<br />

circumstances, but if this is the case, an investigation of the consequences<br />

must be carried out. If the work order is changed or tests are removed, the<br />

department responsible for this document must be notified <strong>and</strong> agree to the<br />

changes, or the responsibility is automatically transferred to the person making<br />

the decision.<br />

7.2 Inspecting Cable Connections<br />

1. Ensure that all power switches on the MBU are switched off.<br />

2. Check that all cables are properly connected <strong>and</strong> all connections tightened.<br />

7.3 Checking AC Mains <strong>and</strong> DC Power Supply<br />

This section describes how to verify that the <strong>RBS</strong> has the correct incoming AC<br />

Mains <strong>and</strong>, where applicable, DC power.<br />

104 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Danger!<br />

Electric shock risk. Avoid both direct <strong>and</strong> indirect contact with parts connected<br />

to mains power as this is likely to be fatal. Switch off the mains power before<br />

starting work.<br />

1 Open the sunshields <strong>and</strong> the RRU, <strong>and</strong> remove the lid from the MBU.<br />

2 If applicable, use a multimeter to<br />

measure the incoming AC Mains<br />

power to the <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>and</strong> check that<br />

it is between 100 <strong>and</strong> 127 V AC,<br />

or between 200 <strong>and</strong> 250 V AC.<br />

3 If applicable, use a multimeter to<br />

measure the incoming DC power<br />

to the <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>and</strong> check that it is<br />

between −40.5 <strong>and</strong> −60 V DC.<br />

4 Put back the MBU lid <strong>and</strong> tighten the screws.<br />

7.4 Switching on <strong>RBS</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes how to switch on the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0498A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0497A<br />

105


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

1 Switch on the <strong>RBS</strong> AC on/off switches on the MBU on all cabinets.<br />

Repeat this procedure for the <strong>RBS</strong> DC on/off <strong>and</strong> the RRU on/off<br />

switches.<br />

2 Before continuing testing of the<br />

site installation, ensure that the<br />

indicators on the RRU <strong>and</strong> IXU<br />

interface panels have the status<br />

shown in the table below when<br />

the <strong>RBS</strong> is in local mode.<br />

Table 21 RRU Indicators Before Setting the IDB Parameters<br />

RRU Status<br />

Fault Off<br />

Operational Off<br />

Local N/A<br />

RF off On<br />

AC power on On (1)<br />

DC power on On (1)<br />

RRU temp. Off<br />

(1) Depending on power system configuration.<br />

Table 22 IXU Indicators Before Setting the IDB Parameters<br />

IXU Status<br />

Fault Off<br />

Operational Off<br />

Local On<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> fault Off<br />

External alarm Off<br />

AC power on On (1)<br />

1<strong>06</strong> EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Table 22 IXU Indicators Before Setting the IDB Parameters<br />

DC power on On (1)<br />

IXU temp. Off<br />

Transmission OK On/Off (2)<br />

(1) Depending on power system configuration.<br />

(2) Status, depending on transmission configuration.<br />

Note: In cold conditions, the <strong>RBS</strong> may need up to 60 minutes to warm up,<br />

during which time the IXU or RRU temperature indicator is on. The<br />

internal heater works only with an AC power supply.<br />

3. If the Operational indicator on the RRU <strong>and</strong>/or IXU is flashing, SW is being<br />

downloaded. Wait until the indicator switches off before continuing.<br />

4. If the Local indicator on the IXU is off or flashing, press the Local/Remote<br />

button to set the IXU in local mode.<br />

7.5 Testing Fan Unit<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes how to test the optional fan unit (if applicable).<br />

Figure 44 Location of Fan Unit Test Button<br />

1. Remove the fan unit cover.<br />

2. Press the Test button on the fan unit.<br />

The fan unit performs a self test.<br />

3. Check that the sequence below is carried out:<br />

• The fans run at maximum speed for approximately 5 seconds<br />

• The fans run at nominal speed for approximately 5 seconds<br />

• The fans stop for approximately 5 seconds<br />

FAN UNT-<strong>01</strong><br />

Fault<br />

Operational<br />

4. Ensure that the indicator status of the fan unit is in accordance with the<br />

table below:<br />

Test<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0581A<br />

107


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Table 23 Fan Unit Indicators After Test<br />

Fan unit Indicator Status<br />

Fault Off<br />

Operational On<br />

5. Put back the fan unit cover.<br />

7.6 Setting IDB Parameters<br />

This section describes how to set the IDB parameters using the Operation <strong>and</strong><br />

Maintenance Terminal (OMT).<br />

For more information on the use of the OMT, see:<br />

OMT User’s Manual EN/LZN 720 00<strong>01</strong><br />

Work Process for Setting IDB Parameters<br />

This section describes the work process for setting the IDB parameters.<br />

108 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


P<strong>01</strong>2515A<br />

Defining Transmission<br />

Interface E1, 75<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Connecting the OMT<br />

Reading the IDB<br />

Defining Transmission<br />

Interface E1, 120<br />

Defining TEI<br />

Installing IDB<br />

Figure 45 Work Process for Setting IDB Parameters<br />

Creating IDB<br />

Defining External Alarms<br />

Defining Hardware<br />

Info for Passive Units<br />

Note: The IDB parameter values required are found in:<br />

7.6.1 Connecting OMT<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

Site Installation Documentation<br />

Defining Delay<br />

Defining<br />

GPS Parameters<br />

Defining Loss<br />

Defining <strong>RBS</strong> Identity<br />

Defining Transmission<br />

Interface T1, 100<br />

Defining TNOM<br />

This section describes how to connect the OMT physically to the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

1. Remove the lid from the OMT port on the IXU.<br />

109


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

2. Connect the OMT cable from the PC serial port to the OMT port on the<br />

right-h<strong>and</strong> side of the IXU. If an extended OMT cable is connected to the<br />

OMT port, then connect the OMT cable to the end of the extended OMT<br />

cable.<br />

Figure 46 Connecting OMT to IXU<br />

3. Start the OMT.<br />

7.6.2 Reading IDB<br />

Local/Remote<br />

AC power on<br />

DC power on<br />

IXU temp.<br />

Transmission OK<br />

Port A Port C<br />

Port B Port D<br />

OMT Cable<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0276B<br />

This section describes how to read the IDB in the OMT to check if the values of<br />

the IDB parameters are correct.<br />

1. On the <strong>RBS</strong> 2000 menu, click Connect to connect the OMT logically<br />

to the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

2. On the Configuration menu, click Read IDB.<br />

3. On the Configuration menu, click Display <strong>and</strong> then Information to enter<br />

the Display Information window.<br />

4. Select IDB <strong>and</strong> click Run. Check the parameters listed in the table below.<br />

Table 24 Reading <strong>and</strong> Checking IDB<br />

Check that the following parameters are correct: OK<br />

Transmission interface<br />

Cabinet configuration(s)<br />

Antenna sector configuration(s)<br />

5. If the IDB parameters in the table above need to be set, see Section 7.6.3<br />

Creating IDB on page 111.<br />

110 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

If the IDB parameters above are correct, set the following applicable<br />

site-specific IDB parameters:<br />

• Alarm inlets (external alarms)<br />

• Delay<br />

• GPS parameters<br />

• Hardware Information<br />

• Loss<br />

• <strong>RBS</strong> Identity<br />

• Transmission (PCM) parameters<br />

• TEI value for IXU<br />

• TNOM parameters<br />

7.6.3 Creating IDB<br />

This section describes how to define the configuration setup in the OMT. The<br />

OMT can detect the cabinet setup if the Detected HW Information checkbox in<br />

the Create IDB window is selected.<br />

Note: The OMT must be logically connected to the <strong>RBS</strong> to be able to retrieve<br />

the HW information.<br />

Defining Transmission Interface<br />

1. On the <strong>RBS</strong> 2000 menu, ensure that the OMT is logically disconnected<br />

from the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

2. On the Configuration menu, click Create IDB to open the Create IDB<br />

window.<br />

3. Select the transmission interface.<br />

Defining Cabinet Setup<br />

1. To add cabinets to the Cabinet Setup box, click New to open the Define<br />

Setup for Cabinet window.<br />

2. In the Cabinet Type box, select the <strong>RBS</strong> type:<br />

– <strong>2308</strong><br />

– <strong>2309</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

3. In the Define Master Cabinet Setup window, select the applicable master<br />

cabinet configuration <strong>and</strong> click OK:<br />

111


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

– IXU<br />

– IXU/RRU<br />

4. Select the power system used:<br />

– 230/115 V AC, no backup<br />

– 230/115 V AC, external battery<br />

– −48 V DC<br />

5. If an RRU is present in the cabinet, select the climate system used:<br />

– Cooling by convection<br />

– Fan unit<br />

6. Click OK when finished.<br />

7. Repeat steps 4 to 9 to add another RRU cabinet to the configuration.<br />

Defining Antenna Sector Setup<br />

For different Site Cell Configurations (SCC), the number of cells is related<br />

to antenna sectors. The number of TRXs is related to the number of RRUs<br />

(antenna systems). The <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong> has four TRX/RRU <strong>and</strong> <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong> has<br />

two TRX/RRU.<br />

Example 1: For an <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong> in a SCC = 1x4, define an <strong>RBS</strong> with two RRUs<br />

(two TRX/RRU) <strong>and</strong> then define one antenna sector with two antenna systems<br />

(RRUs).<br />

Example 2: For an <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong> in a SCC = 3x4, define an <strong>RBS</strong> with three RRUs<br />

(four TRX/RRU) <strong>and</strong> then define three antenna sectors with one antenna<br />

system (RRU).<br />

1. To add antenna systems for an antenna sector, click New in the Antenna<br />

Sector Setup window.<br />

2. To define an antenna system for a sector, click New.<br />

3. In the Frequency box, select the frequency used.<br />

4. In the Duplexer box, select ‘‘Yes’’ if the RRU internal duplexer is used<br />

(duplex mode) <strong>and</strong> ‘‘No’’ if not (simplex mode). This selection is only<br />

applicable for <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong> configured with 800/1900 RRUs.<br />

5. Click OK.<br />

6. To define another antenna system within the same antenna sector, click<br />

New again.<br />

112 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

7. Click OK, or repeat step 6 for adding more RRUs within the same antenna<br />

sector.<br />

8. To define an antenna system in a new sector, repeat steps 1 to 7.<br />

9. Click OK in the Create IDB window when all antenna sectors are defined.<br />

The Final Configuration Selection window appears.<br />

Selecting Final Configuration<br />

1. In the Final Configuration Selection window, select the SCC.<br />

2. Verify that the correct parameters have been entered. Click OK.<br />

3. In the OMT dialog box asking ‘‘Do you really want to overwrite the IDB<br />

data in the OMT?’’, click Yes.<br />

4. In the OMT dialog box asking ‘‘Do you want to re-use data in the previous<br />

configuration?’’, click Yes if the IDB is to be modified only, <strong>and</strong> No if a<br />

new IDB is to be configured.<br />

7.6.4 Defining External Alarms<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes how to define the external alarms, that is,<br />

customer-specific alarms, if applicable. See Site Installation Documentation.<br />

1. On the Configuration menu, click Define <strong>and</strong> Alarm Inlets to open the<br />

Define Alarm Inlets window.<br />

2. In the Alarm Inlet Information window, select a physically connected alarm<br />

inlet that needs to be defined.<br />

113


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Figure 47 Defining Alarm Inlets<br />

3. In the Inlet Usage box, select ‘‘External Alarm’’.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0226A<br />

4. In the Type box, define the alarm type as ‘‘Closing’’ (the alarm is issued<br />

when the alarm loop closes) or ‘‘Breaking’’ (the alarm is issued when the<br />

alarm loop breaks).<br />

5. In the ID box, give the alarm the appropriate ID number.<br />

6. In the Severity box, set the severity level of the alarm.<br />

7. Add a message in the Comment box.<br />

This message will be displayed in the BSC/OMT if the alarm is issued.<br />

8. Click Apply after defining the alarm.<br />

9. Repeat steps 2 to 8 to define remaining alarms.<br />

10. Click OK when all alarms are defined.<br />

114 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


Defining External Alarms for <strong>EBB</strong>, <strong>and</strong> PBC<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

The alarms for the External Battery Backup (<strong>EBB</strong>), <strong>and</strong> Power <strong>and</strong> Battery<br />

Cabinet (PBC) must be defined according to the tables below.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

Table 25 External Alarm Definitions for <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

Alarm<br />

Inlet<br />

Inlet<br />

Usage<br />

0/5 External<br />

Alarm<br />

0/6 External<br />

Alarm<br />

0/7 External<br />

Alarm<br />

Type Id Severity<br />

Breaking<br />

Breaking<br />

Breaking<br />

(1)<br />

(1)<br />

(1)<br />

Comment<br />

Level 2 Battery backup fault<br />

Level 2 Battery backup is about<br />

to end<br />

Level 2 Check battery<br />

(1) Preferably, ID should be set to the same number as the corresponding alarm inlet.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

Table 26 External Alarm Definitions for <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

Alarm<br />

Inlet<br />

Inlet<br />

Usage<br />

0/4 External<br />

Alarm<br />

Type Id Severity<br />

Breaking<br />

(1)<br />

Comment<br />

Level 2 Battery backup fault<br />

(1) Preferably, ID should be set to the same number as the corresponding alarm inlet.<br />

PBC<br />

Table 27 External Alarm Definitions for PBC<br />

Alarm<br />

Inlet<br />

Inlet<br />

Usage<br />

0/4 External<br />

Alarm<br />

7.6.5 Defining Delay<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

Type Id Severity<br />

Breaking<br />

(1)<br />

Comment<br />

Level 2 Battery backup fault<br />

(1) Preferably, ID should be set to the same number as the corresponding alarm inlet.<br />

This section describes how to define RX <strong>and</strong> TX feeder delay.<br />

1. On the Configuration menu, click Define <strong>and</strong> Delay to open the Define<br />

Delay window.<br />

115


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

2. Select the cable for which delay is to be defined, <strong>and</strong> click Run.<br />

3. Enter the delay value (in ns) <strong>and</strong> click OK.<br />

4. Repeat steps 2 <strong>and</strong> 3 for the remaining cables.<br />

5. Click Close when finished.<br />

7.6.6 Defining GPS Parameters<br />

This section describes how to define the GPS parameters. To be able to use<br />

GPS as a synchronisation source, the <strong>RBS</strong> must be equipped with a GPS<br />

receiver.<br />

1. On the Configuration menu, click Define <strong>and</strong> GPS Parameters to open<br />

the Define GPS Parameters window.<br />

2. Select Yes for GPS present.<br />

3. Enter the GPS RX delay (in ns). This is the delay in the GPS antenna, GPS<br />

antenna feeder cables <strong>and</strong> GPS receiver.<br />

4. Enter the GPS RX DXU delay. This is the delay from the GPS receiver to<br />

the IXU, including the delay in the OVP <strong>and</strong> optional <strong>EBB</strong>.<br />

5. Click OK when finished.<br />

7.6.7 Defining Hardware Information for Passive Units<br />

This section describes how to define hardware information for passive units,<br />

if applicable. See Site Installation Documentation.<br />

1. On the Configuration menu, click Define <strong>and</strong> Hardware Info to open<br />

the Define HW Info window.<br />

2. Select the applicable HW unit in the list <strong>and</strong> click Run.<br />

3. Enter the hardware information, <strong>and</strong> click OK when finished.<br />

4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 for all applicable HW units.<br />

5. Click Close when finished.<br />

7.6.8 Defining Loss<br />

This section describes how to define the Total Feeder Attenuation.<br />

1. On the Configuration menu, click Define <strong>and</strong> Loss to open the Define<br />

Loss window.<br />

2. Select the appropriate feeder cable (for example, FEED_RXA 0) <strong>and</strong> click<br />

Run.<br />

116 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

3. In the Define Loss window, enter the Total Feeder Attenuation from the test<br />

record for Antenna System Tests <strong>and</strong> click OK. The OMT has default values<br />

for the RRU to RXBP RX cables.<br />

4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 for each RX <strong>and</strong> TX feeder used.<br />

5. Close the Define Loss window when finished.<br />

7.6.9 Defining <strong>RBS</strong> Identity<br />

This section describes how to define the <strong>RBS</strong> Identity.<br />

1. In the Configuration menu, select Define <strong>and</strong> <strong>RBS</strong> Identity to open the<br />

Define <strong>RBS</strong> Identity window.<br />

2. In the <strong>RBS</strong> name field, enter the unique <strong>RBS</strong> name.<br />

3. In the <strong>RBS</strong> description field, enter the site name or the location of the site<br />

(maximum of 100 characters).<br />

4. Click OK.<br />

7.6.10 Defining Transmission Interface E1, 75<br />

This section describes how to define the PCM parameters for transmission<br />

interface E1, 75 .<br />

1. On the Configuration menu, click Define <strong>and</strong> PCM.<br />

2. Set the parameters according to the table <strong>and</strong> instructions below.<br />

3. Click OK when all parameters are set.<br />

Table 28 PCM Parameter Settings for Transmission Interface E1, 75<br />

PCM Parameter Settings<br />

Transmission Interface E1<br />

Network Topology See Site Installation Documentation<br />

Sync Source See Site Installation Documentation<br />

CRC-4 See Site Installation Documentation<br />

Spare bits See Site Installation Documentation<br />

Receiver Sensitivity<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

A Short haul<br />

B Short haul<br />

C Short haul<br />

D Short haul<br />

117


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

7.6.11 Defining Transmission Interface E1, 120<br />

This section describes how to define the PCM parameters for transmission<br />

interface E1, 120 .<br />

1. On the Configuration menu, click Define <strong>and</strong> PCM.<br />

2. Set the parameters according to the table <strong>and</strong> instructions below.<br />

3. Click OK when all parameters are set.<br />

Table 29 PCM Parameter Settings for Transmission Interface E1, 120<br />

PCM Parameter Settings<br />

Transmission Interface E1<br />

Network Topology See Site Installation Documentation<br />

Sync Source See Site Installation Documentation<br />

CRC-4 See Site Installation Documentation<br />

Spare bits See Site Installation Documentation<br />

Receiver Sensitivity<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

D<br />

See instructions below<br />

The instructions below describe how to calculate the cable attenuation between<br />

the Far End <strong>and</strong> the <strong>RBS</strong>. The cable attenuation determines whether receiver<br />

sensitivity is to be set to short or long haul. Use of long haul requires that the<br />

equipment at the far end supports long haul.<br />

Note: Ports C <strong>and</strong> D can also be used as a multidrop pair.<br />

Far End <strong>RBS</strong> 1<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 2 <strong>RBS</strong> 3<br />

A(C) B(D) A(C) B(D) A(C) B(D)<br />

Figure 48 System View for Transmission Interface E1, 120<br />

P008428C<br />

1. Calculate the cable attenuation between the Far End <strong>and</strong> the <strong>RBS</strong><br />

according to the following formula:<br />

Cable attenuation = cable length x cable attenuation per metre (or foot).<br />

If multidrop is used, then calculate the attenuation of the entire <strong>RBS</strong> chain,<br />

because Receiver Sensitivity A (C) is determined by the total attenuation of<br />

118 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

the chain. Receiver Sensitivity B (D) is determined by the total attenuation<br />

to the last <strong>RBS</strong> in the chain.<br />

2. If the cable attenuation is less than 6 dB, then set the receiver sensitivity to<br />

short haul.<br />

If the cable attenuation is greater than 6 dB, then set the receiver sensitivity<br />

to long haul.<br />

3. Set unused ports to short haul.<br />

Example of Receiver Sensitivity Parameter Calculation for E1, 120<br />

Far End<br />

150m<br />

0,03 dB/m<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 1<br />

A C B D<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0439A<br />

Figure 49 Example of Receiver Sensitivity Parameter Calculation for E1,<br />

120<br />

In this example, Far End <strong>and</strong> the <strong>RBS</strong> refer to<br />

the figure above The cable length between the <strong>RBS</strong><br />

<strong>and</strong> the Far End is 150 m.<br />

The cable attenuation for the cable between the <strong>RBS</strong><br />

<strong>and</strong> the Far End is 0.03 dB/m<br />

1. Calculate the cable attenuation between the<br />

Far End <strong>and</strong> the <strong>RBS</strong>:<br />

150 m x 0.03 dB/m = 4.5 dB<br />

2. Set Receiver Sensitivity A for the <strong>RBS</strong> to<br />

“Short haul”.<br />

3. Set Receiver Sensitivity C for the <strong>RBS</strong> to<br />

“Short haul” (not connected).<br />

4. Set Receiver Sensitivity B for the <strong>RBS</strong> to<br />

“Short haul” (not connected).<br />

5. Set Receiver Sensitivity D for the <strong>RBS</strong> to<br />

“Short haul” (not connected).<br />

Example 5 Calculating Receiver Sensitivity Parameters for Transmission<br />

Interface E1, 120<br />

7.6.12 Defining Transmission Interface T1, 100<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes how to define parameters for transmission interface T1,<br />

100 . When using the cable length for calculations in the following sections,<br />

the cable used must be the reference cable (multipair 22 AWG office cable)<br />

or similar.<br />

119


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

1. Find the transmission interface type in the Site Installation Documentation,<br />

<strong>and</strong> use the table below to find the applicable section with instructions<br />

for setting the parameters.<br />

Table 30 Selecting Section for Defining T1, Transmission Interface Type<br />

Known<br />

If the transmission interface type is... then...<br />

DSX-1 go to Section Defining LBO<br />

Parameters as Short Haul on<br />

Page 121.<br />

DS1 <strong>and</strong>...<br />

the signal level at the customer<br />

interface <strong>and</strong> the cable<br />

attenuation is known<br />

only the maximum input signal<br />

level at the far end is known<br />

neither the signal level at the<br />

customer interface nor the<br />

cable attenuation are known<br />

go to Section Defining LBO<br />

Parameters as Long Haul<br />

Manually on Page 124.<br />

go to Section Defining LBO<br />

Parameters as Long Haul<br />

Automatically on Page 126.<br />

go to Section Defining<br />

LBO Parameters when<br />

Transmission Characteristics<br />

are Unknown on Page 132.<br />

2. If there is no information about the transmission interface type in the Site<br />

Installation Documentation, use the cable length to find the appropriate<br />

section in the table below.<br />

Table 31 Selecting Section for Defining T1, Cable Length Known<br />

If... then...<br />

the cable length is less than 655 feet go to Section Defining LBO<br />

Parameters as Short Haul on<br />

Page 121.<br />

the cable<br />

length is<br />

more than<br />

655 feet<br />

<strong>and</strong>...<br />

the signal level at the<br />

customer interface <strong>and</strong> the<br />

cable attenuation is known<br />

only the maximum input<br />

signal level at the far end is<br />

known<br />

neither the signal level at the<br />

customer interface nor the<br />

cable attenuation are known<br />

go to Section Defining LBO<br />

Parameters as Long Haul<br />

Manually on Page 124.<br />

go to Section Defining LBO<br />

Parameters as Long Haul<br />

Automatically on Page 126.<br />

go to Section Defining<br />

LBO Parameters when<br />

Transmission Characteristics<br />

are Unknown on Page 132.<br />

3. If no information is given in Site Installation Documentation, see the table<br />

below.<br />

120 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Table 32 Selecting Section for Defining T1, Cable Length Unknown<br />

If... then...<br />

there is no information about the<br />

cable length<br />

Defining LBO Parameters as Short Haul<br />

go to Section Defining LBO Parameters<br />

when Transmission Characteristics are<br />

Unknown on Page 132.<br />

This section describes how to define the LBO parameters as short haul.<br />

1. On the Configuration menu, click Define <strong>and</strong> PCM to open the Define<br />

PCM window. See figure below.<br />

Figure 50 Defining Transmission Parameters<br />

2. Set the parameters according to the table <strong>and</strong> instructions below.<br />

3. Click OK when all parameters are set.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0223A<br />

121


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Table 33 PCM Parameter Settings for Transmission Interface T1, Short Haul<br />

PCM Parameter Setting<br />

Sync Source See Site Installation Documentation<br />

Transmission Interface DS1(T1)<br />

Network Topology See Site Installation Documentation<br />

LBO A<br />

LBO B<br />

LBO C<br />

LBO D<br />

See instructions below<br />

FDL Use See Site Installation Documentation<br />

The instructions below describe how to calculate the LBO parameters.<br />

Note: Ports C <strong>and</strong> D can also be used as a multidrop pair.<br />

Customer<br />

Interface<br />

DSX-1<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 1<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 2 <strong>RBS</strong> 3<br />

A(C) B(D) A(C) B(D) A(C) B(D)<br />

P008645B<br />

Figure 51 System View for Transmission Interface T1, Short Haul<br />

1. Determine the length of the cable between the <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>and</strong> the customer<br />

interface (the cross-connection point DSX-1). See figure above.<br />

If multidrop is used, then calculate the attenuation of the entire <strong>RBS</strong> chain,<br />

since LBO A (C) is determined by the total attenuation of the chain. LBO B<br />

(D) is determined by the total attenuation to the last <strong>RBS</strong> in the chain.<br />

If the cable length is not known, then set the LBO parameters to ‘‘Short<br />

h., 0 – 133 feet’’.<br />

2. Use the cable length <strong>and</strong> the table below to set the correct LBO parameters<br />

in the OMT.<br />

122 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


Table 34 Setting LBO Parameters to Short Haul in OMT<br />

Cable Length LBO Setting<br />

Feet Metres (in the OMT)<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

0 – 133 0 – 40 Short h., 0 – 133 feet<br />

133 – 266 40 – 81 Short h., 133 – 266 feet<br />

266 – 399 81 – 122 Short h., 266 – 399 feet<br />

399 – 533 122 – 162 Short h., 399 – 533 feet<br />

533 – 655 162 – 200 Short h., 533 – 655 feet<br />

3. Set unused ports to ‘‘Short h., 0 – 133 feet’’.<br />

Example of an LBO Parameters Calculation for Short Haul<br />

Customer<br />

Interface<br />

(DSX-1)<br />

200 feet<br />

(61 metres)<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 1<br />

A C B D<br />

100 feet<br />

(30 metres)<br />

Figure 52 Calculating LBO Parameters for Short Haul<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 2<br />

A C B D<br />

In this example, customer interface (DSX-1),<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 1 <strong>and</strong> <strong>RBS</strong> 2 refer to the figure above.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 1:<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0472A<br />

The cable length between <strong>RBS</strong> 1 <strong>and</strong> the customer interface<br />

(DSX-1) is 200 feet (61 m).<br />

1. Set LBO A for <strong>RBS</strong> 1 to “Short h., 133 – 266 feet”.<br />

See the table above<br />

2. Set LBO B for <strong>RBS</strong> 1 to “Short h., 0 – 133 feet”.<br />

3. Set LBO C <strong>and</strong> D (not connected) for <strong>RBS</strong> 1 to<br />

“Short h., 0 – 133 feet”.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 2:<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

The cable length between <strong>RBS</strong> 2 <strong>and</strong> the customer interface<br />

(DSX-1) is 300 feet (200 + 100 feet) (91 m).<br />

1. Set LBO A for <strong>RBS</strong> 2 to “Short h., 266 – 399 feet”.<br />

See the table above.<br />

2. Set LBO B, C <strong>and</strong> D (not connected) for <strong>RBS</strong> 2 to<br />

“Short h., 0 – 133 feet”.<br />

Example 6 Defining LBO Parameters as Short Haul<br />

123


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Defining LBO Parameters as Long Haul Manually<br />

This section describes how to define LBO as long haul when the signal level at<br />

the customer interface <strong>and</strong> the cable attenuation are known.<br />

Signal level at the customer interface means either the maximum input signal<br />

level at the Far End or the carrier advised code at the network interface. See<br />

figure below.<br />

Customer Interface<br />

(Far End/Network<br />

Interface)<br />

Maximum input<br />

signal level/Carrier<br />

advised code<br />

Cable attenuation<br />

<strong>RBS</strong><br />

A(C) B(D)<br />

P008431B<br />

Figure 53 System Parameters for Defining LBO Parameters to Long Haul<br />

1. On the Configuration menu, click Define <strong>and</strong> PCM to open the Define<br />

PCM window. See Figure 50 on page 121.<br />

2. Set the parameters according to the table <strong>and</strong> instructions below.<br />

3. Click OK when all parameters are set.<br />

Table 35 Manual PCM Parameter Settings for Transmission Interface T1,<br />

Long Haul<br />

PCM Parameter Settings<br />

Transmission Interface DS1(T1)<br />

Network Topology See Site Installation Documentation.<br />

Sync Source See Site Installation Documentation.<br />

LBO A<br />

LBO B<br />

LBO C<br />

LBO D<br />

See instructions below<br />

FDL Use See Site Installation Documentation.<br />

The instructions below describe how to set the LBO parameters manually to<br />

long haul.<br />

Note: It is also possible to use ports C <strong>and</strong> D as a multidrop pair.<br />

1. If the carrier advised code is given in the Site Installation Documentation,<br />

then use the table below to set the correct A (B, C, D) LBO parameters.<br />

124 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

If multidrop is used, then calculate the attenuation of the entire <strong>RBS</strong> chain,<br />

since LBO A (C) is determined by the total attenuation of the chain.<br />

Table 36 Long Haul Parameters for Different Carrier Advised Codes at the<br />

Network Interface<br />

Cable Attenuation<br />

(dB)<br />

Long Haul Parameters for Different Values of the Carrier<br />

Advised Code at the Network Interface<br />

A (0 dB) B (-7.5 dB) C (-15 dB) D (-22.5 dB)<br />

0 – 7.5 0 -7.5 -15 -22.5<br />

7.5 – 15 N/A 0 -7.5 -15<br />

15 – 22.5 N/A N/A 0 -7.5<br />

> 22.5 N/A N/A N/A 0<br />

2. If the maximum input signal level is given in the Site Installation<br />

Documentation, use the table below to set the correct LBO A (B, C, D)<br />

parameters.<br />

Table 37 Long Haul Parameters for Different Maximum Input Signal Levels<br />

Cable Attenuation<br />

(dB)<br />

Long Haul Parameters for Different Values of the<br />

Maximum Input Signal Level at the Far End<br />

0 dB -7.5 dB -15 dB -22.5 dB<br />

0 – 7.5 0 -7.5 -15 -22.5<br />

7.5 – 15 0 0 -7.5 -15<br />

15 – 22.5 0 0 0 -7.5<br />

> 22.5 0 0 0 0<br />

3. If multidrop is used, then set LBO B (D) to ‘‘Long h., 0 dB’’. Used B (D)<br />

ports in multidrop configurations should always be set to ‘‘Long h., 0 dB’’<br />

4. Set unused ports to ‘‘Short h., 0 – 133 feet’’. Unused ports should always<br />

be set to ‘‘Short h., 0 – 133 feet’’.<br />

Example of a Manual LBO Parameters Calculation for Long Haul<br />

Network<br />

Interface<br />

Carrier Advised<br />

Code=<br />

-15 dB<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

Cable<br />

Attenuation =<br />

5 dB<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 1<br />

A C B D<br />

Cable<br />

Attenuation =<br />

3 dB<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 2<br />

A C B D<br />

Cable<br />

Attenuation =<br />

9 dB<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 3<br />

A C B D<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0473A<br />

Figure 54 Calculating LBO Parameters Manually for Long Haul<br />

125


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

In this example, network interface, <strong>RBS</strong> 1,<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 2 <strong>and</strong> <strong>RBS</strong> 3 refer to the figure above.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 1:<br />

Carrier advised code at the network interface is<br />

“C” (-15 dB) <strong>and</strong> the cable attenuation is 5 dB.<br />

1. See the table Long haul parameters for different<br />

carrier advised codes at the network interface to<br />

find the correct LBO parameter for LBO A.<br />

2. Set LBO A to “Long h., -15 dB”.<br />

3. Set LBO B to “Long h., 0 dB”.<br />

4. Set LBO C <strong>and</strong> D (not connected) to<br />

“Short h., 0 - 133 feet”.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 2:<br />

The cable attenuation between <strong>RBS</strong> 1 <strong>and</strong> <strong>RBS</strong> 2 is 3 dB.<br />

1. Calculate the total cable attenuation between <strong>RBS</strong> 2<br />

<strong>and</strong> the network interface:<br />

5 + 3 = 8 dB<br />

2. See the table Long haul parameters for different<br />

carrier advised codes at the network interface<br />

to find the correct LBO parameter for LBO A.<br />

3. Set LBO A to “Long h., -7.5 dB”.<br />

4. Set LBO B to “Long h., 0 dB”.<br />

5. Set LBO C <strong>and</strong> D (not connected) to<br />

“Short h., 0 - 133 feet”.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 3:<br />

The cable attenuation between <strong>RBS</strong> 2 <strong>and</strong> <strong>RBS</strong> 3 is 9 dB.<br />

1. Calculate the total cable attenuation for <strong>RBS</strong> 3<br />

<strong>and</strong> the network interface:<br />

5 + 3 + 9 = 17 dB<br />

2. See the table Long haul parameters for different<br />

carrier advised codes at the network interface<br />

to find the correct LBO parameter for LBO A.<br />

3. Set LBO A to “Long h., 0 dB”.<br />

4. Set LBO B, C <strong>and</strong> D (not connected) to<br />

“Short h., 0 - 133 feet”<br />

Example 7 Calculating LBO Parameters Manually for Long Haul<br />

Defining LBO Parameters as Long Haul Automatically<br />

This section describes how to define LBO to long haul when the maximum<br />

input signal level at the Far End is known, but not the cable attenuation. The<br />

cable attenuation can be measured by the <strong>RBS</strong> according to the instructions<br />

below. See figure below.<br />

126 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


Customer Interface<br />

(Far End)<br />

Maximum input<br />

signal level<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Measured cable attenuation<br />

<strong>RBS</strong><br />

A(C) B(D)<br />

P008626B<br />

Figure 55 System Parameters for Defining LBO Parameters Automatically<br />

to Long Haul<br />

1. On the Configuration menu, click Define <strong>and</strong> PCM to open the Define<br />

PCM window. See Figure 50 on page 121.<br />

2. Use the table <strong>and</strong> instructions below to set the parameters.<br />

3. Click OK when all parameters are set.<br />

Table 38 PCM Parameter Settings for Transmission Interface T1, Long Haul<br />

Automatically<br />

PCM Parameter Setting<br />

Transmission Interface DS1(T1)<br />

Network Topology See Site Installation Documentation.<br />

Sync Source See Site Installation Documentation.<br />

LBO A<br />

LBO B<br />

LBO C<br />

LBO D<br />

See instructions below<br />

FDL Use See Site Installation Documentation.<br />

The instructions below describe how to set the PCM parameters automatically.<br />

For <strong>RBS</strong> 1 only:<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

1. Set LBO A (C) to ‘‘Long h. ALBO, dB’’.<br />

2. If st<strong>and</strong>-alone, then set unused ports to ‘‘Short h., 0 – 133 feet’’. Unused<br />

ports are always set to ‘‘Short h., 0 – 133 feet’’.<br />

The <strong>RBS</strong> automatically sets the correct value in the IDB when the IDB<br />

is installed.<br />

Note: The following instructions are for multidrop only.<br />

127


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

If multidrop is used, the line attenuation for <strong>RBS</strong> 1 must be measured according<br />

to the instructions below.<br />

For <strong>RBS</strong> 1:<br />

1. Set LBO B (D) to ‘‘Long h., 0 dB’’. Used B (D) ports in multidrop are always<br />

set to ‘‘Long h., 0 dB’’.<br />

2. On the <strong>RBS</strong> 2000 menu, click Connect.<br />

3. On the Configuration menu, click Install IDB.<br />

The <strong>RBS</strong> automatically sets the correct value in the IDB.<br />

The <strong>RBS</strong> remains in Local mode after the IDB has been installed.<br />

4. On the Maintenance menu, click Monitor.<br />

5. In the Available monitors box, select ‘‘Line Attenuation for PCM-A’’ (C) <strong>and</strong><br />

click → to add ‘‘PCM’’ in the Monitors to start box. See figure below.<br />

128 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


Figure 56 Monitoring Cable Attenuation<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>0477A<br />

6. Click on Start Monitor <strong>and</strong> read the value of the cable attenuation. The<br />

displayed value is given in deci dB (10 deci dB = 1 dB). Make a note of<br />

the value in the test record.<br />

When configuring the IDB for <strong>RBS</strong> 2 <strong>and</strong> <strong>RBS</strong> 3, follow the instructions below.<br />

For <strong>RBS</strong> 2 <strong>and</strong> <strong>RBS</strong> 3:<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

7. Set LBO A (C) on <strong>RBS</strong> 2 (<strong>RBS</strong> 3) to ‘‘Long h. ALBO, 0 dB’’.<br />

8. On the Configuration menu, click Install IDB.<br />

9. On the Maintenance menu, click Monitor.<br />

10. In the Available monitors box, select ‘‘Line Attenuation for PCM-A’’ (C) <strong>and</strong><br />

click → to add ‘‘PCM’’ in the Monitors to start box.<br />

129


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

11. Click on Start Monitor <strong>and</strong> read the value of the cable attenuation. The<br />

displayed value is given in deci dB (10 deci dB = 1 dB). Make a note of<br />

the value in the test record.<br />

12. Add the measured cable attenuation values. The value given by Lin Att<br />

PCM A (C) is the cable attenuation to the previous <strong>RBS</strong> in the chain, so<br />

the measured value must be added to the value for the previous <strong>RBS</strong>(s) to<br />

obtain the total cable attenuation for the <strong>RBS</strong> in question.<br />

13. Use the total cable attenuation value to find the long haul parameter value<br />

for LBO A (C) in the table below.<br />

Table 39 Long Haul Parameters for Different Maximum Input Signal Levels<br />

Cable<br />

Attenuation (dB)<br />

Long Haul Parameters for Different Maximum Input<br />

Signal Levels at the Far End<br />

0 dB -7.5 dB -15 dB -22.5 dB<br />

0 – 7.5 0 -7.5 -15 -22.5<br />

7.5 – 15 0 0 -7.5 -15<br />

15 – 22.5 0 0 0 -7.5<br />

> 22.5 0 0 0 0<br />

14. If there is another <strong>RBS</strong> in the chain, then set LBO B (D) to ‘‘Long h., 0<br />

dB’’. Used B (D) ports in multidrop configurations should always be set<br />

to ‘‘Long h., 0 dB’’.<br />

If this is the last <strong>RBS</strong> in the chain, then set LBO B (D) to ‘‘Short h., 0 – 133<br />

feet’’. Unused ports are always set to ‘‘Short h., 0 – 133 feet’’.<br />

15. If there is another <strong>RBS</strong> in the chain, then repeat steps 7 to 14.<br />

Example of an Automatic LBO Parameters Calculation for Long Haul<br />

Far End<br />

Maximum<br />

input signal<br />

level=<br />

-15 dB<br />

Measured cable<br />

attenuation =<br />

5 dB<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 1<br />

A C B D<br />

Measured cable<br />

attenuation =<br />

3 dB<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 2<br />

A C B D<br />

Measured cable<br />

attenuation =<br />

9 dB<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 3<br />

A C B D<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0474A<br />

Figure 57 Calculating LBO Parameters Automatically for Long Haul<br />

130 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

In this example, Far End, <strong>RBS</strong> 1, <strong>RBS</strong> 2 <strong>and</strong> <strong>RBS</strong> 3<br />

refer to the figure above.<br />

Maximum input signal level at the Far End is -15 dB.<br />

The cable attenuation is not known.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 1:<br />

1. Set LBO A to “Long h. ALBO, -15 dB”.<br />

The cable attenuation is measured by the <strong>RBS</strong> to 5 dB.<br />

2. The value of LBO A is set automatically by the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

3. Set LBO B to “Long h., 0 dB”.<br />

4. Set LBO C <strong>and</strong> D (not connected) to “Short h., 0 - 133 feet”<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 2:<br />

1. Set LBO A to “Long h. ALBO, 0 dB”.<br />

The cable attenuation between <strong>RBS</strong> 1 <strong>and</strong> <strong>RBS</strong> 2 is measured<br />

to 3 dB by <strong>RBS</strong> 2.<br />

2. Add the two measurements to obtain the total cable<br />

attenuation for <strong>RBS</strong> 2:<br />

5 + 3 dB = 8 dB<br />

3. See the table above to find the correct<br />

LBO parameter for LBO A.<br />

4. Set LBO A to “Long h., -7.5 dB”.<br />

5. Set LBO B to “Long h. 0 dB”.<br />

6. Set LBO C <strong>and</strong> D (not connected) to<br />

“Short h., 0 - 133 feet”.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 3:<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

1. Set LBO A to “Long h. ALBO, 0 dB”.<br />

The cable attenuation between <strong>RBS</strong> 2 <strong>and</strong> <strong>RBS</strong> 3 is measured<br />

to 9 dB by <strong>RBS</strong> 3.<br />

2. Add the three measurements to obtain the total cable<br />

attenuation for <strong>RBS</strong> 3:<br />

5 + 3 + 9 dB = 17 dB<br />

3. See the table above to find the correct<br />

LBO parameter for LBO A.<br />

4. Set LBO A to “Long h., 0 dB”.<br />

5. Set LBO B, C <strong>and</strong> D (not connected) to<br />

“Short h., 0 - 133 feet”.<br />

Example 8 Calculating LBO Parameters Automatically for Long Haul<br />

131


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Defining LBO Parameters when Transmission Characteristics are<br />

Unknown<br />

This section describes how to define the LBO parameters if none of the<br />

following parameters are known: carrier advised code, maximum input signal at<br />

the customer interface, cable attenuation or cable length.<br />

1. On the Configuration menu, click Define <strong>and</strong> PCM to open the Define<br />

PCM window. See Figure 50 on page 121.<br />

2. Set the parameters according to the table below.<br />

3. Click OK when all parameters are set.<br />

Table 40 PCM Parameter Settings for Transmission Interface T1,<br />

Transmission Characteristics Unknown<br />

PCM Parameter Settings<br />

Transmission Interface DS1(T1)<br />

Network Topology See Site Installation Documentation.<br />

Sync Source See Site Installation Documentation.<br />

LBO A ‘‘Long h., 0 dB’’<br />

LBO B<br />

LBO C<br />

LBO D<br />

7.6.13 Defining TEI<br />

‘‘Long h., 0 dB’’, if used<br />

‘‘Short h., 0 – 133 feet’’, if unused<br />

‘‘Long h., 0 dB’’, if used<br />

‘‘Short h., 0 – 133 feet’’, if unused<br />

‘‘Long h., 0 dB’’, if used<br />

‘‘Short h., 0 – 133 feet’’, if unused<br />

FDL Use See Site Installation Documentation.<br />

This section describes how to define the TEI value for the IXU.<br />

1. On the Configuration menu, click Define <strong>and</strong> TEI to open the Define TEI<br />

dialog box.<br />

2. Click Run to open the Define TEI for IXU 0 window.<br />

3. Enter the TEI value found in the Site Installation Documentation. Click OK.<br />

7.6.14 Defining TNOM<br />

This section describes how to define the Transport Network Operation <strong>and</strong><br />

Maintenance (TNOM) parameters if supported by the network.<br />

132 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

1. On the Configuration menu, click Define <strong>and</strong> TNOM to open the Define<br />

TNOM window.<br />

2. Set TNOM Use to ‘‘On’’.<br />

7.6.15 Installing IDB<br />

3. In the TNOM Timeslot box, enter a valid time slot value:<br />

−1 – 24 (default value 24), T1<br />

−1 – 31 (default value 31), E1<br />

4. In the TNOM Node ID box, enter the correct values. Valid TNOM Node ID<br />

values are 1 – 65534 (default value is 1). Click OK when finished.<br />

This section describes how to install the IDB in the <strong>RBS</strong>, by connecting the<br />

OMT to the <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>and</strong> loading the IDB from the PC to the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

Note: The <strong>RBS</strong> must be in Local Mode in order to accept a new or modified<br />

IDB.<br />

1. Physically connect the OMT to the <strong>RBS</strong> if not already connected. See<br />

Section 7.6.1 Connecting OMT on page 109.<br />

2. On the <strong>RBS</strong> 2000 menu, click Connect to connect the OMT logically<br />

to the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

3. On the Configuration menu, click Install IDB.<br />

If the OMT detects inconsistencies between the <strong>RBS</strong> HW <strong>and</strong> the IDB,<br />

then the differences will be displayed in a window. However, the IDB in the<br />

<strong>RBS</strong>can still be overwriten if an <strong>RBS</strong>/IDB inconsistency has been detected.<br />

The IXU <strong>and</strong> RRUs remain in Local Mode after the IDB has been installed.<br />

4. On the Configuration menu, click Site Specific Data <strong>and</strong> Display to open<br />

the site_specific_data.txt - window. Check that the correct parameters<br />

have been defined.<br />

7.7 Reading Fault Status<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes how to read the fault status, using the OMT. If any fault<br />

indicator on the <strong>RBS</strong> is on, fault status must be read.<br />

1. Read the IDB if it has not already been read. See Section 7.6.2 Reading<br />

IDB on page 110.<br />

2. On the Maintenance menu, click Monitor to open the Monitor window.<br />

See figure below.<br />

133


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Figure 58 Reading Fault Status<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0476A<br />

3. In the Available monitors box, select ‘‘MO fault maps’’ <strong>and</strong> click → to add<br />

‘‘<strong>RBS</strong>’’ into the Monitors to start box.<br />

4. Click Start monitor.<br />

5. In the <strong>RBS</strong> Event Monitor window, check the MO faults box to see if there<br />

are any faults. If there are, then correct these before continuing.<br />

When an MO fault is selected, corresponding fault description, action <strong>and</strong><br />

related faults are displayed. See also Appendix Fault List.<br />

6. Close the <strong>RBS</strong> Event Monitor window.<br />

7.8 Testing External Alarms<br />

This section describes how to use the OMT to test that all external alarms, if<br />

used, are recognized <strong>and</strong> h<strong>and</strong>led correctly. The test is passed when all alarms<br />

are recognized.<br />

134 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Note: The alarms must be individually identifiable in the OMT. There must<br />

be no doubt which alarm was indicated. The alarm message must<br />

be unique for each alarm.<br />

1. On the Maintenance menu, click Monitor to open the Monitor window.<br />

See figure below.<br />

Figure 59 Testing External Alarms<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0475A<br />

2. In the Available monitors box, select ‘‘External Alarm Status’’ <strong>and</strong> click → to<br />

add ‘‘Alarm Inlets’’ in the Monitors to start box.<br />

3. Click Start monitor.<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

4. Trigger the desired alarm by either shorting or breaking it.<br />

Note: Test the alarms in numerical order, <strong>and</strong> always start with alarm 1.<br />

5. Check that the appropriate alarm appears in the <strong>RBS</strong> Event Monitor window.<br />

135


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

6. Release the trigger on the alarm <strong>and</strong> check that the alarm disappears<br />

from the OMT.<br />

7. Repeat steps 5 to 7 for all defined external alarms.<br />

8. Close the <strong>RBS</strong> Event Monitor window when finished.<br />

7.9 Performing Concluding Routines<br />

7.9.1 Saving IDB<br />

This section describes the actions to take before leaving the site <strong>and</strong> provides a<br />

site checklist. It also contains a test record.<br />

In case it is necessary to re-install the IDB, the IDB parameters must be saved<br />

on the PC.<br />

1. On the Configuration menu, click Save IDB.<br />

2. Give the IDB file an <strong>RBS</strong>-specific name <strong>and</strong> save the IDB on the PC.<br />

7.9.2 Checking RRU <strong>and</strong> IXU Indicators<br />

1. Ensure that all lids are closed <strong>and</strong> fastened with screws.<br />

2. Set the RRU <strong>and</strong> IXU in remote mode by pressing the Local/Remote<br />

button.<br />

3. Check that the RRU <strong>and</strong> IXU indicators have the status shown in the<br />

applicable table below:<br />

• Table 41 on page 137 shows the approved status of the RRU <strong>and</strong> IXU<br />

indicators when the <strong>RBS</strong> is in remote mode but not connected to the BSC.<br />

• Table 42 on page 137 shows the approved status of the RRU <strong>and</strong> IXU<br />

indicators when the <strong>RBS</strong> is in remote mode, fully operational, <strong>and</strong><br />

connected to the BSC.<br />

136 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Table 41 RRU <strong>and</strong> IXU Indicators After Site Installation Tests Without BSC<br />

Connection<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> in remote mode <strong>and</strong> no BSC connected<br />

RRU IXU<br />

Fault Off Fault Off<br />

Operational Off Operational Off<br />

Local Flashing Local Flashing<br />

RF off On <strong>RBS</strong> fault Off<br />

AC power on On (1)<br />

DC power on On (1)<br />

RRU temp. Off<br />

(1) Depending on power system configuration.<br />

(2) A, B, C, <strong>and</strong>/or D, depending on transmission configuration.<br />

External alarm Off<br />

AC power on On (1)<br />

DC power on On (1)<br />

IXU temp. Off<br />

Transmission OK On/Off (2)<br />

Table 42 RRU <strong>and</strong> IXU Indicators After Site Installation Tests With BSC<br />

Connection<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> in remote mode, fully operational <strong>and</strong> connected to the BSC<br />

RRU IXU<br />

Fault Off Fault Off<br />

Operational On Operational On<br />

Local Off Local Off<br />

RF off On/Off (1)<br />

AC power on On (2)<br />

DC power on On (2)<br />

RRU temp. Off<br />

(1) Depending on BSC.<br />

(2) Depending on power system configuration.<br />

(3) A, B, C, <strong>and</strong>/or D, depending on transmission configuration.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> fault Off<br />

External alarm Off<br />

AC power on On (2)<br />

DC power on On (2)<br />

IXU temp. Off<br />

Transmission OK On (3)<br />

4. If the Operational indicator on the RRU <strong>and</strong>/or IXU is flashing, SW is being<br />

downloaded from the BSC. Wait until downloading is complete.<br />

5. If the Local indicator on the RRU <strong>and</strong>/or IXU does not have the correct<br />

status, press the Local/Remote button to switch status.<br />

137


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

6. If <strong>RBS</strong> site integration is not performed immediately after site installation<br />

tests, then close the sunshields.<br />

7.9.3 Completing the Test Record<br />

This section contains a test record. It is recommended to fill in the test record<br />

during the testing procedure.<br />

138 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


Figure 60 Test Record for Site Installation Tests<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

139


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

7.9.4 Filling in the Checklist<br />

The following checklist is not m<strong>and</strong>atory but strongly recommended. Local<br />

procedures <strong>and</strong> safety regulations must be evaluated <strong>and</strong> included in this<br />

checklist.<br />

Table 43 Checklist<br />

Check the following: OK<br />

1 The indicators on the RRU <strong>and</strong> the IXU are in the approved<br />

status.<br />

2 The test equipment has been disconnected from the <strong>RBS</strong><br />

3 The <strong>RBS</strong> cabinet <strong>and</strong> the mounting base are free from foreign<br />

objects.<br />

4 All cabinets <strong>and</strong> cables are free of damage.<br />

5 All EMC sealants <strong>and</strong> cable penetrations are intact.<br />

6 Top <strong>and</strong> bottom of cabinet are free of obstructions (for airflow).<br />

7 The cabinet has been locked, <strong>and</strong> the screws have been<br />

tightened.<br />

8 All tools have been accounted for.<br />

9 All paperwork has been completed.<br />

140 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


8 <strong>RBS</strong> Site Integration<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

This chapter describes how to integrate the <strong>RBS</strong> with the BSC into the GSM<br />

network, <strong>and</strong> the tests used to verify the integration.<br />

Integration is carried out with the <strong>RBS</strong> connected to a PCM link <strong>and</strong> in close<br />

co-operation with a BSC operator.<br />

All results must be documented in the test record.<br />

Preconditions at the <strong>RBS</strong> Site<br />

This section describes the preconditions for personnel at the <strong>RBS</strong> site before<br />

integrating the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

Before starting the integration at the <strong>RBS</strong> site, ensure the following:<br />

• The test record for Antenna System Tests has been completed<br />

• The test record for Site Installation Tests has been completed<br />

• The <strong>RBS</strong> commissioning personnel are in contact with the BSC operator<br />

• The <strong>RBS</strong> commissioning personnel <strong>and</strong> the BSC operator have agreed<br />

on the following parameters:<br />

− BCCHNO parameters<br />

− DCHNO parameters<br />

− BSIC parameters<br />

− Time slots (TS) used for SDCCH<br />

Preconditions at the BSC<br />

This section describes the preconditions for personnel at the BSC before<br />

integrating the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

Before starting the integration at the BSC, ensure the following:<br />

• The test record for Network Element (NE) has been completed<br />

• The test record for Integration of MSC/VLR has been completed<br />

• The BSC operator is in contact with the <strong>RBS</strong> commissioning personnel<br />

• The BSC operator <strong>and</strong> the <strong>RBS</strong> commissioning personnel have agreed<br />

upon the following parameters:<br />

141


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

− BCCHNO parameters<br />

− DCHNO parameters<br />

− BSIC parameters<br />

− Time slots (TS) used for SDCCH<br />

Work Process for <strong>RBS</strong> Site Integration<br />

This section describes the order in which to perform the integration <strong>and</strong> tests.<br />

Each section should be completed <strong>and</strong> the results written in the test record<br />

before moving on to the next step in the process. See Figure below.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0244A<br />

Testing Transmission<br />

Bringing the <strong>RBS</strong><br />

into Service<br />

Making Test Calls on<br />

the Air Interface<br />

Performing<br />

Concluding Routines<br />

Figure 61 Work Process for <strong>RBS</strong> Site Integration<br />

The work order can be altered, or tests can be removed due to local<br />

circumstances. However, before any such changes are made, an investigation<br />

of the consequences must be carried out. If the work order is changed or tests<br />

are removed, the department responsible for this manual must be notified <strong>and</strong><br />

agree to the changes, or the responsibility is automatically transferred to the<br />

person making the decision.<br />

8.1 Testing Transmission<br />

8.1.1 Transmission Test on E1<br />

This section describes how to test transmission, when the E1 transmission<br />

interface is used.<br />

142 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

1. Open the RRU, <strong>and</strong> the IXU<br />

cover.<br />

2. Remove the PCM cable<br />

plug, starting with position A,<br />

<strong>and</strong> connect it to the Loop<br />

Back socket on the Loop<br />

forward/backward board.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>0357B<br />

Loop forward/backward board<br />

3. Request that the BSC operator checks the Digital Path on the active<br />

RBLT.<br />

4. Remove the PCM cable plug from the Loop forward/backward board<br />

<strong>and</strong> reconnect it to the socket in the IXU.<br />

5. Wait for the BSC operator to confirm that the Abis Paths are correctly<br />

defined <strong>and</strong> that the Digital Path between the BSC <strong>and</strong> the <strong>RBS</strong> is<br />

working properly.<br />

6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for all used PCM lines.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1267A<br />

143


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

7. Enter Pass/Fail in the test record, see Section 8.4.2 Filling in the Test<br />

Record on page 150.<br />

8.1.2 Transmission Test on T1<br />

This section describes how to test transmission, when the T1 transmission<br />

interface is used.<br />

Note: Transmission test on T1 can also be performed in the same way as E1,<br />

according to Section 8.1.1 on page 142.<br />

1. Request that the BSC operator uses CSU functions.<br />

2. Configure the <strong>RBS</strong> for CSU, using OMT, <strong>and</strong> restart the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

For more information regarding CSU ANSI, see:<br />

BSS R11 Software Reference<br />

Manual<br />

EN/LZT 720 0047<br />

1. Wait for the BSC to check the Digital Path on the active RBLT.<br />

2. Deactivate CSU functions in the <strong>RBS</strong>, using OMT <strong>and</strong> restart the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

3. Wait for the BSC operator to check that the Abis Paths are correctly defined<br />

<strong>and</strong> that the Digital Path between the BSC <strong>and</strong> the <strong>RBS</strong> works properly.<br />

4. Enter Pass/Fail in the test record, see Section 8.4.2 Filling in the Test<br />

Record on page 150.<br />

8.2 Bringing the <strong>RBS</strong> into Service<br />

This section describes how to bring the <strong>RBS</strong> into service.<br />

Note: The BSC operator can bring the MOs into service <strong>and</strong> deblock them<br />

even when the <strong>RBS</strong> is in remote mode. (The <strong>RBS</strong> then responds<br />

directly to the BSC operator.)<br />

1. Set the <strong>RBS</strong> in local mode by pressing the Local/remote button on the IXU.<br />

2. Wait until the Local indicator has a steady yellow light, indicating that the<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> is in Local Mode.<br />

3. Wait for the BSC operator to bring the MOs on each TRX into service<br />

logically <strong>and</strong> deblock them.<br />

4. Press the Local/Remote button on the IXU. The Local indicator will start<br />

flashing.<br />

144 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

The <strong>RBS</strong> now downloads <strong>and</strong> executes the comm<strong>and</strong>s previously prepared<br />

by the BSC operator. When the Local indicator turns off, the <strong>RBS</strong> is in<br />

remote mode.<br />

5. Check that all RRUs are in Remote Mode by confirming that the Local<br />

indicator on each RRU is off.<br />

6. If BTS PCM Supervision is used, then wait for the BSC operator to activate<br />

it <strong>and</strong> check that MO DP state is operational.<br />

7. Wait for the BSC operator to activate <strong>and</strong> check the cell.<br />

8.3 Making Test Calls on the Air Interface<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes how to make test calls on the air interface. The tests are<br />

performed from the <strong>RBS</strong> site to verify that all TSs on all TRXs work properly.<br />

The test calls are performed by using a Test Mobile Station (TEMS). See TEMS<br />

Investigation GSM Manual in the TEMS Kit.<br />

Note: It is important to test all TCH-TSs to ensure full capacity.<br />

All the test calls should be made from a distance of at least 50 m (164 ft) from<br />

the antenna system. See Figure below.<br />

Min 50<br />

TEMS<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0288A<br />

Figure 62 Distance From the Antenna System During Test Call Using TEMS<br />

145


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

8.3.1 Making Test Call Using TEMS<br />

This section describes how to make a test call using a TEMS <strong>and</strong> a PC with<br />

TEMS SW. The test confirms that all TSs on all TRXs work properly.<br />

The test record should be completed during the test. See Section 8.4.2 Filling<br />

in the Test Record on page 150.<br />

1. Connect the TEMS cable between the TEMS <strong>and</strong> the PC COM port 1 on<br />

the PC containing TEMS SW.<br />

2. Start the TEMS <strong>and</strong> the TEMS SW.<br />

For more information on the TEMS <strong>and</strong> TEMS SW, see :<br />

TEMS Investigation GSM<br />

Manual<br />

LZT 108 2684<br />

3. In the Externals menu, select Enable Connections. In the External<br />

Connection window, define the external connections according to the<br />

table below.<br />

Table 44 Defining the External Connections<br />

Definition Port<br />

MS1 Port COM1<br />

MS2 Port N/A<br />

Position Port N/A<br />

4. In the Control menu, select Test of TCH. Enter the following parameters:<br />

• Telephone number<br />

• Frequency (ARCFN)<br />

• Broadcast Channel (BCCH)<br />

• Frequency for the Traffic Channel (TCH)<br />

5. Select the TSs used for traffic <strong>and</strong> click on Add. The BCCH <strong>and</strong> SDCCH<br />

channels are used for signalling <strong>and</strong> do not carry traffic. Do not make test<br />

calls on these TSs.<br />

Repeat this procedure for each TRX.<br />

6. Click on the Start button. The TEMS now makes a test call on all selected<br />

TSs. For each TS, verify the speech quality <strong>and</strong> write ‘‘Pass’’ or ‘‘Fail’’ in the<br />

test record. See Section 8.4.2 Filling in the Test Record on page 150.<br />

146 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


8.3.2 Making Diversity Test Call<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

This section describes how to make a diversity test call. The test confirms that<br />

both RXD A <strong>and</strong> RXD B work properly.<br />

Note: If antenna diversity is not supported, do not make a diversity test call.<br />

1. Wait for the BSC operator to configure RXD=A.<br />

2. Request the BSC operator to block all TRXs except the one being tested<br />

<strong>and</strong> check that BCCH <strong>and</strong> SDCCH are configured.<br />

3. Make a test call from the TEMS.<br />

4. Request the BSC operator to check that the TCH being tested is busy.<br />

Check the speech quality, <strong>and</strong> write ‘‘Pass’’ or ‘‘Fail’’ in the test record. See<br />

Section 8.4.2 Filling in the Test Record on page 150.<br />

5. Terminate the call.<br />

6. Request the BSC to check that the tested TCH is released.<br />

7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 for all TRXs in the cell.<br />

8. Wait for the BSC operator to configure RXD=B.<br />

9. Request the BSC operator to block all TRXs except for the one being<br />

tested, <strong>and</strong> check that BCCH <strong>and</strong> SDCCH are configured.<br />

10. Make a test call from the TEMS.<br />

11. Request the BSC operator to check that the TCH being tested is busy.<br />

Verify the speech quality <strong>and</strong> write ‘‘Pass’’ or ‘‘Fail’’ in the test record. See<br />

Section 8.4.2 Filling in the Test Record on page 150.<br />

12. Terminate the call.<br />

13. Request the BSC to check that the tested TCH is released.<br />

14. Repeat steps 9 to 13 for each TRX in the cell.<br />

15. Wait for the BSC operator to restore the cell.<br />

8.3.3 Making Test Call from the Fixed Network<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes how to make a test call from the fixed network. The test<br />

confirms that the cell is available from the fixed network.<br />

1. Request the BSC operator to configure a TRX with BCCH <strong>and</strong> SDCCH.<br />

2. Request the BSC commissioning staff to make a call from a fixed network<br />

phone to the TEMS.<br />

147


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

3. Request the BSC operator to check that the TCH being tested is busy <strong>and</strong><br />

verify the ARFCN <strong>and</strong> the TS displayed in the TEMS. Verify the speech<br />

quality <strong>and</strong> write ‘‘Pass’’ or ‘‘Fail’’ in the test record. See Section 8.4.2<br />

Filling in the Test Record on page 150.<br />

4. Terminate the call.<br />

8.3.4 Making H<strong>and</strong>over Test Call<br />

This section describes how to make a h<strong>and</strong>over test call. The purpose of<br />

the test is to verify that h<strong>and</strong>over between cells works properly <strong>and</strong> that the<br />

coverage of the cell is in accordance with the cell planning. If no h<strong>and</strong>over takes<br />

place at cell borders, then the BSC personnel must be contacted.<br />

Note: The h<strong>and</strong>over test call must be made at least 50 m (164 feet) from<br />

the antenna system.<br />

1. Make a test call using TEMS <strong>and</strong> a PC containing TEMS SW.<br />

2. Move from one cell to another <strong>and</strong> verify that the call is not disconnected.<br />

3. In the Log menu on the PC, select Start Logging. Give the log a unique<br />

name <strong>and</strong> select a destination for the log to be saved.<br />

4. In the Monitor menu, select the Status information menu <strong>and</strong> Serving +<br />

neighbouring cell.<br />

5. Monitor the signal strength (RxLev) <strong>and</strong> move through the cells to verify that<br />

h<strong>and</strong>over takes place between cells at the cell borders. See figure below.<br />

148 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

TEMS<br />

Figure 63 Verifying that H<strong>and</strong>over Takes Place at the Cell Borders<br />

6. Write ‘‘Pass’’ or ‘‘Fail’’ in the test record. See Section 8.4.2 Filling in the<br />

Test Record on page 150.<br />

7. Terminate the call <strong>and</strong> stop the log.<br />

8.4 Performing Concluding Routines<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0289A<br />

This section describes the actions to be taken before leaving the site, <strong>and</strong> the<br />

test record to be completed during the tests.<br />

8.4.1 Checking the RRU <strong>and</strong> IXU Indicators<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes how to check that the RRU <strong>and</strong> the IXU indicators<br />

show the correct status, when the <strong>RBS</strong> is connected to the BSC <strong>and</strong> is fully<br />

operational. The check should be performed before leaving the site.<br />

1. Check that the indicators on the RRU(s) <strong>and</strong> the IXU have the status shown<br />

in the tables below:<br />

149


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Table 45 RRU Indicators After Site Integration<br />

RRU Indicator State<br />

Fault Off<br />

Operational On<br />

Local Off<br />

RF off Off<br />

AC power on On (1)<br />

DC power on On (1)<br />

RRU temp. Off<br />

(1) Depending on power system configuration.<br />

Table 46 IXU Indicators After Site Integration<br />

IXU Indicator State<br />

Fault Off<br />

Operational On<br />

Local Off<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> fault Off<br />

External alarm Off<br />

AC power on On (1)<br />

DC power on On (1)<br />

IXU temp. Off<br />

Transmission OK On (2)<br />

(1) Depending on power system configuration.<br />

(2) A, B, C <strong>and</strong>/or D, depending on transmission configuration.<br />

8.4.2 Filling in the Test Record<br />

This section contains the test record to be filled in during the integration <strong>and</strong><br />

testing of the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

150 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> Site Integration GSM -<br />

Date:<br />

Site No.:<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> Type:<br />

Transmission Test:<br />

Test Call Using TEMS:<br />

Test Call from Fixed Network:<br />

Pass/Fail<br />

H<strong>and</strong>over Test Call:<br />

A to B<br />

Remarks:<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

A C B D<br />

TRX Cell ID ARFCN<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

10<br />

11<br />

Site Name:<br />

BSIC<br />

Diversity Test Call (if Applicable):<br />

Cell Configuration:<br />

TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3 TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7<br />

RXD TRX0 TRX1 TRX2 TRX3 TRX4 TRX5 TRX6 TRX7 TRX8 TRX9 TRX10 TRX11<br />

A<br />

B<br />

Figure 64 Test Record for <strong>RBS</strong> Site Integration<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

B to C C to A A to C C to B B to A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0217F<br />

151


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

8.4.3 Filling in the Checklist<br />

This section describes the checklist to be filled in after the integration has<br />

been completed.<br />

The following checklist is not m<strong>and</strong>atory but it is strongly recommended. Local<br />

procedures <strong>and</strong> safety regulations must be evaluated <strong>and</strong> included in this<br />

checklist.<br />

Table 47 Checklist<br />

Check the following: OK<br />

1. The indicators on the RRU <strong>and</strong> the IXU are in the approved status.<br />

2. The test equipment has been disconnected from the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

3. The <strong>RBS</strong> cabinet <strong>and</strong> the mounting base are free from foreign<br />

objects.<br />

4. All cables are free of damage.<br />

5. Top <strong>and</strong> bottom of cabinet are free of obstructions (for airflow).<br />

6. The cabinet has been locked, <strong>and</strong> the screws have been<br />

tightened.<br />

7. All tools have been accounted for.<br />

8. All paperwork has been completed.<br />

8.4.4 Network Element Acceptance Certificate<br />

This section contains a Network Element Acceptance Certificate to be filled in<br />

by the person responsible. See Figure below.<br />

152 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

NETWORK ELEMENT ACCEPTANCE CERTIFICATE<br />

This is to certify that Ericsson AB has delivered, installed <strong>and</strong> tested the<br />

Network Element ............................................................ as defined<br />

in contract ..................<br />

The Network element acceptance has been performed in accordance with<br />

the procedures described in the above mentioned contract. Further reference<br />

should be made to the acceptance documents. The Network element passed<br />

acceptance with remarks per attached test report.<br />

Number of remarks within Ericsson´s responsibilities, that have been made on<br />

this site:..............<br />

Date:..........................<br />

The Buyer The Contractor<br />

Company Name:<br />

Person Responsible:<br />

Company Name:<br />

Person Responsible:<br />

Ericsson AB<br />

Figure 65 Example of a Network Element Acceptance Certificate<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P004631C<br />

153


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

154 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


9 Maintenance<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

This chapter describes the maintenance procedures for the <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong> <strong>and</strong><br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>.<br />

9.1 Introduction<br />

9.1.1 Target Group<br />

The target group for this document is maintenance personnel. To perform<br />

maintenance work in a safe <strong>and</strong> professional way, the work must be done by<br />

skilled personnel.<br />

The following qualifications are minimum requirements:<br />

• Good underst<strong>and</strong>ing of radio <strong>and</strong> telephone engineering<br />

• Good underst<strong>and</strong>ing of engineering English<br />

9.2 Preconditions<br />

This section describes the preconditions that apply to the maintenance<br />

procedures, including tools <strong>and</strong> safety.<br />

9.2.1 Health <strong>and</strong> Safety Information<br />

9.2.2 Tools<br />

Ensure that the chapters Personal Health <strong>and</strong> Safety Instructions <strong>and</strong> System<br />

Safety Information in this manual has been read <strong>and</strong> fully understood.<br />

This section presents the recommended torque settings for screws, nuts <strong>and</strong><br />

connectors.<br />

Torque Values<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

Table 48 Screws <strong>and</strong> Nuts<br />

Dimension Torque Nm Remark<br />

M4 2.6 Nm ± 0.15 Nm Normal<br />

155


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Table 48 Screws <strong>and</strong> Nuts<br />

M4 1.7 Nm ± 0.15 Nm Reduced torque for captive screw<br />

M8 21 Nm ± 1.3 Nm Earth nut<br />

Table 49 Connectors<br />

Connector Torque Nm Remark<br />

TNC 1.7 Nm ± 0.15 Nm –<br />

N 2.7 Nm ± 0.2 Nm –<br />

9.3 Fault Localisation Using OMT<br />

This section contains information on how to localise a fault when h<strong>and</strong>ling<br />

an alarm in the OMT. Ericsson recommends that the OMT is used, but if no<br />

OMT is available, or it is not possible to connect to the <strong>RBS</strong>, see Section 9.4<br />

Troubleshooting Using the <strong>RBS</strong> Indicators on page 173.<br />

The section is based on the Replacement Unit Map (RU Map) connected to an<br />

alarm. The RU Map consists of two different kinds of RUs:<br />

• Physical Units<br />

The following RUs are mapped to one single physical unit that can be<br />

replaced in the field.<br />

− IXU<br />

− TIM<br />

− RRU<br />

− Fan unit<br />

• Logical units<br />

The following RUs are h<strong>and</strong>led as one unit, but can actually be one or<br />

more physical units.<br />

− Antenna: The logical path from the RRU to (<strong>and</strong> including) the antenna<br />

− Battery: The battery backup system including batteries<br />

− Environment: External conditions (ambient temperature <strong>and</strong> site power)<br />

− GPS receiver: The synch. signal received <strong>and</strong> distributed by the GPS<br />

receiver<br />

− GPS receiver DXU cable: The logical link between the GPS receiver<br />

<strong>and</strong> the IXU<br />

156 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

− IDB: The installation database stored in the <strong>RBS</strong>, not the physical<br />

storage<br />

− Y Link: The logical link between IXU <strong>and</strong> RRU(s)<br />

For supplementary information about RU maps, see:<br />

9.3.1 Reading Fault Status<br />

Fault List Micro EN/LZT 720 0466<br />

This section describes how to read the fault status, using the OMT. If any fault<br />

indicator on the <strong>RBS</strong> is on, then the fault status must be read.<br />

Connect the OMT<br />

1. Remove the lid from the OMT port on the IXU.<br />

2. Connect the OMT cable from the PC serial port 1 to the OMT port on the<br />

right-h<strong>and</strong> side of the IXU. If an extended OMT cable is connected to the<br />

OMT port, then connect the OMT cable to the end of the extended OMT<br />

cable.<br />

3. Start the OMT<br />

Figure 66 Connecting OMT to IXU<br />

Reading the IDB<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

Local/Remote<br />

AC power on<br />

DC power on<br />

IXU temp.<br />

Transmission OK<br />

Port A Port C<br />

Port B Port D<br />

OMT Cable<br />

4. In the <strong>RBS</strong> 2000 menu, select Connect to logically connect the OMT to<br />

the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0276B<br />

157


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

5. In the Configuration menu, select Read IDB<br />

6. On the Maintenance menu, click Monitor to open the Monitor window.<br />

See figure below.<br />

Figure 67 Reading Fault Status<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0476A<br />

7. In the Available monitors box, select ‘‘MO fault maps’’ <strong>and</strong> click → to add<br />

‘‘<strong>RBS</strong>’’ into the Monitors to start box.<br />

8. Click Start monitor.<br />

9. In the <strong>RBS</strong> Event Monitor window, check the MO faults box to see if there<br />

are any faults. If there are, then correct these before continuing.<br />

When an MO fault is selected, corresponding fault description, action <strong>and</strong><br />

related faults are displayed. See also Fault List.<br />

10. When all faults are corrected, close the <strong>RBS</strong> Event Monitor window.<br />

158 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


9.3.2 SO CF RU:0/ IXU<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

This section describes how to localise an SO CF RU:0/ IXU fault.<br />

Related RUs<br />

The RUs listed below have higher priority than the RU described in this section.<br />

If they are present, then proceed to the related section before h<strong>and</strong>ling this RU.<br />

• If ‘‘SO CF RU:34/ IDB’’ appears in the OMT, then proceed with Section<br />

9.3.8 SO CF RU:34/ IDB on page 167.<br />

• If ‘‘SO CF RU:3/ Y link’’ appears in the OMT, then proceed with Section<br />

9.3.3 SO CF RU:3/ Y Link on page 159.<br />

Displaying Fault Information<br />

Display fault information according to Section 9.3.1 Reading Fault Status on<br />

page 157<br />

Perform the following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

Resetting IXU<br />

1. Press the IXU reset button on the IXU interface panel.<br />

Loading SW in the <strong>RBS</strong><br />

2. Load SW <strong>and</strong> IDB.<br />

3. Replace the flash card, proceed with Section 9.5.1 Flash Card Replacement<br />

on page 185.<br />

Replacing IXU<br />

4. Replace the IXU, proceed with Section 9.5.3 IXU Replacement on page<br />

193.<br />

9.3.3 SO CF RU:3/ Y Link<br />

This section describes how to localise an SO CF RU:3/ Y Link fault. The Y link<br />

cable is connected between the IXU <strong>and</strong> the RRU(s).<br />

Related RUs<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

The RU listed below has higher priority than the RU described in this section. If<br />

it is present, proceed to the related section before h<strong>and</strong>ling this RU.<br />

• If ‘‘SO CF RU:34/ IDB’’ appears in the OMT, proceed with Section 9.3.8<br />

SO CF RU:34/ IDB on page 167.<br />

159


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Displaying Fault Information<br />

Display fault information according to Section 9.3.1 Reading Fault Status on<br />

page 157.<br />

Perform the following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

Checking IDB Configuration<br />

1. In the OMT, ensure that the IDB is in accordance with the HW cabinet<br />

configuration.<br />

Checking RRU Power<br />

Perform the following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases, or until the<br />

RRU power is confirmed.<br />

Note: This is only valid for an RRU connected to the Y link-generated alarm.<br />

2. Check that the indicators AC Power on/DC Power on on the RRU interface<br />

panel are ON.<br />

3. Open the <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>and</strong> check that the RRU power is switched on.<br />

4. Check that the power cable from the MBU to the RRU is correctly connected.<br />

5. Disconnect the power cable from the RRU <strong>and</strong> use a multimeter to check<br />

that the correct voltage is being supplied to the RRU, see Figure <strong>and</strong> Table<br />

below.<br />

For more information about correct voltage, see:<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> 2109,<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> Hardware<br />

Reference Manual<br />

EN/LZT 720 0058<br />

160 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


2<br />

1<br />

3<br />

6<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

5<br />

Not used<br />

Figure 68 Measuring Voltage on RRU Power Cable<br />

Table 50 Pins <strong>and</strong> Functions<br />

Connector Pin Function<br />

1 DC_P<br />

2 DC_N<br />

3 PE<br />

5 AC_L2<br />

6 AC_L1<br />

Resetting RRU<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>06</strong>07A<br />

6. Press the RRU reset button on the RRU interface panel connected to the<br />

faulty Y link<br />

Resetting IXU<br />

7. Press the IXU reset button on the IXU interface panel<br />

Checking Y Link Cable<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

Perform the following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

161


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

8. Check that the Y link cable is correctly connected to both the IXU <strong>and</strong><br />

the RRU<br />

9. Check that the cable is free from damage<br />

10. If the Y Link cable is damaged, replace it according to Section 9.5.11 Y Link<br />

Cable Replacement on page 217<br />

Replacing the RRU<br />

11. Replace the RRU, see Section 9.5.8 RRU Replacement on page 209<br />

Replacing the IXU<br />

12. Replace the IXU, see Section 9.5.3 IXU Replacement on page 193<br />

9.3.4 SO CF RU:4/ TIM<br />

This section describes how to localise an SO CF RU:4/ TIM fault.<br />

Related RUs<br />

The RUs listed below have higher priority than the RU described in this section.<br />

If they are present, go to the related section before h<strong>and</strong>ling this RU.<br />

• If ‘‘SO CF RU:0/ IXU’’ appears in the OMT, proceed with Section 9.3.2<br />

SO CF RU:0/ IXU on page 159<br />

• If ‘‘SO CF RU:3/ Y link’’ appears in the OMT, proceed with Section 9.3.3<br />

SO CF RU:3/ Y Link on page 159<br />

• If ‘‘SO CF RU:34/ IDB’’ appears in the OMT, proceed with Section 9.3.8<br />

SO CF RU:34/ IDB on page 167<br />

• If ‘‘SO TRXC RU:0/ RRU’’ appears in the OMT, proceed with Section 9.3.12<br />

SO TRXC RU:0/ RRU on page 172<br />

Displaying Fault Information<br />

Display fault information according to Section 9.3.1 Reading Fault Status on<br />

page 157.<br />

Perform the following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

Checking Contacts on TIM <strong>and</strong> IXU<br />

1. Check that the TIM is correctly installed, <strong>and</strong> that all connector pins on both<br />

IXU <strong>and</strong> TIM are free from damage.<br />

Replacing TIM<br />

2. Replace the TIM, see Section 9.5.7 TIM Replacement on page 2<strong>06</strong>.<br />

162 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


Resetting IXU<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

3. Press the IXU reset button on the IXU interface panel.<br />

Replacing IXU<br />

4. Replace the IXU, see Section 9.5.3 IXU Replacement on page 193.<br />

9.3.5 SO CF RU:14/ Battery<br />

This section describes how to localise an SO CF RU:14/ Battery fault.<br />

Related RUs<br />

• If ‘‘SO CF RU:31/ Environment’’ appears in the OMT, together with ‘‘SO CF<br />

EC2:10/ Mains fail (external power source fail)’’, then proceed with Section<br />

9.3.7 SO CF RU:31/ Environment on page 165.<br />

Displaying Fault Information<br />

Display fault information according to Section 9.3.1 Reading Fault Status on<br />

page 157.<br />

Perform the following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

Checking HW/IDB<br />

1. Check the DC power indicator on the IXU, <strong>and</strong> the RRU interfaces, to locate<br />

the cabinet issuing the alarm.<br />

2. Check in the OMT that the IDB configuration is correct, according to the<br />

HW cabinet configuration, regarding defined climate system.<br />

Checking Cabinet Power<br />

3. Open the <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>and</strong> check that the DC power is switched on.<br />

4. Open the MBU cover <strong>and</strong> check that the incoming DC cable is correctly<br />

connected.<br />

Checking the Battery Backup System<br />

5. Check the backup power chain from the IXU to the battery backup system,<br />

including any optional fuses.<br />

6. Check the battery backup system according to the manufacturer’s<br />

documentation.<br />

9.3.6 SO CF RU:15/ Fan<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes how to localise an SO CF RU:15/ Fan fault.<br />

163


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Related RU<br />

The RU listed below has higher priority than the RU described in this section. If<br />

it is present, go to the related section before h<strong>and</strong>ling this RU.<br />

• If ‘‘SO CF RU:34/ IDB’’ appears in the OMT, then proceed with Section<br />

9.3.8 SO CF RU:34/ IDB on page 167<br />

Displaying Fault Information<br />

Display fault information according to Section 9.3.1 Reading Fault Status on<br />

page 157.<br />

Perform the following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases.<br />

Checking IDB Configuration<br />

1. Check in the OMT that the IDB configuration is correct, according to the<br />

HW cabinet configuration, regarding defined climate system.<br />

Checking Fan Unit<br />

Caution!<br />

Rotating fan blades can cause injury to body parts that come into contact with<br />

the blades. Blades in fan units continue to rotate for a period of time, even after<br />

the fan has been switched off. Wait until fans have stopped rotating completely<br />

before starting work on or near fans.<br />

2. Remove the fan unit cover.<br />

3. Ensure that the fans rotate freely <strong>and</strong> without obstruction.<br />

Resetting Fan Unit<br />

4. Press the Test button on the fan unit.<br />

164 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


Figure 69 Fan Unit Test Button<br />

5. Check that the test sequence below is carried out:<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

• The fans run at maximum speed for approximately 5 seconds<br />

• The fans run at nominal speed for approximately 5 seconds<br />

• The fans stop for approximately 5 seconds<br />

FAN UNT-<strong>01</strong><br />

Fault<br />

Operational<br />

6. Ensure that the indicator status of the fan unit is in accordance with the<br />

table below:<br />

Table 51 Fan Unit Indicators After Test<br />

Fan Unit Indicator LEDs Status<br />

Fault Off<br />

Operational On<br />

Replacing Fan Unit<br />

Test<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0581A<br />

7. Replace the fan unit, see Section 9.5.4 Fan Unit Replacement on page 197.<br />

9.3.7 SO CF RU:31/ Environment<br />

This section describes how to localise an SO CF RU:31/ Environment fault.<br />

This fault is only generated by external factors, for example climate or incoming<br />

power.<br />

Related RU<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

The RU listed below has higher priority than the RU described in this section. If<br />

it is present, go to the related section before h<strong>and</strong>ling this RU.<br />

• If ‘‘SO CF RU:34/ IDB’’ appears in the OMT, then proceed with Section<br />

9.3.8 SO CF RU:34/ IDB on page 167<br />

165


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Displaying Fault Information<br />

Display fault information according to Section 9.3.1 Reading Fault Status on<br />

page 157.<br />

Perform the following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

Checking IDB Configuration<br />

1. Check in the OMT that the IDB configuration is correct, according to the HW<br />

cabinet configuration, regarding defined power system <strong>and</strong> climate system.<br />

Checking Climate<br />

2. Inspect the airflow path in the <strong>RBS</strong>, <strong>and</strong> ensure that the airflow is not<br />

obstructed.<br />

3. If the temperature is between 45 <strong>and</strong> 55 C, install a fan unit. For more<br />

information, see Chapter Installation of <strong>RBS</strong> in this manual. If the<br />

temperature is below -15 C, then the <strong>RBS</strong> should be powered with AC. AC<br />

power is needed for the <strong>RBS</strong> to start the heater. For more information, see:<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> 2109,<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> Hardware<br />

Reference Manual<br />

Checking Incoming AC Power (Optional)<br />

4. Open the MBU cover <strong>and</strong> use<br />

a multimeter to check that the<br />

power input is either 100 V AC<br />

to 127 V AC, or 200 V AC to 250<br />

V AC.<br />

EN/LZT 720 0058<br />

166 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0498A


Checking Incoming DC Power (Optional)<br />

5. Open the MBU cover <strong>and</strong> use<br />

a multimeter to check that the<br />

voltage supplying the <strong>RBS</strong>, is<br />

between −40.5 <strong>and</strong> −60.0 V DC.<br />

If a DC supply is not detected,<br />

then check the DC supply<br />

source.<br />

9.3.8 SO CF RU:34/ IDB<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

This section describes how to localise an SO CF RU:34/ IDB.<br />

Displaying Fault Information<br />

Display fault information according to Section 9.3.1 Reading Fault Status on<br />

page 157.<br />

Perform the following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

Resetting IXU<br />

1. Press the IXU Reset button on the IXU Interface panel.<br />

Reinstalling IDB<br />

2. Reinstall the IDB. For more information, see Chapter Site Installation Tests<br />

in this manual.<br />

Replacing Flash Card<br />

3. Replace the flash card, see Section 9.5.1 Flash Card Replacement on<br />

page 185.<br />

9.3.9 SO CF RU:40/ Antenna<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes how to localise an SO CF RU:40/ Antenna fault.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0497A<br />

167


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Related RU<br />

The RU listed below has higher priority than the RU described in this section. If<br />

it is present, then go to the related section before h<strong>and</strong>ling this RU.<br />

• If ‘‘SO CF RU:34/ IDB’’ appears in the OMT, then proceed with Section<br />

9.3.8 SO CF RU:34/ IDB on page 167<br />

Displaying Fault Information<br />

Display fault information according to Section 9.3.1 Reading Fault Status on<br />

page 157.<br />

Perform the following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

Reading ARAE Alarm Status<br />

Note: This step is only valid if ‘‘SO CF EC2:13/ Auxiliary equipment fault’’<br />

appears in the OMT.<br />

1. In the Configuration menu, select Read IDB <strong>and</strong> click Yes.<br />

2. In the Maintenance menu, select Monitor.<br />

3. Select ARAE Alarm Status.<br />

4. In the Available monitors box, select “Alarm inlets” <strong>and</strong> click → to add it<br />

in the Monitors to start box.<br />

5. Click Start Monitor.<br />

6. Check the Display Status window to see which ARAE alarm are active.<br />

7. Check that the ARAE fault is correctly defined in the IDB.<br />

8. Check the cable to the equipment supervised by the ARAE alarm.<br />

9. Replace the faulty equipment supervised by that alarm.<br />

Checking RX Diversity<br />

10. Ensure that the cell is configured, in the BSC, with the correct diversity<br />

(RXD).<br />

11. Confirm that radio cables are connected to the correct RRUs <strong>and</strong> antennas.<br />

Performing DTF Test<br />

12. Disconnect the faulty feeder <strong>and</strong> locate the fault, by performing a Distance<br />

To Fault (DTF) test. For more information, see chapter Antenna System<br />

Tests in this manual.<br />

13. Replace the faulty equipment identified in the DTF test.<br />

168 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Note: The RXBP <strong>and</strong> MCB are not included in the DTF test.<br />

14. If no faulty equipment was identified, replace the antenna.<br />

9.3.10 SO CF RU:48/ GPS Receiver<br />

This section describes how to localise an SO CF RU:48/ GPS Receiver. To<br />

avoid complete loss of traffic, have the BSC operator configuring PCM as<br />

backup synchronisation source (SYNCSRC=DEFAULT).<br />

Related RUs<br />

The RUs listed below have higher priority than the RU described in this section.<br />

If they are present, go to the related section before h<strong>and</strong>ling this RU.<br />

• If ‘‘SO CF RU:34/ IDB’’ appears in the OMT, then proceed with Section<br />

9.3.8 SO CF RU:34/ IDB on page 167<br />

• If ‘‘SO CF RU:0/ IXU’’ appears in the OMT, then proceed with Section 9.3.2<br />

SO CF RU:0/ IXU on page 159<br />

Displaying Fault Information<br />

Display fault information according to Section 9.3.1 Reading Fault Status on<br />

page 157.<br />

Perform the following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

Replacing GPS Receiver<br />

1. Disconnect the power to the GPS, for example by disconnecting the<br />

connector in the OVP. Wait a few minutes <strong>and</strong> then reconnect the power.<br />

2. Replace the GPS receiver.<br />

9.3.11 SO CF RU:49/ GPS Receiver DXU Cable<br />

This section describes how to localise an SO CF RU:49/ GPS Receiver DXU<br />

cable. To avoid complete loss of traffic, ensure that the BSC operator configures<br />

PCM as backup synchronisation source (SYNCSRC=DEFAULT).<br />

Related RUs<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

The RUs listed below have higher priority than the RU described in this section.<br />

If they are present, go to the related section before h<strong>and</strong>ling this RU.<br />

• If ‘‘SO CF RU:34/ IDB’’ appears in the OMT, then proceed with Section<br />

9.3.8 SO CF RU:34/ IDB on page 167<br />

• If ‘‘SO CF RU:0/ IXU’’ appears in the OMT, then proceed with Section 9.3.2<br />

SO CF RU:0/ IXU on page 159<br />

169


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Displaying Fault Information<br />

Display fault information according to Section 9.3.1 Reading Fault Status on<br />

page 157.<br />

Perform the following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

Precondition<br />

Before starting this procedure, ensure that the GPS system has no fault <strong>and</strong> is<br />

properly installed.<br />

Check IXU GPS Cable<br />

1. Check that the IXU GPS cable is free from damage. Replace if needed.<br />

2. Check that the IXU GPS cable is correctly connected to the GPS/AUX<br />

port on the IXU.<br />

3. If an <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> is used, then check that the GPS <strong>and</strong> GPS/AUX cables on the<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> are correctly connected.<br />

Localising Fault on GPS Receiver<br />

4. Check all cables <strong>and</strong> equipment (including the GPS receiver) connected to<br />

the signal chain between the IXU GPS cable <strong>and</strong> the GPS receiver.<br />

5. Check the power supply to the GPS by checking the DC LED in the OVP.<br />

Refer to manufacturer’s documentation to perform fault localisation on the GPS<br />

receiver.<br />

Checking DC Supply<br />

6. Check that both the −48 V LINK cable <strong>and</strong> the termination block are<br />

correctly connected, as shown in the figures below.<br />

170 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1186A<br />

Figure 70 Cable Connection Check<br />

- 48 V<br />

LINK<br />

48 V<br />

48 V_RTN<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0514A<br />

Figure 71 Connector Connection Check<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

7. Perform a cold reset on the GPS by disconnecting the termination block for<br />

a few seconds.<br />

8. Check that both the −48 V LINK cable <strong>and</strong> the conductor are free from<br />

damage. Replace if needed.<br />

171


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

9. Check that the voltage is −48 V<br />

DC, using a multimeter.<br />

9.3.12 SO TRXC RU:0/ RRU<br />

2 mm<br />

This section describes how to localise an SO TRXC RU:0/ RRU fault.<br />

Related RUs<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1187A<br />

The RUs listed below have higher priority than the RU described in this section.<br />

If they are present, go to the related section before h<strong>and</strong>ling this RU.<br />

• If ‘‘SO CF RU:3/ Y link’’ appears in the OMT, then proceed with Section<br />

9.3.3 SO CF RU:3/ Y Link on page 159<br />

• If ‘‘SO CF RU:31/ Environment’’ appears in the OMT, then proceed with<br />

Section 9.3.7 SO CF RU:31/ Environment on page 165<br />

• If ‘‘SO CF RU:34/ IDB’’ appears in the OMT, then proceed with Section<br />

9.3.8 SO CF RU:34/ IDB on page 167<br />

Two TXs are used when TX diversity is activated, but only the first TX sends the<br />

alarm. The fault is therefore located in a different RRU.<br />

Displaying Fault Information<br />

Display fault information according to Section 9.3.1 Reading Fault Status on<br />

page 157.<br />

Perform the following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

172 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


Resetting RRU<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

1. Press the RRU reset button on the RRU interface panel.<br />

Restarting RRU<br />

2. Switch off the RRU, wait for one minute <strong>and</strong> switch it on again.<br />

Replacing RRU<br />

3. Replace the RRU, see Section 9.5.8 RRU Replacement on page 209.<br />

9.4 Troubleshooting Using the <strong>RBS</strong> Indicators<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes troubleshooting procedures using the <strong>RBS</strong> indicators.<br />

If no faults are detected in the <strong>RBS</strong>, then the indicators should be in accordance<br />

with the tables below.<br />

Table 52 RRU Indicator Status When the <strong>RBS</strong> is in Operation<br />

RRU Indicator State<br />

Fault Off<br />

Operational On<br />

Local Off<br />

RF off Off<br />

AC power on On (1)<br />

DC power on On (1)<br />

RRU temp. Off<br />

(1) Depending on power system configuration.<br />

Table 53 IXU Indicator Status When the <strong>RBS</strong> is in Operation<br />

IXU Indicator State<br />

Fault Off<br />

Operational On<br />

Local Off<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> fault Off<br />

External alarm Off<br />

AC power on On (1)<br />

DC power on On (1)<br />

173


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Table 53 IXU Indicator Status When the <strong>RBS</strong> is in Operation<br />

IXU temp. Off<br />

Transmission OK On (2)<br />

(1) Depending on power system configuration.<br />

(2) A, B, C <strong>and</strong>/or D, depending on transmission configuration.<br />

If the indicators indicate a fault, see the applicable Section below.<br />

9.4.1 Corrective Actions for the IXU<br />

Fault<br />

If the fault indicator is ON (red), IXU HW fault(s) are detected. Perform the<br />

following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

• Use the OMT to display fault information, see Section 9.3 Fault Localisation<br />

Using OMT on page 156. If the OMT cannot be connected, then proceed<br />

with the steps below<br />

• Ensure that the flash card has been properly inserted in the IXU<br />

• Replace the IDB <strong>and</strong> SW on the flash card, see Section 9.5.1 Flash Card<br />

Replacement on page 185<br />

• Replace the flash card, see Section 9.5.1 Flash Card Replacement on<br />

page 185<br />

• Replace the IXU, see Section 9.5.3 IXU Replacement on page 193<br />

Operational<br />

If the Operational indicator is flashing (green) then configuration activity, initiated<br />

from the BSC, is in progress. Example: SW download or synchronisation is<br />

in progress. A SW download from the BSC can take 30 – 60 minutes, <strong>and</strong><br />

synchronization 5 – 10 minutes.<br />

• Wait until activity is finished, that is until the flashing stops<br />

Local<br />

If the Local indicator is ON (yellow) <strong>and</strong> it is not possible to bring the IXU into<br />

remote mode, either by using the OMT or by pressing the IXU Local/Remote<br />

button, then perform the following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

• Reset the IXU<br />

• Install a new IDB using a OMT, see chapter Site Installation Tests<br />

• Replace the IXU. See Section 9.5.3 IXU Replacement on page 193<br />

174 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

If the Local indicator is flashing (yellow) <strong>and</strong> the anticipated BSC communication<br />

cannot be established, then perform the following actions step-by-step (in close<br />

cooperation with the BSC operator) until the fault ceases:<br />

• Reset the IXU<br />

• Ensure that the expected Transmission OK LEDs are ON<br />

Note: Transmission OK LEDs only indicate that the incoming transmission<br />

signal is present electrically. The physical transmission connection<br />

should still be checked.<br />

• Ensure that the TEI value in the <strong>RBS</strong> IDB corresponds with the CF TEI value<br />

set in the BSC for this <strong>RBS</strong>. Request that the BSC operator checks that no<br />

other <strong>RBS</strong>s are using the same CF TEI value on the transmission line<br />

• Ensure that the following transmission parameters in the <strong>RBS</strong> IDB are<br />

correct:<br />

− Transmission Interface (E1 or T1)<br />

− CRC-4<br />

− Spare Bits<br />

− Sync Source<br />

− Receiver Sensitivity<br />

− LBO<br />

• Ensure that all <strong>RBS</strong>s, connected on the same transmission line between the<br />

BSC <strong>and</strong> this <strong>RBS</strong>, have Cascade defined as Network Topology in the IDB<br />

• Ensure that the BSC has a correctly configured A-bis path to the <strong>RBS</strong><br />

• Ensure that the corresponding TRH <strong>and</strong> RBLT devices in the BSC are<br />

working<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> Fault<br />

If the <strong>RBS</strong> fault indicator is ON(yellow), an <strong>RBS</strong> fault(s) is detected. Perform the<br />

following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

• Use the OMT to display fault information, see Section 9.3 Fault Localisation<br />

Using OMT on page 156<br />

External Alarm<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

If the External alarm indicator is on (yellow), external alarm(s) is active in the<br />

<strong>RBS</strong>. Perform the following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

• Use the OMT to display fault information. See the following instructions:<br />

175


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

1. Start the OMT.<br />

2. In the Maintenance menu, select Monitor.<br />

3. Select External Alarms Status.<br />

4. In the Available monitors box, select Alarm inlets <strong>and</strong> click → to add it<br />

to the Monitors to start box.<br />

5. Click Start Monitor.<br />

6. Check the Display Status window to see which external alarms are active.<br />

7. Check that the external alarms are correcly defined in the IDB.<br />

8. When the faults are corrected, close the Display Status window.<br />

AC Power On<br />

If the AC power on indicator is OFF (green), <strong>and</strong> if AC mains power is supposed<br />

to be available, then perform the following actions step-by-step until the fault<br />

ceases or until the IXU power is confirmed:<br />

For more information about <strong>RBS</strong> AC mains voltage, see:<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> 2109,<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> Hardware<br />

Reference Manual<br />

EN/LZT 720 0058<br />

1. Ensure that the <strong>RBS</strong> AC mains power switch on the MBU is ON<br />

2. Open the MBU cover <strong>and</strong> use<br />

a multimeter to check that the<br />

power input is either 100 V AC<br />

to 127 V AC, or 200 V AC to<br />

250 V AC.<br />

3. Disconnect the power cable from the IXU <strong>and</strong> use a multimeter<br />

to check that the power supply to the IXU is either 100 V AC to<br />

127 V AC, or 200 V AC to 250 V AC, see table below.<br />

176 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0498A


2<br />

1<br />

3<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Not used<br />

Figure 72 Measuring AC Voltage on IXU Power Cable<br />

Table 54 Pins <strong>and</strong> Functions<br />

Connector Pin Function<br />

1 DC_P<br />

2 DC_N<br />

3 PE<br />

5 AC_L2<br />

6 AC_L1<br />

6<br />

5<br />

4. Replace the PIB in the MBU, see Section 9.5.6 PIB Replacement<br />

on page 203<br />

5. Replace the IXU, see Section 9.5.3 IXU Replacement on page 193<br />

DC Power On<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>06</strong>15A<br />

If the DC power on indicator is OFF (green), <strong>and</strong> if DC supply should be<br />

available, then perform the following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases,<br />

or until the IXU power is confirmed:<br />

For more information about <strong>RBS</strong> DC supply voltage, see:<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> 2109,<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> Hardware<br />

Reference Manual<br />

EN/LZT 720 0058<br />

177


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

1. Ensure that the <strong>RBS</strong> DC supply switch on the MBU is ON.<br />

2. Open the MBU cover <strong>and</strong> use<br />

a multimeter to check that the<br />

incoming voltage is between<br />

−40.5 V DC <strong>and</strong> −60.0 V DC.<br />

3. Disconnect the power cable from the IXU <strong>and</strong> use a multimeter to<br />

check that the voltage supplying the IXU is between −40.5 V DC<br />

<strong>and</strong> −60.0 V DC, see table below.<br />

2<br />

1<br />

3<br />

Not used<br />

Figure 73 Measuring Voltage on IXU Power Cable<br />

Table 55 Pins <strong>and</strong> Functions<br />

Connector<br />

Pin<br />

Function<br />

1 DC_P<br />

2 DC_N<br />

3 PE<br />

6<br />

178 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

5<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0497A<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>06</strong>15A


Table 55 Pins <strong>and</strong> Functions<br />

Connector<br />

Pin<br />

Function<br />

5 AC_L2<br />

6 AC_L1<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

4. Replace the PIB in the MBU, see Section 9.5.6 PIB Replacement<br />

on page 203<br />

5. Replace the IXU, see Section 9.5.3 IXU Replacement on page 193<br />

IXU Temp<br />

If the IXU temp indicator is ON (yellow) <strong>and</strong> the conditions are hot, perform the<br />

following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

• Ensure that airflow is not obstructed above or below the RRU, or through its<br />

cooling flanges<br />

• Install the IXU cabinet at a colder location<br />

If the IXU temp indicator is ON (yellow) <strong>and</strong> the conditions are cold, perform the<br />

following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

Note: The IXU will not start if it is too cold. It can take up to 75 minutes for the<br />

internal heater to warm up the IXU.<br />

• Ensure that the IXU is provided with AC Mains power, since the heater in<br />

the IXU only works when AC Mains power supply is available<br />

• Install the IXU cabinet at a warmer location<br />

Transmission OK<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

If a Transmission OK port LED indicator is OFF (green), even though<br />

transmission is expected, then perform the following actions step-by-step until<br />

the fault ceases:<br />

• Ensure that the TIM is properly mounted, <strong>and</strong> the selector switch for<br />

transmission impedance selection is set correctly for each port<br />

• Ensure that the transmission cables have been properly connected to the<br />

right port in the IXU, <strong>and</strong> each cable thread connected to the correct inlet<br />

Note: The order of the ports in the IXU is: A C B D.<br />

• Ensure that the external transmission equipment is working properly <strong>and</strong><br />

that cables are connected correctly<br />

179


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

• Swap the cable thread pairs<br />

• Perform a transmission test, see chapter <strong>RBS</strong> Site Integration<br />

• Check the transmission cable. If it is faulty, replace it<br />

• Replace the TIM, see Section 9.5.7 TIM Replacement on page 2<strong>06</strong>.<br />

• Replace the IFB, see Section 9.5.2 IFB Replacement on page 189.<br />

9.4.2 Corrective Actions on the RRU<br />

Fault<br />

If the fault indicator is ON (red), an RRU HW fault(s) is detected. Perform the<br />

following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

• Use the OMT to display fault information, see Section 9.3.1 Reading Fault<br />

Status on page 157<br />

Operational<br />

If the Operational indicator is flashing (green), then a configuration activity,<br />

initiated from the BSC or the IXU, is in progress. For example, SW download<br />

or synchronisation is is progress. A SW download from the BSC can take<br />

30 – 60 minutes, a SW download from the IXU flash card 5 – 10 minutes <strong>and</strong><br />

synchronization 5 – 10 minutes.<br />

• Wait until activity is finished, that is until the flashing stops<br />

Local<br />

If the Local indicator is ON (yellow) <strong>and</strong> if it is not possible to bring the RRU into<br />

remote mode, either by using the OMT or by pressing the RRU Local/Remote,<br />

then perform the following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

• Reset the RRU<br />

• Replace the RRU, see Section 9.5.8 RRU Replacement on page 209<br />

If the Local indicator is flashing (yellow) <strong>and</strong> BSC communication (though<br />

expected) is not established, check the Local indicator on the IXU.<br />

If the Local indicator on the IXU is flashing, see Page 174.<br />

If the IXU has established a BSC connection, perform the following actions<br />

step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

• Ensure that the BSC has deblocked the TRXCs for the <strong>RBS</strong><br />

180 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

• Ensure that the BSC has a correct configured A-bis path to the <strong>RBS</strong> [Digital<br />

Connection Point (DCP)].<br />

• Reset the RRU<br />

• Ensure that the Y link cable is undamaged <strong>and</strong> properly connected to the<br />

correct ports, both on the RRU <strong>and</strong> the IXU<br />

• Check that each transmission line is connected to the correct ports in both<br />

the RRU <strong>and</strong> the IXU<br />

Note: The IXU could be able to establish BSC connection even if the<br />

transmission lines have been connected to the ports wrongly. The<br />

order of the ports in the IXU is: A C B D.<br />

• Ensure that the RRU is defined in the installed IDB. To create a new IDB,<br />

see Chapter Site Installation Tests in this manual.<br />

• Reset the IXU<br />

• Replace the Y link cable, see Section 9.5.11 Y Link Cable Replacement<br />

on page 217<br />

• Replace the RRU, see Section 9.5.8 RRU Replacement on page 209<br />

• Replace the IXU, see Section 9.5.3 IXU Replacement on page 193<br />

RF Off<br />

RRU is not transmitting on any of its radio ports. No TX in the RRU is enabled<br />

at the BSC.<br />

AC Power On<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

If the AC power on indicator is OFF (green), <strong>and</strong> if AC Mains power should be<br />

available, perform the following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

For more information about <strong>RBS</strong> AC mains voltage, see:<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> 2109,<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> Hardware<br />

Reference Manual<br />

EN/LZT 720 0058<br />

• Ensure that the <strong>RBS</strong> AC supply <strong>and</strong> RRU power switches on the MBU<br />

are ON<br />

• Open the MBU cover <strong>and</strong> use a multimeter to check that the power input is<br />

either 100 V AC to 127 V AC, or 200 V AC to 250 V AC<br />

181


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>0498A<br />

Figure 74 Measuring Incoming AC Voltage<br />

• Disconnect the power cable from the RRU <strong>and</strong> use a multimeter to check<br />

that the power supply to the RRU, is either 100 V AC to 127 V AC, or 200 V<br />

AC to 250 V AC, see table below.<br />

2<br />

1<br />

3<br />

6<br />

5<br />

Not used<br />

Figure 75 Measuring Voltage on the RRU Power Cable<br />

182 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>06</strong>07A


Table 56 Pins <strong>and</strong> Functions<br />

Connector Pin Function<br />

1 DC_P<br />

2 DC_N<br />

3 PE<br />

5 AC_L2<br />

6 AC_L1<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

• Replace the PIB in the MBU, see Section 9.5.6 PIB Replacement on page<br />

203<br />

• Replace the RRU, see Section 9.5.8 RRU Replacement on page 209<br />

DC Power On<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

If the DC power on indicator is OFF (green) <strong>and</strong> if DC supply should be<br />

available, perform the following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

For more information about <strong>RBS</strong> DC supply voltage, see:<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> 2109,<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> Hardware<br />

Reference Manual<br />

EN/LZT 720 0058<br />

• Ensure that the <strong>RBS</strong> DC supply <strong>and</strong> RRU switches on the MBU are ON<br />

• Open the MBU cover <strong>and</strong> use a multimeter to check that the incoming<br />

voltage is between −40.5 V DC <strong>and</strong> −60.0 V DC<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0497A<br />

Figure 76 Measuring the Incoming DC Voltage<br />

183


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

• Disconnect the power cable from the RRU <strong>and</strong> use a multimeter to check<br />

that the voltage, supplying the RRU, is between −40.5 <strong>and</strong> −60.0 V DC.<br />

See figure <strong>and</strong> table below.<br />

2<br />

1<br />

3<br />

6<br />

5<br />

Not used<br />

Figure 77 Measuring the Voltage on RRU Power Cable<br />

Table 57 Pins <strong>and</strong> Functions<br />

Connector Pin Function<br />

1 DC_P<br />

2 DC_N<br />

3 PE<br />

5 AC_L2<br />

6 AC_L1<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>06</strong>07A<br />

• Replace the PIB in the MBU, see Section 9.5.6 PIB Replacement on page<br />

203<br />

• Replace the RRU, see Section 9.5.8 RRU Replacement on page 209<br />

RRU Temp<br />

If the RRU temp indicator is ON (yellow), <strong>and</strong> the conditions are hot, perform<br />

the following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

184 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

• Ensure that airflow is not obstructed above or below the RRU, or through its<br />

cooling flanges<br />

• Install a fan unit to the RRU<br />

• Install the RRU cabinet at a colder location<br />

If the RRU temp indicator is ON (yellow) <strong>and</strong> the conditions are cold, perform<br />

the following actions step-by-step until the fault ceases:<br />

Note: The RRU will not start if it is too cold. It can take up to 75 minutes for<br />

the internal heater to warm up the RRU.<br />

• Ensure that the RRU is provided with AC Mains power, since the heater in<br />

the RRU only works when AC Mains power is available<br />

• Install the RRU cabinet at a warmer location<br />

9.5 HW Replacement<br />

This section describes how to replace faulty units identified in Section Fault<br />

Localisation.<br />

9.5.1 Flash Card Replacement<br />

This section describes how to replace a faulty flash card.<br />

Loading IDB <strong>and</strong> SW (Optional)<br />

This section describes how to load the IDB <strong>and</strong> SW onto the new flash card.<br />

1. Create <strong>and</strong> save an IDB. For more information, see chapter Site Installation<br />

Tests in this manual.<br />

2. From the Configuration menu in the OMT, select Load flash card.<br />

3. In Flash card location, click Browse <strong>and</strong> select the location of the flash<br />

card driver.<br />

4. In Select IDB to use on flash card, click Browse <strong>and</strong> select the IDB to use.<br />

5. In Select <strong>RBS</strong> SW to use on flash card, click Browse <strong>and</strong> select the<br />

SW to use.<br />

6. Click Load.<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

185


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Taking the <strong>RBS</strong> out of Operation<br />

1. Open the sunshields.<br />

2. Contact the OMC operator to obtain permission to temporarily take<br />

cells out of service. Wait until the RF off indicator (on all RRU<br />

interface panels) shows a continous light.<br />

3. Press the Local/Remote button<br />

on the IXU to set the <strong>RBS</strong> to<br />

local mode. Wait until the local<br />

indicator on the IXU shows a<br />

continous light.<br />

4. Open the two clasps <strong>and</strong> pull<br />

the RRU to the left side, to gain<br />

access to the power switches.<br />

5. Switch off the AC Mains power<br />

<strong>and</strong> DC power supply.<br />

AC DC<br />

186 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0396A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0517A


Replacing Flash Card<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

6. Disconnect the AC/DC cable <strong>and</strong><br />

the earth cable from the IXU.<br />

7. Disconnect the OMT cable.<br />

8. Open the IXU cover.<br />

9. Remove the connection frame<br />

<strong>and</strong> loosen the cables from the<br />

IFB. Remove the Y link cable(s).<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>0569A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0357B<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0363A<br />

187


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Note: Make a note of which connectors the Y link cables were connected to.<br />

10. Loosen the two securing screws<br />

under the IXU <strong>and</strong> remove the<br />

unit.<br />

11. Remove the cover for the flash<br />

card. To remove the flash card,<br />

lift up the release lever <strong>and</strong> then<br />

push it in.<br />

12. Insert the new flash card, reset the lever, then refit the cover.<br />

Note: The flash card should be preloaded with the correct software <strong>and</strong> IDB.<br />

For instructions, see Chapter Site Installation Tests.<br />

13. Mount the IXU <strong>and</strong> secure it with the two screws under the IXU.<br />

14. Connect the Y link cable(s). Ensure the Y link cable(s) are connected<br />

to the correct connector(s).<br />

15. Mount the connection frame <strong>and</strong> connect all cables. Close the IXU<br />

cover.<br />

16. Connect the earth cable <strong>and</strong> the AC/DC cable.<br />

188 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0365B<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0366A


Putting the <strong>RBS</strong> into Operation<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

17. Switch on the appropriate power supply: AC Mains, DC, or both AC<br />

<strong>and</strong> DC.<br />

18. If new SW has earlier been prepared for loading, it now starts. This<br />

may take up to 10 minutes.<br />

19. Close the RRU.<br />

20. Inform the OMC operator that the applicable cells are to be put into<br />

service.<br />

21. Press the Local/Remote button on the IXU, <strong>and</strong> the RRUs to set the<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> to remote mode. Wait until the RF off indicator on the RRU<br />

interface panel goes off <strong>and</strong> the Operational indicator lights up.<br />

22. Close the sunshields.<br />

H<strong>and</strong>ling Replaced Units<br />

Unless under contractual warranty, after replacement, the flash card should be<br />

disposed of locally by the customer according to environmental regulations. Do<br />

not return the flash card to Ericsson for replacement, repair or disposal.<br />

9.5.2 IFB Replacement<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes how to replace a faulty IFB.<br />

Taking the <strong>RBS</strong> out of Operation<br />

1. Open the sunshields.<br />

2. Contact the OMC operator to obtain permission to temporarily take<br />

cells out of service. Wait until the RF off indicator (on all RRU<br />

interface panels) shows a continous light.<br />

3. Press the Local/Remote button<br />

on the IXU to set the <strong>RBS</strong> to<br />

local mode. Wait until the local<br />

indicator on the IXU shows a<br />

continous light.<br />

189


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

4. Open the two clasps <strong>and</strong> pull<br />

the RRU to the left side, to gain<br />

access to the power switches.<br />

5. Switch off AC Mains power <strong>and</strong><br />

DC power supply.<br />

AC DC<br />

190 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0396A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0517A


Replacing IFB<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

6. Open the IXU cover.<br />

7. Remove the connection frame<br />

<strong>and</strong> all cables from the IFB.<br />

8. Loosen, but do not remove, the Y<br />

link cable(s) from the cable inlet.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>0357B<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0358A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0359A<br />

191


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

9. Remove the TIM after loosening<br />

the three screws.<br />

10. Remove the IFB after loosening<br />

the seven screws.<br />

(x 3)<br />

11. Put back the new IFB, the connection frame, <strong>and</strong> all cables.<br />

12. Put back the TIM. Tighten the screws to 1.7 Nm.<br />

13. Secure the Y link cable(s).<br />

14. Reconnect the IXU cover.<br />

Putting the <strong>RBS</strong> into Operation<br />

15. Switch on the appropriate power supply: AC Mains, DC, or both<br />

AC <strong>and</strong> DC.<br />

16. Close the RRU.<br />

17. Inform the OMC operator that the applicable cells are to be put into<br />

service.<br />

18. Press the Local/Remote button on the IXU to set the <strong>RBS</strong> to remote<br />

mode. Wait until the RF off indicator on the RRU interface panel<br />

goes off <strong>and</strong> the Operational indicator lights up.<br />

19. Close the sunshields.<br />

192 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0374B<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0360A


H<strong>and</strong>ling Replaced Units<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Unless under contractual warranty, after replacement, the IFB should be<br />

disposed of locally by the customer according to environmental regulations. Do<br />

not return the IFB to Ericsson for replacement, repair or disposal.<br />

9.5.3 IXU Replacement<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes how to replace a faulty IXU.<br />

Taking the <strong>RBS</strong> out of Operation<br />

1. Open the sunshields.<br />

2. Contact the OMC operator to obtain permission to temporarily take<br />

cells out of service. Wait until the RF off indicator (on all RRU<br />

interface panels) shows a continous light.<br />

3. Press the Local/Remote button<br />

on the IXU to set the <strong>RBS</strong> to<br />

local mode. Wait until the local<br />

indicator on the IXU shows a<br />

continous light.<br />

193


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

4. Open the two clasps <strong>and</strong> pull<br />

the RRU to the left side, to gain<br />

access to the power switches.<br />

5. Switch off AC Mains power <strong>and</strong><br />

DC power supply.<br />

Replacing IXU<br />

6. Disconnect the AC/DC cable <strong>and</strong><br />

the earth cable.<br />

7. Remove the OMT cable.<br />

AC DC<br />

194 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0396A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0517A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0569A


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

8. Open the IXU cover.<br />

9. Remove the connection frame<br />

<strong>and</strong> loosen the cables from the<br />

IFB. Remove the Y link cable(s).<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Note: Make a note of which connectors the Y link cables were connected to.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0357B<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0363A<br />

195


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

10. Loosen the two securing screws<br />

under the IXU, <strong>and</strong> remove the<br />

unit.<br />

11. Remove the cover for the flash<br />

card. To remove the flash card,<br />

lift up the release lever <strong>and</strong> then<br />

push it in.<br />

12. Remove the cover for the flash card. Insert the old flash card in the<br />

new unit <strong>and</strong> push it down <strong>and</strong> reset the release lever, ensuring that<br />

the flash card is in position.<br />

13. Open the cover of the new IXU <strong>and</strong> set the switch positions on the<br />

TIM in accordance with installed transmission cables.<br />

14. Mount the connection frame delivered with the new IXU into the old<br />

IXU, <strong>and</strong> close the cover.<br />

15. Mount the IXU <strong>and</strong> secure it with the two screws under the IXU.<br />

16. Connect the Y link cables. Ensure the Y link cable(s) are connected<br />

to the correct connector(s).<br />

17. Mount the connection frame <strong>and</strong> connect all cables. Close the IXU<br />

cover.<br />

18. Connect the earth cable <strong>and</strong> the AC/DC cable.<br />

196 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0365B<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0366A


Putting the <strong>RBS</strong> into Operation<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

19. Switch on the appropriate power supply: AC Mains, DC or both AC<br />

<strong>and</strong> DC.<br />

20. Close the RRU.<br />

21. Inform the OMC operator that the applicable cells are to be put into<br />

service.<br />

22. Press the Local/Remote button on the IXU to set the <strong>RBS</strong> to remote<br />

mode. Wait until the RF off indicator on the RRU interface panel<br />

goes off <strong>and</strong> the Operational indicator lights up.<br />

23. Close the sunshields.<br />

H<strong>and</strong>ling Replaced Units<br />

The IXU should be returned to Ericsson for repair with a repair delivery note,<br />

LZF 084 84 (Blue Tag) attached. Include a clear description of the fault<br />

found. See Section 9.5.12 Performing Concluding Routines on page 220 for<br />

instructions on completing a repair delivery note.<br />

9.5.4 Fan Unit Replacement<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes how to replace a faulty fan unit <strong>and</strong> how to test the new<br />

unit.<br />

Caution!<br />

Rotating fan blades can cause injury to body parts that come into contact with<br />

the blades. Blades in fan units continue to rotate for a period of time, even after<br />

the fan has been switched off. Wait until fans have stopped rotating completely<br />

before starting work on or near fans.<br />

197


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Replacing Fan Unit<br />

1. Remove the fan unit cover<br />

2. Disconnect the fan power cable<br />

from the RRU.<br />

3. Loosen the three screws <strong>and</strong><br />

remove the fan unit.<br />

198 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1263A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0543B<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1264A


4. Install the new fan unit <strong>and</strong> fasten<br />

the three screws.<br />

5. Connect the fan power cable to<br />

the RRU.<br />

Testing Fan Unit<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

6. Press the Test button on the fan unit.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

FAN UNT-<strong>01</strong><br />

Fault<br />

Operational<br />

Test<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0581A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0496A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0543A<br />

199


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

The fan unit performs a self test<br />

7. Check that the test sequence below is carried out:<br />

• The fans run at maximum speed for approximately 5 seconds<br />

• The fans run at nominal speed for approximately 5 seconds<br />

• The fans stop for approximately 5 seconds<br />

8. Ensure that the indicator status of the fan unit is in accordance with<br />

the table below:<br />

Table 58 Fan Unit Indicators After Test<br />

Fan Unit Indicator Status<br />

Fault Off<br />

Operational On<br />

7. Reinstall the fan unit cover.<br />

H<strong>and</strong>ling Replaced Units<br />

Unless under contractual warranty, after replacement, the fan unit should be<br />

disposed of locally by the customer according to environmental regulations. Do<br />

not return the fan unit to Ericsson for replacement, repair or disposal.<br />

9.5.5 MCB Replacement<br />

This section describes how to replace a faulty MCB.<br />

Caution!<br />

Sharp metal edges may exist that can cause cuts to the skin or clothing. Wear<br />

protective gloves when h<strong>and</strong>ling this equipment.<br />

200 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

Taking the RRU out of Service<br />

1. Open the sunshields.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

2. Contact the OMC operator to obtain permission to temporarily take<br />

the TRXs connected to the RRU out of service. Wait until the RF off<br />

indicator shows a continous light.<br />

3. Press the Local/Remote button<br />

on the RRU to set the unit to<br />

local mode. Wait until the local<br />

indicator on the RRU shows a<br />

continous light.<br />

2<strong>01</strong>


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Replacing MCB<br />

4. Remove the MCB protection<br />

cover under the RRU.<br />

5. Make a note of the cable positions.<br />

6. Remove the MCB cable<br />

connected to the RRU <strong>and</strong><br />

the cables connected to the<br />

antenna(s). Remove the MCB<br />

after loosening the two screws,<br />

then disconnect it.<br />

Note: The figure shows an example of an MCB configuration.<br />

7. Mount the new MCB <strong>and</strong> connect all cables.<br />

8. Put back the MCB protection cover.<br />

Note: Ensure that cables are not trapped or damaged by the cover.<br />

202 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

ANT 1<br />

ANT 2<br />

TX(/RX)<br />

MCB<br />

TX(/RX)<br />

LOAD<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0370A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0375A


Putting the RRU into Service<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

9. Inform the OMC operator that the TRXs connected to the RRU are to<br />

be put into service.<br />

10. Press the Local/Remote button on the RRU to set the unit to remote<br />

mode. Wait until the RF off indicator on the RRU interface panel<br />

goes off <strong>and</strong> the Operational indicator lights up.<br />

11. Close the sunshields.<br />

H<strong>and</strong>ling Replaced Units<br />

Unless under contractual warranty, after replacement, the MCB is disposed of<br />

locally by the customer according to environmental regulations. Do not return<br />

the MCB to Ericsson for replacement, repair or disposal.<br />

Note: Since the MCB contains Beryllium oxide, BeO, the unit must be h<strong>and</strong>led<br />

according to applicable regulations for h<strong>and</strong>ling of such products.<br />

9.5.6 PIB Replacement<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes how to replace a faulty Power Interface Board (PIB).<br />

The PIB is located in the MBU.<br />

Taking the <strong>RBS</strong> out of Operation<br />

Note: If the PIB is mounted in an extension cabinet, only that cabinet needs<br />

to be taken out of operation.<br />

1. Open the sunshields.<br />

2. Contact the OMC operator to obtain permission to temporarily take<br />

cells out of service. Wait until the RF off indicator shows a continous<br />

light.<br />

203


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

3. Press the Local/Remote button<br />

on the IXU to set the <strong>RBS</strong> to<br />

local mode. If it is an extension<br />

cabinet, press the Local/Remote<br />

button on the RRU to set the unit<br />

to local mode.<br />

4. Switch off the AC Mains power <strong>and</strong> DC power supply outside the<br />

cabinet.<br />

Replacing PIB<br />

5. Open the two clasps <strong>and</strong> pull<br />

the RRU to the left side, to gain<br />

access to the power switches.<br />

6. Switch off the AC <strong>and</strong> DC switches on the MBU.<br />

7. Remove the MBU cover.<br />

204 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

RRU<br />

AC<br />

1<br />

1<br />

0<br />

DC<br />

1<br />

0 0<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0396A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0371A


8. Disconnect the upper AC/DC<br />

cables <strong>and</strong> the applicable power<br />

cable at the bottom.<br />

9. Remove the PIB after loosening<br />

the securing screws.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Note: Be careful not to drop the washer attached behind the lower left screw<br />

when loosening it.<br />

10. Insert the new PIB <strong>and</strong> secure it.<br />

(x8)<br />

11. Ensure that the ground selector swicth is in the correct position.<br />

Note: Remember to insert the washer behind the lower left screw.<br />

12. Reconnect the upper AC/DC cables.<br />

13. Reconnect the applicable AC/DC cable at the bottom.<br />

14. Reconnect the protection earth cable.<br />

15. Refit the cover.<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0372A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0373B<br />

205


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

16. Switch on the AC <strong>and</strong> DC switches.<br />

17. Close the RRU.<br />

Putting the <strong>RBS</strong> into Operation<br />

18. Switch on the AC Mains power <strong>and</strong> DC power supply outside the<br />

cabinet.<br />

19. Inform the OMC operator that the applicable TRXs are to be put<br />

into service.<br />

20. Press the Local/Remote button on the IXU to set the units to remote<br />

mode. If it is an extension cabinet, press the Local/Remote button<br />

on the RRU to set the unit to remote mode. Wait until the RF off<br />

indicator on the RRU interface panel goes off <strong>and</strong> the Operational<br />

indicator lights up.<br />

21. Close the sunshields.<br />

H<strong>and</strong>ling Replaced Units<br />

Unless under contractual warranty, after replacement, the PIB should be<br />

disposed of locally by the customer according to environmental regulations. Do<br />

not return the PIB to Ericsson for replacement, repair or disposal.<br />

9.5.7 TIM Replacement<br />

This section describes how to replace a faulty TIM.<br />

Taking the <strong>RBS</strong> out of Operation<br />

1. Open the sunshields.<br />

2. Contact the OMC operator to obtain permission to temporarily take<br />

cells out of service. Wait until the RF off indicator (on all RRU<br />

interface panels) shows a continous light.<br />

2<strong>06</strong> EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

3. Press the Local/Remote button<br />

on the IXU to set the <strong>RBS</strong> to<br />

local mode. Wait until the local<br />

indicator on the IXU shows a<br />

continous light.<br />

4. Open the two clasps <strong>and</strong> pull<br />

the RRU to the left side, to gain<br />

access to the power switches.<br />

5. Switch off the AC Mains power<br />

<strong>and</strong> DC power supply.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

AC DC<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0396A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0517A<br />

207


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Replacing TIM<br />

6. Open the IXU cover.<br />

7. Remove the TIM after loosening<br />

the three screws securing it.<br />

208 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

(x 3)<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0357B<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0374B


8. Mount the new TIM <strong>and</strong> ensure<br />

that the switches are set<br />

correctly. Tighten the screws to<br />

1.7 Nm.<br />

9. Close the IXU cover<br />

Putting the <strong>RBS</strong> into Operation<br />

10. Switch on the AC <strong>and</strong> DC switches.<br />

11. Close the RRU.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Port A<br />

100/<br />

120 75<br />

TIM<br />

Port A Port C Port B Port D<br />

100/<br />

120 75<br />

100/<br />

120 75<br />

100/<br />

120 75<br />

100/<br />

120 75<br />

Port C<br />

100/<br />

120 75<br />

Port B<br />

100/<br />

120 75<br />

12. Inform the OMC operator that the applicable cells are to be put into<br />

service.<br />

Port D<br />

100/<br />

120 75<br />

13. Press the Local/Remote button on the IXU to set the <strong>RBS</strong> to remote<br />

mode. Wait until the RF off indicator on the RRU interface panel<br />

goes off <strong>and</strong> the Operational indicator lights up.<br />

14. Close the sunshields.<br />

H<strong>and</strong>ling Replaced Units<br />

Unless under contractual warranty, after replacement, the TIM should be<br />

disposed of locally by the customer according to environmental regulations. Do<br />

not return the TIM to Ericsson for replacement, repair or disposal.<br />

9.5.8 RRU Replacement<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes how to replace a faulty RRU.<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>54D<br />

209


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Taking the RRU out of Service<br />

1. Open the sunshields.<br />

2. Contact the OMC operator to obtain permission to temporarily take<br />

the TRXs connected to the RRU out of service. Wait until the RF off<br />

indicator shows a continous light.<br />

3. Press the Local/Remote button<br />

on the RRU to set the unit to<br />

local mode. Wait until the local<br />

indicator on the RRU shows a<br />

continous light.<br />

4. Open the two clasps <strong>and</strong> pull<br />

the RRU to the left side, to gain<br />

access to the power switches.<br />

210 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0396A


5. Switch off the RRU power.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

RRU<br />

6. Remove any optional units mounted on the RRU, <strong>and</strong>, if applicable,<br />

the upper sunshield.<br />

Replacing RRU<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

7. Disconnect the earth cable.<br />

8. Remove the protection cover (if<br />

present).<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0369A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0518A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0565A<br />

211


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

9. Remove the MCB protection<br />

cover (if present) under the RRU.<br />

10. Remove the MCB cable (if<br />

present) connected to the RRU<br />

<strong>and</strong> the cable to the antenna.<br />

Remove the MCB after loosening<br />

the two screws <strong>and</strong> disconnect it.<br />

212 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

ANT 1<br />

ANT 2<br />

TX(/RX)<br />

MCB<br />

TX(/RX)<br />

LOAD<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0370A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0375A


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

11. Remove the cables belonging to<br />

the RXBP (if present) from the<br />

RRU. Remove the RXBP after<br />

loosening the securing screws.<br />

12. Disconnect the Y link cable <strong>and</strong><br />

the AC/DC cable from the RRU.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

RXBP<br />

RX 2<br />

RXBP 2<br />

RX 1 RXBP1<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0376A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0377A<br />

213


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

13. Loosen the screw under the RRU<br />

<strong>and</strong> unhook the RRU.<br />

14. Hang the new RRU onto the upper hinge. Position the lower hinge<br />

<strong>and</strong> tighten the screw.<br />

15. Connect the earth cable, AC/DC cable <strong>and</strong> Y link cable.<br />

16. Mount the RXBP (if required) <strong>and</strong> connect all cables.<br />

17. Mount the MCB (if required) <strong>and</strong> connect all cables.<br />

18. Fit the protection cover under the RRU.<br />

Putting the RRU into Service<br />

19. Switch on the RRU power <strong>and</strong> close the RRU.<br />

20. Put back the sunshield <strong>and</strong> fan unit, if present.<br />

21. Inform the OMC operator that the TRXs connected to the RRU are to<br />

be put into service.<br />

22. Press the Local/Remote button on the RRU to set the unit to remote<br />

mode. Wait until the RF off indicator on the RRU interface panel<br />

goes off <strong>and</strong> the Operational indicator lights up.<br />

23. Close the sunshields.<br />

H<strong>and</strong>ling Replaced Units<br />

The RRU should be returned to Ericsson for repair with a repair delivery<br />

note, LZF 084 84 (Blue Tag) attached. Include a clear description of the fault<br />

found. See Section 9.5.12 Performing Concluding Routines on page 220 for<br />

instructions on completing a repair delivery note.<br />

214 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0378B


9.5.9 RXBP Replacement<br />

This section describes how to replace a faulty RXBP.<br />

Taking the RRU out of Service<br />

1. Open the sunshields.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

2. Contact the OMC operator to obtain permission to temporarily take<br />

the TRXs connected to the RRU out of service. Wait until the RF off<br />

indicator shows a continous light.<br />

3. Press the Local/Remote button<br />

on the RRU to set the unit to<br />

local mode. Wait until the local<br />

indicator on the RRU shows a<br />

continous light.<br />

Replacing RXBP<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

4. Remove all cables connected to<br />

the RXBP <strong>and</strong> remove it after<br />

loosening the screws securing it.<br />

5. Mount the new RXBP <strong>and</strong> connect all cables.<br />

RXBP<br />

RX 2<br />

RXBP 2<br />

RX 1 RXBP1<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0376A<br />

215


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Putting the RRU into Service<br />

6. Inform the OMC operator that the TRXs connected to the RRU are to<br />

be put into service.<br />

7. Press the Local/Remote button on the RRU to set the unit to remote<br />

mode. Wait until the RF off indicator on the RRU interface panel<br />

goes off <strong>and</strong> the Operational indicator lights up.<br />

8. Close the sunshields.<br />

H<strong>and</strong>ling Replaced Units<br />

Unless under contractual warranty, after replacement, the RXBP should be<br />

disposed of locally by the customer according to environmental regulations. Do<br />

not return the RXBP to Ericsson for replacement, repair or disposal.<br />

9.5.10 Sunshield Replacement<br />

This section describes how to replace a faulty sunshield.<br />

Note: Ericsson does not recommend removing the left <strong>and</strong> front sunshields.<br />

1. Remove the faulty sunshield.<br />

2. If a fan unit is not used, then install the top sunshield <strong>and</strong> fasten two<br />

screws to the RRU. If there is no RRU, then fasten the screws to the<br />

IXU instead.see Figure below.<br />

216 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0232D


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

3. If a fan unit is used, then install the fan unit cover on top of the RRU,<br />

see Figure below.<br />

4. Attach the front sunshield to the left sunshield.<br />

5. Close the front sunshield <strong>and</strong> attach it to the top shield (fan unit<br />

cover) <strong>and</strong> to the right sunshield.<br />

6. Lock the shield.<br />

H<strong>and</strong>ling Replaced Units<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0515A<br />

Unless under contractual warranty, after replacement, the sunshield should be<br />

disposed of locally by the customer according to environmental regulations. Do<br />

not return the sunshield to Ericsson for replacement, repair or disposal.<br />

9.5.11 Y Link Cable Replacement<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

This section describes how to replace a faulty Y link cable.<br />

217


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Taking the RRU out of Service<br />

1. Open the sunshields.<br />

2. Contact the OMC operator to obtain permission to temporarily take<br />

the TRXs connected to the RRU out of service. Wait until the RF off<br />

indicator shows a continous light.<br />

3. Press the Local/Remote button<br />

on the RRU to set the unit to<br />

local mode. Wait until the local<br />

indicator on the RRU shows a<br />

continous light.<br />

4. Open the two clasps <strong>and</strong> pull<br />

the RRU to the left side, to gain<br />

access to the power switches.<br />

5. Switch off the RRU power.<br />

218 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

RRU<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0396A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0369A


Replacing Y Link Cable<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

6. Remove the faulty Y link cable<br />

from the RRU by opening the Y<br />

link cover <strong>and</strong> disconnecting it.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

RRU<br />

7. Connect the new Y link cable to the RRU <strong>and</strong> close the cover.<br />

8. Open the IXU cover <strong>and</strong> remove<br />

the faulty Y link cable from the<br />

IXU.<br />

9. Connect the new Y link cable to the IXU <strong>and</strong> close the cover.<br />

10. Switch on the RRU power <strong>and</strong> close the RRU.<br />

Putting the RRU into Service<br />

11. Inform the OMC operator that the RRU is to be put into service.<br />

12. Press the Local/Remote button on the RRU to set the unit to remote<br />

mode. Wait until the RF off indicator on the RRU interface panel<br />

goes off <strong>and</strong> the Operational indicator lights up.<br />

13. Close the sunshields.<br />

IXU<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0379A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0357B<br />

219


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

9.5.12 Performing Concluding Routines<br />

This section describes the routines to be completed before leaving the site.<br />

Note: Ericsson strongly advises that when cleaning up after maintenance<br />

work on the <strong>RBS</strong> cabinet, the personnel performing maintenance pay<br />

particular attention to the environment. Recycle all waste materials that<br />

can be recycled <strong>and</strong> sort waste so that it can be disposed of according<br />

to local regulations.<br />

Table 59 Objects to be Recycled or Disposed of After Cabinet Maintenance<br />

Item Sort or recycle?<br />

Cable insulation from<br />

crimping, brazing or<br />

welding<br />

Packing chips<br />

Foam<br />

Polystyrene<br />

Bubble plastic<br />

Cable tie clippings<br />

Sorted with plastics<br />

Paper <strong>and</strong> wood Paper recycling<br />

Waste metal from cable<br />

ladders<br />

Pieces of cable<br />

Nuts, bolts, washers <strong>and</strong><br />

screws<br />

Recycled or sorted as metals.<br />

Note: All packing material should be recycled, <strong>and</strong> shock absorbers disposed<br />

of, in accordance with local recycling regulations.<br />

Updating Site Installation Documentation<br />

1. Check the Site Installation Documentation for deviations from the<br />

installation.<br />

2. Update the documents with the changes that apply.<br />

3. Send to the person responsible for Site Installation Engineering.<br />

Checking RRU <strong>and</strong> IXU Indicators<br />

This section describes how to check that the RRU <strong>and</strong> IXU indicators show the<br />

correct status, when the <strong>RBS</strong> is connected to the BSC <strong>and</strong> is fully operational.<br />

The check should be performed before leaving the site.<br />

220 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Check that the indicators on the RRU(s) <strong>and</strong> the IXU have the status shown in<br />

the tables below:<br />

Table 60 RRU Indicators After Maintenance<br />

RRU Indicator State<br />

Fault Off<br />

Operational On<br />

Local Off<br />

RF off Off<br />

AC power on On (1)<br />

DC power on On (1)<br />

RRU temp. Off<br />

(1) Depending on power system configuration.<br />

Table 61 IXU Indicators After Maintenance<br />

IXU Indicator State<br />

Fault Off<br />

Operational On<br />

Local Off<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> fault Off<br />

External alarm Off<br />

AC power on On (1)<br />

DC power on On (1)<br />

IXU temp. Off<br />

Transmission OK On (2)<br />

(1) Depending on power system configuration.<br />

(2) A, B, C <strong>and</strong>/or D, depending on transmission configuration.<br />

Performing Final Checks<br />

This section describes the checklist to be filled in after the maintenance has<br />

been completed.<br />

The following checklist is not m<strong>and</strong>atory, but it is strongly recommended.<br />

Local procedures <strong>and</strong> safety regulation must be evaluated <strong>and</strong> included in<br />

this checklist.<br />

221


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Table 62 Checklist<br />

Check the following: OK<br />

1. The indicators on the RRU <strong>and</strong> the IXU are in the approved<br />

status.<br />

2. The test equipment has been disconnected from the <strong>RBS</strong><br />

3. The <strong>RBS</strong> cabinet <strong>and</strong> the mounting base are free from foreign<br />

objects.<br />

4. All cabinets <strong>and</strong> cables are free of damage.<br />

5. All EMC sealants <strong>and</strong> cable penetrations are intact.<br />

6. Top <strong>and</strong> bottom of cabinet are free of obstructions (for airflow).<br />

7. The cabinet has been locked, <strong>and</strong> the screws have been<br />

tightened.<br />

8. All tools have been accounted for.<br />

9. All paperwork has been completed.<br />

222 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


10 Glossary<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

This glossary lists abbreviations <strong>and</strong> acronyms used in texts dealing with <strong>RBS</strong><br />

2000 cabinets. Some basic terms <strong>and</strong> acronyms needed for cross-reference<br />

are included in the list.<br />

Terms <strong>and</strong> Abbreviations<br />

An arrow ⇒ is used to indicate a reference to another entry in the list.<br />

1–P One-Pair connection with echo cancellation (= two<br />

wires)<br />

2–P Two-Pair connection with echo cancellation (= four<br />

wires)<br />

AAU Active Antenna Unit<br />

Abis GSM interface st<strong>and</strong>ard defining attributes of the<br />

communication between the BSC <strong>and</strong> the BTS.<br />

AC Alternating Current<br />

ACB Alarm Collection Board<br />

ACCU Alternating Current Connection Unit<br />

ACCU-CU ACCU Connection Unit<br />

ACCU-DU ACCU Distribution Unit<br />

A/D converter Analog to Digital converter<br />

ADM Auxiliary Distribution Module<br />

AFS AMR Full-rate speech<br />

AGW Abis Gateway<br />

AHR AMR Half-rate speech<br />

Air conditioner One version of the climate unit (Active cooler)<br />

AIS Alarm Indication Signal<br />

ALBO Automatic Line Build Out<br />

ALNA Antenna Low Noise Amplifier<br />

223


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

ALPU Antenna Lightning Protection Unit<br />

AMR Adaptive Multi-Rate<br />

AO Application Object<br />

ARAE Antenna Related Auxiliary Equipment<br />

ARFCN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number<br />

ARP Antenna Reference Point<br />

ARU Active Replaceable Unit<br />

ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit<br />

ASU Antenna Sharing Unit<br />

AT Alphanumeric Terminal<br />

ATRU Adaptive Transceiver Unit<br />

ATSR Air Time Slot Resource<br />

AU Antenna Unit<br />

AWG American Wire Gauge<br />

BALUN BALance <strong>and</strong> UNbalance transformer<br />

Batt Battery<br />

BB Battery Box<br />

BBS Battery Back-up System<br />

BCCH Broadcast Control CHannel<br />

Downlink only broadcast channel for broadcast of<br />

general information at a base station, on a base station<br />

basis.<br />

BCS Block Check Sequence<br />

BDM Battery Distribution Module<br />

BER Bit Error Rate<br />

BFF Bit Fault Frequency<br />

BFI Bad Frame Indication<br />

The BDM is an IDM with a battery <strong>and</strong> a local processor.<br />

224 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

BFU Battery Fuse Unit<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Bias injector A unit which injects DC power into the coaxial cable<br />

to feed the TMA. Isolates the DC power from the RF<br />

signal fed to the CDU.<br />

Bm Denotes a full-rate traffic channel<br />

BPC Basic Physical Channel<br />

BS Base Station<br />

Denotes the air interface transport vehicle formed<br />

by repetition of one time slot on one or more radio<br />

frequency channels.<br />

BSC Base Station Controller<br />

GSM network node for control of one or more BTSs.<br />

BSCSim Base Station Controller Simulator<br />

BSIC Base Transceiver Station Identity Code.<br />

BSS Base Station System<br />

GSM network logical unit comprising one BSC <strong>and</strong><br />

one or more BTSs.<br />

BTS Base Transceiver Station<br />

GSM network unit operating on a set of radio frequency<br />

channels in one cell.<br />

burst A portion of digital information, the physical content, that<br />

is transferred within the time interval of one time slot.<br />

cabinet The physical housing of a base station<br />

Cascading Connection of several cabinets by the PCM cable.<br />

Similar to serial connection.<br />

CBCH Cell Broadcast CHannel<br />

This is a downlink only channel used by the GSM<br />

defined SMSCB function.<br />

CCCH Common Control CHannel<br />

Channel combining the following common control<br />

channels:<br />

• PCH Paging CHannel<br />

225


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

• RACH R<strong>and</strong>om Access CHannel<br />

• AGCH Access Grant CHannel<br />

CCU Climate Control Unit<br />

CDU Combining <strong>and</strong> Distribution Unit<br />

CE Conformité Européenne<br />

cell An area of radio coverage identified by the GSM<br />

network by means of the cell identity.<br />

CEU Coverage Extension Unit<br />

CF Central Functions<br />

channel The common term channel denotes the virtual<br />

connection, consisting of physical <strong>and</strong> logical channels,<br />

between BSS <strong>and</strong> MS, during a call in progress.<br />

Channel<br />

Combination<br />

⇒ Logical Channel ⇒ Physical Channel<br />

A physical channel on an air interface carrying a defined<br />

set of logical channels.<br />

Channel group A channel group is a group of dedicated logical<br />

channels to a specific MS.<br />

CM Control Module (for TMA)<br />

CMD Digital Radio Communication Tester<br />

CME 20 Cellular Mobile Europe<br />

- CME 20 Ericsson digital l<strong>and</strong> mobile telecommunication<br />

system based on the GSM st<strong>and</strong>ards.<br />

- CME 2<strong>01</strong> Ericsson GSM system comprising Ericsson<br />

equipment only.<br />

CMRU Central Main Replaceable Unit.<br />

The <strong>RBS</strong> is physically connected to the Base Station<br />

Controller (BSC) via the CMRU. There is only one<br />

CMRU in each <strong>RBS</strong> (DXU or IXU). For <strong>RBS</strong>s without<br />

DXU or IXU the whole <strong>RBS</strong> is regarded as CMRU.<br />

Macro CMRU = DXU<br />

Micro CMRU = The whole <strong>RBS</strong><br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong> CMRU = IXU<br />

226 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong> CMRU = IXU<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 2109 CMRU = IXU<br />

CMS 40 Cellular Mobile System<br />

Ericsson digital l<strong>and</strong> mobile telecommunication<br />

system based on the Joint Technical Committee (JTC)<br />

specification for PCS 1900.<br />

CNU Combining Network Unit<br />

Compr Compressor<br />

CON LAPD concentrator<br />

Config Configuration<br />

LAPD concentration is used to reduce the number of<br />

required physical links between the BSC <strong>and</strong> BTS.<br />

Co-siting Co-siting is the operation of radio equipment from more<br />

than one mobile telephone system <strong>and</strong>/or frequency on<br />

the same site sharing common equipment.<br />

CPI Communication <strong>and</strong> Power Interface<br />

CPI Customer Product Information<br />

CPU Central Processing Unit<br />

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check<br />

CS Coding Scheme<br />

CSA Canadian St<strong>and</strong>ards Association<br />

CSES Consecutive Severely Errored Second<br />

CSU Channel Service Unit<br />

CU Combining Unit (RU in CDU_D)<br />

CXU Configuration Switch Unit<br />

dB decibel<br />

dBm Decibel per 1 milliwatt<br />

DB DataBase<br />

DC Direct Current<br />

227


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

DCC Digital Cross Connector<br />

DCCH Dedicated Control CHannel<br />

DCCU DC Connection Unit<br />

Dedicated control channels carry signalling data.<br />

ddTMA dual duplex Tower Mounted Amplifier<br />

DF Distribution Frame<br />

DF Disturbance Frequency<br />

DFU Distribution <strong>and</strong> Fuse Unit<br />

DIP DIgital Path<br />

DM Degraded Minute<br />

DM Distribution Module<br />

The name of the function used for supervision of the<br />

connected PCM lines.<br />

DMRU Distributed Main Replaceable Unit<br />

If a Main RU is subordinated to the CMRU, it is said to<br />

be distributed.<br />

downlink Signalling direction from the system to the MS.<br />

DP Digital Path<br />

DP Distribution Panel<br />

DPX Duplexer<br />

DS1 Digital Signal level 1 (1544 kbit/s)<br />

DSP Digital Signal Processor<br />

DT Data Transcript<br />

DTE Data Terminal Equipment<br />

DTF Distance To Fault<br />

dTMA duplex TMA<br />

dTRU double TRansceiver Unit<br />

DU Distribution Unit (RU in CDU-D)<br />

228 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

DUT Device Under Test<br />

DX Direct Exchange<br />

DXB Distribution Switch Board<br />

DXC Digital Cross Connector<br />

DXU Distribution Switch Unit<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

DXX Ericsson Cellular Transmission System including NMS<br />

E1 Transmission st<strong>and</strong>ard, G.703, a 2048 kbit/s PCM link<br />

E-GSM Extended GSM<br />

EACU External Alarm Connection Unit<br />

<strong>EBB</strong> External Battery Backup<br />

EC1 External Condition Map Class 1<br />

EC2 External Condition Map Class 2<br />

ECU Energy Control Unit<br />

EDGE Enhanced Data rate for Global Evolution<br />

EDGE dTRU EDGE double TRansceiver Unit<br />

⇒ EDGE<br />

EDT Electrical Down Tilt<br />

EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory<br />

EIRP Effective Isotropic Radiated Power<br />

EMC ElectroMagnetic Compatibility<br />

EMF ElectroMotive Force<br />

EMF ElectroMagnetic Field<br />

EMI Electromagnetic Interference<br />

ENV Environmental<br />

EOC Embedded Operations Channel<br />

EPC Environmental <strong>and</strong> Power Control<br />

ES Errored Second<br />

229


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

ESB External Synchronization Bus<br />

ESD ElectroStatic Discharge<br />

ESF Extended Superframe Format<br />

ESO Ericsson Support Office<br />

ETS European Telecommunication St<strong>and</strong>ard<br />

ETSI European Telecommunication St<strong>and</strong>ard Institute.<br />

EXT External<br />

FACCH Fast Associated Control CHannel<br />

Main signalling channel in association with a TCH.<br />

FCC Federal Communications Commission<br />

FCCH Frequency Correction CHannel<br />

FCOMB Filter COMBiner<br />

FCU Fan Control Unit<br />

FDL Facility Data Link<br />

FDU Feeder Duplexer Unit<br />

FER Frame Erasure Ratio<br />

FIU Fan Interface Unit<br />

FS Function Specification<br />

FSC Field Support Centre<br />

FU Filter Unit (RU in CDU-D)<br />

FUd Filter Unit with duplexer (RU in CDU-D)<br />

FXU Future Expansion Unit<br />

G<strong>01</strong> MO model for <strong>RBS</strong> 200<br />

G12 MO model for <strong>RBS</strong> 2000<br />

G.703 Physical/electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital<br />

interfaces, as defined by the ITU.<br />

G.704 Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312,<br />

2048, 8448 <strong>and</strong> 44 736 kbit/s, as defined by the ITU.<br />

230 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

GPRS General Packet Radio Services<br />

GPS Global Positioning System<br />

GS General Specification<br />

GSL GPRS Signalling Link<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

GSM Global System for Mobile communications<br />

International st<strong>and</strong>ard for a TDMA digital mobile<br />

communication system. Originally, GSM was an<br />

abbreviation for Group Special Mobile, which is a<br />

European mobile telecommunication interest group,<br />

established in 1982.<br />

GSM 800 GSM system 800 MHz (generic)<br />

GSM 900 GSM system 900 MHz (generic)<br />

GSM 1800 GSM system 1800 MHz (generic)<br />

GSM 1900 GSM system 1900 MHz (generic)<br />

HCE HDSL Central Equipment<br />

HCOMB Hybrid COMBiner<br />

HDLC High level Data Link Control<br />

HDSL High bit rate Digital Subscriber Line<br />

Heat Exchanger A version of the climate unit<br />

HEU Heat Exchanger Unit<br />

HISC Highway Splitter Combiner<br />

HLIN High Level IN<br />

HLOUT High Level OUT<br />

HMS Heat Management System<br />

HTU HDSL Terminating Unit<br />

Hum Humidity<br />

HW HardWare<br />

HWU HardWare Unit<br />

231


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

An HWU consists of one or more SEs. An HWU is<br />

a functional unit within the <strong>RBS</strong>. The HWU is either<br />

active (equipped with a processor) or passive (without<br />

processor).<br />

I1A Internal Fault Map Class 1A<br />

I1B Internal Fault Map Class 1B<br />

I2A Internal Fault Map Class 2A<br />

IA Immediate Assignment<br />

IC Integrated Circuit<br />

ICMI Initial Codec Mode Indicator<br />

ID Identity<br />

IDB Installation DataBase<br />

IDM Internal Distribution Module<br />

IEC International Electric Commission<br />

IFB Interface Board<br />

IF Box Interface Box<br />

IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity<br />

INIT Initial<br />

INT Internal<br />

IOG Input/Output Group<br />

IOM Internal Operation <strong>and</strong> Maintenance bus<br />

IR InfraRed<br />

IS Interface Switch<br />

IWD InterWork Description<br />

IXU Interface <strong>and</strong> Switching Unit<br />

JTC Joint Technical Committee<br />

LAN Local Area Network<br />

LAPD Link Access Procedures on D-channel<br />

232 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


LBO Line Build Out<br />

LED Light Emitting Diode<br />

LLB Line Loop Back<br />

LNA Low Noise Amplifier<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

LAPD is the data link layer (layer 2) protocol used for<br />

communication between the BSC <strong>and</strong> the BTS on the<br />

Abis interface.<br />

Abis layer 2 is sometimes used synonymously with<br />

LAPD.<br />

Local bus The local bus offers communication between a central<br />

main RU (DXU) <strong>and</strong> distributed main RUs (TRU <strong>and</strong><br />

ECU).<br />

Local mode When the RU is in Local mode, it is not communicating<br />

with the BSC.<br />

Local/Remote<br />

switch<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

LOF Loss Of Frame<br />

A switch used by the operator to order the RU to enter<br />

Local or Remote mode.<br />

Logical Channel A logical channel represents a specified portion of the<br />

information carrying capacity of a physical channel.<br />

GSM defines two major categories of logical channels:<br />

• TCHs – Traffic CHannels, for speech or user data<br />

• CCHs – Control CHannels, for control signalling<br />

⇒ Physical Channel ⇒ Channel Combination<br />

Logical RU A unit which can be referred to, but is not a single<br />

physical unit.<br />

LOS Loss Of Signal<br />

LVD Low Voltage Directive<br />

LVF Low Voltage Filter<br />

MAC Medium Access Controller<br />

MADT Mean Accumulated DownTime<br />

magazine A magazine is a reserved space in the cabinet, which<br />

may hold one or more RUs.<br />

233


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Main RU Contains one or more processors, to which software<br />

can be downloaded from the BSC. A Main RU is either<br />

Central (CMRU) or Distributed (DMRU). A Main RU may<br />

or may not have a direct signalling link to the BSC.<br />

MBU Mounting Base Unit<br />

MCB MultiCasting Box<br />

MHS Modification H<strong>and</strong>ling System<br />

Ericsson trouble report database<br />

MiniLink Ericsson’s microwave transmission system.<br />

MMI Man-Machine Interface<br />

MO Managed Object<br />

MR Measurement Receiver<br />

MRT Mean Repair Time<br />

MS Mobile Station<br />

MSC Mobile services Switching Centre<br />

GSM network unit for switching, routing <strong>and</strong> controlling<br />

calls to <strong>and</strong> from the Public Switched Telephone<br />

Network (PSTN) <strong>and</strong> other networks.<br />

MSTP Mobile Station Test Point<br />

MTBF Mean Time Between Failure<br />

MTBCF Mean Time Between Catastrophe Failure<br />

Multidrop Two or more <strong>RBS</strong>s connected in a chain to the same<br />

transmission system. All the relevant time slots are<br />

dropped out by each <strong>RBS</strong>. (This function is sometimes<br />

called cascading.)<br />

N/A Not Applicable<br />

NCS National Colour System<br />

NEBS Network Equipment Building System<br />

NMS Ericsson Network Management System in DXX<br />

Nominal Power The nominal power is the power level defined when<br />

configuring the transceiver.<br />

234 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

N terminal Neutral terminal in an AC mains connection<br />

NTU Network Terminating Unit<br />

OL/UL Overlaid/Underlaid<br />

O&M Operation <strong>and</strong> Maintenance<br />

General term for activities such as configuration,<br />

utilization of channels (frequency b<strong>and</strong>s), cell<br />

planning, system supervision, hardware <strong>and</strong> software<br />

maintenance, subscriber administration, <strong>and</strong> so on.<br />

OMC Operation <strong>and</strong> Maintenance Centre<br />

OML Operation <strong>and</strong> Maintenance Link<br />

Layer 2 communication link for operation <strong>and</strong><br />

maintenance services on Abis.<br />

OMT Operation <strong>and</strong> Maintenance Terminal<br />

The OMT is a PC application for O&M of an <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

Operation Operation is the normal, everyday running of the <strong>RBS</strong><br />

with full functions.<br />

OPI OPerational Instructions<br />

OTU Outdoor Terminating Unit<br />

OVP OverVoltage Protection<br />

OXU Space for Optional Expansion<br />

P-GSM Primary GSM<br />

PA Power Amplifier<br />

PAM Power Amplifier Module<br />

Passive RU A passive replaceable unit has a very low level of<br />

intelligence <strong>and</strong> is independent of the processor system.<br />

PBA Printed Board Assembly<br />

PBC Power <strong>and</strong> Battery Cabinet<br />

PC Personal Computer<br />

PCB Printed Circuit Board<br />

PCH Paging CHannel<br />

235


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Downlink only subchannel of CCCH for system paging<br />

of MSs.<br />

⇒ CCCH<br />

PCM Pulse Code Modulation<br />

PCU Packet Control Unit<br />

PDCH Packet Data Channel<br />

PE terminal Protective Earth terminal in an AC mains connection<br />

PFWD Power Forward<br />

Physical Channel An air interface physical channel carries one or<br />

more logical channels. A physical channel uses a<br />

combination of frequency <strong>and</strong> time division multiplexing<br />

<strong>and</strong> is defined as a sequence of radio frequency<br />

channels <strong>and</strong> time slots.<br />

⇒ TDMA frame ⇒ Logical channel<br />

PIB Power Interface Board<br />

PIN Personal Identification Number<br />

PLB Payload Loop Back<br />

PLMN Public L<strong>and</strong> Mobile Network<br />

A network, established <strong>and</strong> operated by an<br />

administration or its licensed operator(s), for the specific<br />

purpose of providing l<strong>and</strong> mobile communication<br />

services to the public. It provides communication<br />

possibilities for mobile users. For communication<br />

between mobile <strong>and</strong> fixed users, interworking with a<br />

fixed network is necessary.<br />

PPE Personal Protective Equipment<br />

PREFL Power Reflected<br />

PSA Power Supply Adapter<br />

PSTN Public Switch Telephone Network<br />

PSU Power Supply Unit<br />

PWU Power Unit<br />

236 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

RACH R<strong>and</strong>om Access CHannel<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Uplink only subchannel of CCCH for MS request for<br />

allocation of a dedicated channel.<br />

⇒ CCCH<br />

RAI Remote Alarm Indication<br />

RAM R<strong>and</strong>om Access Memory<br />

RBER Radio Bit Error Ratio<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> Radio Base Station<br />

All equipment forming one or more Ericsson base<br />

station.<br />

⇒ BTS<br />

RCB Radio Connection Box<br />

RD Receive Data<br />

Remote mode When the RU is in RU Remote mode, a link is<br />

established between the BSC <strong>and</strong> the Central Main<br />

RU (CMRU).<br />

RF Radio Frequency<br />

RFCH Radio Frequency CHannel<br />

A radio frequency carrier with its associated b<strong>and</strong>width.<br />

RFTL Radio Frequency Test Loop<br />

RLC Radio Link Control<br />

RLC Repair Logistic Centre<br />

RRU Remote Radio Unit<br />

RSL Radio Signalling Link<br />

R-state Release state<br />

RS232 American st<strong>and</strong>ard for term/MODEM interconnection.<br />

rTMA Receiver TMA<br />

RTN Return<br />

RU Replaceable Unit<br />

237


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

RX Receiver<br />

An RU consists of one or more HWUs. An RU may be<br />

replaced by another RU of the same type. The RU is<br />

the smallest unit that can be h<strong>and</strong>led on site.<br />

RX1 Receiver antenna branch 1<br />

RX2 Receiver antenna branch 2<br />

RXA Receiver antenna branch A<br />

RXB Receiver antenna branch B<br />

RXBP Receiver B<strong>and</strong>Pass filter<br />

RXD Receiver Divider<br />

RXDA Receiver Divider Amplifier<br />

RXDP Receiver Distribution Plane<br />

RXLEV Measure of signal strength as defined in<br />

GSM:05.08:8.1.4<br />

RXQUAL Measure of signal quality as defined in GSM:05.08:8.2.4<br />

SACCH Slow Associated Control CHannel<br />

SCC Site Cell Configuration<br />

SCH Synchronization CHannel<br />

SCU Switching <strong>and</strong> Combining Unit<br />

SDCCH St<strong>and</strong> alone Dedicated Control CHannel<br />

SE Supervised Entity<br />

Main dedicated signalling channel on the air interface,<br />

mainly used for call locating <strong>and</strong> establishment.<br />

SEC Site Extension Configuration<br />

SES Severely Errored Second<br />

SF Slip Frequency<br />

SID Silence Descriptor<br />

SIG Signalling<br />

SIM Subscriber Identity Module<br />

238 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

SMS Short Message Service (point to point)<br />

SO Service Object<br />

SS Swedish St<strong>and</strong>ard<br />

A short message, up to 160 alphanumeric characters<br />

long, can be sent to or from an MS (point to point).<br />

sTRU single Transceiver Unit<br />

Sub-RU A sub-replaceable unit is always connected to a<br />

superior Main RU. This connection is used for example<br />

for retrieval of the RU identity. A sub-RU normally does<br />

not have a processor. Note that an RU with a processor,<br />

which cannot be loaded, is classified as a sub-RU.<br />

SVS System Voltage Sensor<br />

SW SoftWare<br />

SWR St<strong>and</strong>ing Wave Ratio<br />

SYNC Synchronous<br />

T1 Transmission st<strong>and</strong>ard, G.703, a 1544 kbit/s PCM link<br />

TA Timing Advance<br />

A signal sent by the BTS to the MS which the MS uses<br />

to advance its timing of transmissions to the BTS to<br />

compensate for propagation delay.<br />

TC Transaction Capabilities<br />

TCB Transceiver Control Board<br />

TCH Traffic CHannel<br />

The traffic channels carry either encoded speech or<br />

user data.<br />

TCH/F Traffic Channel, Full-rate<br />

TCH/H Traffic Channel, Half-rate<br />

TCC Transmission Coherent Combining<br />

TCH SIG Traffic CHannel Signalling<br />

TD Transmit Data<br />

TDMA Time Division Multiple Access<br />

239


<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Multiplexing of several channels in a common frequency<br />

b<strong>and</strong>. Each channel is assigned a certain time division,<br />

a time slot.<br />

TDMA frame GSM air interface time frame comprising eight time<br />

slots.<br />

TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier<br />

TEMS TEst Mobile Station<br />

TF Timing Function<br />

TG Transceiver Group<br />

TEI is an identification code carried by a LAPD frame<br />

as a terminal connection endpoint within a Service<br />

Access Point (SAP).<br />

TIM Transmission Interface Module<br />

Timing bus The timing bus carries air timing information from the<br />

timing unit in the DXU to the TRUs.<br />

TLS Terrestrial Link Supervision<br />

TM Transport Module<br />

The Transport module is non-<strong>RBS</strong> equipment belonging<br />

to the transport network.<br />

TMA Tower Mounted Amplifier<br />

TMA-CM Tower Mounted Amplifier – Control Module<br />

TN Time slot Number<br />

TN O&M Transport Network Operation <strong>and</strong> Maintenance (in<br />

general)<br />

TRA Transcoder Rate Adapter<br />

TRS Transceiver System<br />

TRU Transceiver Unit<br />

The TRA Unit (TRAU) in BSC performs transcoding<br />

of speech information <strong>and</strong> rate adaptation of data<br />

information.<br />

TRX Transceiver (combined transmitter <strong>and</strong> receiver)<br />

TRXC Transceiver Controller<br />

240 EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12


EN/LZT 720 0027 Uen R3A 2005-<strong>01</strong>-12<br />

TS Time Slot<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

A 0.577 ms period (TDMA frame subunit) corresponding<br />

to 156.25 raw bits of information. The eight time slots of<br />

each TDMA frame are numbered 0...7.<br />

⇒ Burst<br />

TT Total Time<br />

TU Timing Unit<br />

TX Transmitter<br />

TXA Transmitter Antenna A<br />

TXB Transmitter Antenna B<br />

TXBP Transmitter B<strong>and</strong>Pass filter<br />

TXU Radio Transmitter Unit<br />

UAS Unavailable Seconds<br />

UAST UnAvailable STate supervision<br />

UL Underwriter Laboratories<br />

uplink Signalling direction from the MS to the system.<br />

UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply<br />

VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator<br />

VSWR Voltage St<strong>and</strong>ing Wave Ratio RF signal measure. The<br />

quotient between transmitted <strong>and</strong> reflected voltage.<br />

X bus The X bus carries transmit air data frames between<br />

transceivers.<br />

Y link The interface between the DXU <strong>and</strong> each DSP System<br />

in core based TRUs.<br />

241


E 1<br />

EN/LZT 720 0458 Uen R3A<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

Installation Instructions<br />

This document describes the procedure for installation of the External Battery<br />

Backup <strong>01</strong> (<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong>).<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1578A<br />

(22)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

Contents<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

1 Introduction 3<br />

1.1 Target Group 3<br />

1.2 Revision History 3<br />

2 Preconditions 4<br />

2.1 Health <strong>and</strong> Safety Information 4<br />

2.2 Tools 4<br />

2.3 Space Requirements 5<br />

3 Installation Procedure 6<br />

3.1 Installing the Wall Bracket (Option) 6<br />

3.2 Installing the Wallplate 8<br />

3.3 Installing the Battery Cabinet 11<br />

3.4 Connecting the Earth Conductor 12<br />

3.5 Connecting Power 13<br />

3.6 Connecting the Alarm Cable 17<br />

3.7 Connecting the GPS Cable 19<br />

3.8 Performing Concluding Routines 20<br />

2 (22) EN/LZT 720 0458 Uen R3A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

1 Introduction<br />

1.1 Target Group<br />

This document describes the procedure for installation of the External Battery<br />

Backup <strong>01</strong> (<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong>).<br />

The target group for these instructions is the installation personnel performing<br />

the installation of an <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong>.<br />

1.1.1 Qualifications for Installation Personnel<br />

Ericsson recommends that personnel performing the installation procedure<br />

possess the following skills:<br />

• Technical college or equivalent education with emphasis on electrical<br />

engineering<br />

• Familiarity with the equipment used during the installation process<br />

• An underst<strong>and</strong>ing of technical English<br />

1.2 Revision History<br />

1.2.1 R2A to R3A<br />

1.2.2 R1A to R2A<br />

1.2.3 R1A<br />

EN/LZT 720 0458 Uen R3A<br />

Except for editorial changes, such as the correction of spelling, grammar, <strong>and</strong><br />

layout, this manual has been revised as follows:<br />

• Updated the figure for the space requirements<br />

• Updated the concluding routines<br />

• Added new safety admonitions<br />

• Information for connecting the alarm cable was updated.<br />

This is the first issue of this document.<br />

3 (22)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

2 Preconditions<br />

This section provides information on health <strong>and</strong> safety, tools, equipment<br />

required <strong>and</strong> conditions to be met before starting this procedure.<br />

2.1 Health <strong>and</strong> Safety Information<br />

2.2 Tools<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

Personnel should exercise care when working on or around electrical<br />

equipment. In addition to this safety information, the specific safety instructions<br />

for all products involved in the installation procedure should be adhered to.<br />

Caution!<br />

Improper h<strong>and</strong>ling of batteries can result in the batteries short-circuiting, which<br />

can result in serious injury due to high energy levels. Exercise the necessary<br />

care when working with batteries.<br />

Before starting the installation, see Chapter Safety Instructions in:<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 2109, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

The following tools are required:<br />

• Tool set with hammer drill<br />

• Personal Tool Kit, LTT 6<strong>01</strong> 135/1<br />

For further information on tools, see:<br />

St<strong>and</strong>ard Tools <strong>and</strong> Equipment<br />

Catalogue<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027<br />

EN/LZT 720 0090<br />

EN/LZT 720 0<strong>01</strong>3<br />

4 (22) EN/LZT 720 0458 Uen R3A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

2.3 Space Requirements<br />

EN/LZT 720 0458 Uen R3A<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> installation requires a minimum spacing to provide a sufficient working<br />

area.<br />

Note: Space for future site expansion must be considered when installing<br />

an <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> unit.<br />

500<br />

Minimum space requirements<br />

Units of measurement: mm<br />

400<br />

300<br />

<strong>EBB</strong><br />

250<br />

Figure 1 Space Requirements<br />

<strong>RBS</strong><br />

500<br />

250<br />

500<br />

<strong>RBS</strong><br />

100 225 100<br />

80<br />

180<br />

110<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1591B<br />

The <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> cannot be placed more than about 2 m from the <strong>RBS</strong> because the<br />

alarm cable <strong>and</strong> DC cable are 2.5 m in length.<br />

Note: Before installing the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong>, ensure that the cables can be connected<br />

to the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong><br />

2.5 m<br />

Cable length<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1630A<br />

Figure 2 Distance Between <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> the <strong>RBS</strong><br />

5 (22)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

3 Installation Procedure<br />

This section provides instructions for how to install the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong>.<br />

3.1 Installing the Wall Bracket (Option)<br />

Note: This section is only applicable for walls with very rugged surfaces or<br />

when the <strong>RBS</strong> is to be mounted on a pole.<br />

This section describes how to install the wall bracket.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

The wall bracket is for use as a complement to the mounting interface of the<br />

wallplate. Typical applications are rough surfaces <strong>and</strong> other conditions where<br />

the mounting interface for the wallplate is not flat. The wall bracket must also<br />

be used if the <strong>EBB</strong> is to be installed on a pole.<br />

3.1.1 Installing the Wall Bracket on a Wall (Alternative)<br />

1. Place the drilling template in the position where the <strong>EBB</strong> is to be situated,<br />

with the side marked ‘‘UP’’ pointing to the right. (‘‘UP’’ indicates the<br />

direction for <strong>RBS</strong> mounting.)<br />

2. Use a spirit level to check that the drilling template is placed in a<br />

horizontal position.<br />

3. Mark the position of the holes to<br />

be drilled.<br />

Note:<br />

The wall bracket must not be<br />

used as a drilling template, to<br />

avoid damaging the rust protection<br />

surface.<br />

6 (22) EN/LZT 720 0458 Uen R3A<br />

Alternate holes<br />

Recomended holes<br />

UP<br />

DRILL TEMPLATE FOR WALL BRACKET<br />

UP<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>50C


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

4. Remove the template <strong>and</strong> drill the holes for the fasteners.<br />

5. Install the wall bracket <strong>and</strong><br />

secure it into position with all<br />

screws.<br />

6. Loosen the four nuts, on which the wall bracket is to be hung, until<br />

only a few threads remain embedded.<br />

3.1.2 Installing the Wall Bracket on a Pole (Alternative)<br />

EN/LZT 720 0458 Uen R3A<br />

The wall bracket may be mounted on a horizontal or a vertical pole.<br />

1. Choose the appropriate holes. See Figure below.<br />

A<br />

Figure 3 Holes used for Horizontal or Vertical Poles<br />

A Holes used for horizontal poles<br />

B Holes used for vertical poles<br />

B<br />

B<br />

UP<br />

A<br />

UP UP<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>51B<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1589A<br />

7 (22)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

2. Ensure that the washers are mounted correctly, <strong>and</strong> then attach the two<br />

mast-mounting fixtures with the screws <strong>and</strong> washers. See figure below.<br />

Note: Ensure that the recess is attached in the correct direction.<br />

Figure 4 Fastening Mast-Mounting Fixtures to the Wall Bracket<br />

UP<br />

Recess<br />

Recess<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>71B<br />

3. Position the wall bracket on the pole <strong>and</strong> mount the mast-mounting fixtures,<br />

tightening the screws alternately to avoid bending them. Ensure that the<br />

washers are mounted correctly.<br />

Figure 5 Installing the Wall Bracket on the Pole<br />

3.2 Installing the Wallplate<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>70C<br />

This section describes how to install the wallplate on a wall bracket or directly<br />

onto a wall.<br />

8 (22) EN/LZT 720 0458 Uen R3A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

3.2.1 Installing the Wallplate on a Wall Bracket (Alternative)<br />

1. Hang the wallplate on the<br />

four screws situated on the<br />

wall bracket. Ensure that the<br />

fastening screws are properly<br />

fitted in the key holes.<br />

2. Tighten the four nuts.<br />

3.2.2 Installing the Wallplate on a Wall (Alternative)<br />

EN/LZT 720 0458 Uen R3A<br />

1. Place the wallplate in the position where the <strong>EBB</strong> is to be situated.<br />

2. Use a spirit level to check that the wallplate is placed in a horizontal<br />

position.<br />

3. Mark the position of the applicable<br />

holes to be drilled.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1597A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1629A<br />

9 (22)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

4. Remove the wallplate <strong>and</strong> drill<br />

holes for the fasteners most<br />

suitable for the wall material.<br />

5. Insert plugs or exp<strong>and</strong>er bolts into each hole.<br />

6. Insert the screws <strong>and</strong> tighten them, remembering to leave enough<br />

threads protruding to hang the wallplate on.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>1600A<br />

7. Hang the wallplate on the bolts, applying just enough downward pressure<br />

to ensure that the screws fit in the keyholes.<br />

8. Tighten the four bolts.<br />

10 (22) EN/LZT 720 0458 Uen R3A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1598A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

3.3 Installing the Battery Cabinet<br />

EN/LZT 720 0458 Uen R3A<br />

1. Hook the upper part of the battery<br />

cabinet onto the wallplate.<br />

2. Secure the battery cabinet with<br />

the two screws.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1599A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1603A<br />

11 (22)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

3.4 Connecting the Earth Conductor<br />

1. Loosen the 10 torx screws on the<br />

battery cabinet door.<br />

2. Open the battery cabinet door.<br />

3. Connect site earthing to the lower-left corner of the battery unit. Use<br />

an earthing kit, see:<br />

St<strong>and</strong>ard Site Material<br />

Installation Instructions<br />

EN/LZT 720 0<strong>01</strong>4<br />

15 Nm<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>1604A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1683A<br />

4. Connect the other end of the earth cable to the existing lightning system<br />

close to the equipment.<br />

Note: If there is no lightning protection system, use the earthing bar, see:<br />

12 (22) EN/LZT 720 0458 Uen R3A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

St<strong>and</strong>ard Site Material<br />

Installation Instructions<br />

3.5 Connecting Power<br />

EN/LZT 720 0458 Uen R3A<br />

EN/LZT 720 0<strong>01</strong>4<br />

This section describes how to connect the power cables to the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong>. It<br />

includes instructions for both the DC cables <strong>and</strong> the AC cable.<br />

Fuses AC<br />

Figure 6 Interfaces<br />

<strong>RBS</strong><br />

-48 V DC<br />

AC<br />

L<br />

L<br />

PE<br />

-48 V DC<br />

-48 V DC RTN<br />

-48 V<br />

-48 V DC RTN<br />

Danger!<br />

Link<br />

-48 V DC<br />

IXU<br />

GPS/AUX GPS<br />

Battery<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1573A<br />

Electric shock risk. Avoid both direct <strong>and</strong> indirect contact with parts connected<br />

to mains power as this is likely to be fatal. Switch off the mains power before<br />

starting work.<br />

Danger!<br />

Improper electrical installation may cause fire or electric shock that is likely to<br />

be fatal. Only a qualified <strong>and</strong> authorized electrician is permitted to install or<br />

modify electrical installations.<br />

13 (22)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

Note: Protective Earth must be connected to the earth terminal when<br />

connecting power supply.<br />

The protective earth terminal is located in the <strong>EBB</strong>, indicated by the earth<br />

symbol, see figure below.<br />

Figure 7 Protective Earth<br />

Note: Protective Earth connection is essential.<br />

1. Remove the cable insulation <strong>and</strong><br />

strip the conductors.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

14 (22) EN/LZT 720 0458 Uen R3A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0308A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0458 Uen R3A<br />

2. Mount all cable inlet parts.<br />

3. Route the cable into the inlet <strong>and</strong><br />

tighten the cable gl<strong>and</strong>.<br />

Loosening the Interface Box Gl<strong>and</strong> Plate (Optional)<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0309B<br />

P<strong>01</strong>0310A<br />

To simplify the mounting of the cables to the interface box the gl<strong>and</strong> plate can<br />

be loosened. For example it is easier to mount the cable inlet <strong>and</strong> the cable<br />

termination block at ground level instead of at a height, for example on a ladder.<br />

1. Unscrew the two torx screws.<br />

2. Loosen the gl<strong>and</strong> plate.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1644A<br />

15 (22)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

3.5.1 Connecting AC Mains<br />

This section describes how to connect the AC Mains cable.<br />

1. Ensure that the site power is turned off.<br />

2. Connect the AC cable to the<br />

dedicated terminals.<br />

3. Ensure that the protective earth is properly connected.<br />

3.5.2 Connecting DC Backup Power to <strong>RBS</strong><br />

This section describes how to connect the DC supply cable.<br />

1. Ensure that the site power is turned off.<br />

2. Connect the DC cable to the<br />

dedicated terminals.<br />

Note:<br />

The −48 V DC wire is black <strong>and</strong><br />

the −48 V DC_RTN wire is grey.<br />

For information on how to connect the DC cable to the <strong>RBS</strong>, see:<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0027<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

16 (22) EN/LZT 720 0458 Uen R3A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1617A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1623A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 2109, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

3.5.3 Connecting DC Power to MINI-LINK<br />

EN/LZT 720 0090<br />

Connect the DC MINI-LINK cable to the right of the DC backup <strong>RBS</strong> cable. The<br />

MINI-LINK cable is connected in the same way as the AC cable.<br />

3.6 Connecting the Alarm Cable<br />

EN/LZT 720 0458 Uen R3A<br />

17 (22)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

1. Loosen the D-sub cover plate.<br />

2. Connect the alarm cable <strong>and</strong><br />

secure it.<br />

3. Connect the other end of the<br />

cable to the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

18 (22) EN/LZT 720 0458 Uen R3A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1618A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1619A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1190A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

3.7 Connecting the GPS Cable<br />

EN/LZT 720 0458 Uen R3A<br />

1. Loosen the GPS cover plate.<br />

2. Connect the GPS cable <strong>and</strong><br />

secure it.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1620A<br />

19 (22)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

3.8 Performing Concluding Routines<br />

1. Make sure that the battery on/off<br />

switch is on.<br />

2. Make sure that the AC on/off<br />

switch is on.<br />

3.<br />

Check that the indicators are in<br />

the following states:<br />

Fault<br />

Operational<br />

Charging<br />

Check battery<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

ON or OFF<br />

OFF<br />

Fault<br />

Operational<br />

Charging<br />

Check<br />

battery<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

20 (22) EN/LZT 720 0458 Uen R3A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1639A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1602A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1616A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0458 Uen R3A<br />

4. Close the battery cabinet door <strong>and</strong> fasten the 10 Torx screws.<br />

5. Fasten the sunshield’s attached<br />

safety string to the lower-left side<br />

of the wallplate.<br />

6. Hold the sunshield with both<br />

h<strong>and</strong>s. Push the left side of the<br />

sunshield towards the <strong>EBB</strong> until it<br />

snaps into position on the left side<br />

of the wallplate. Pull the right side<br />

of the sunshield outwards <strong>and</strong><br />

then attach it in the same way.<br />

7. Ensure that the sunshield is properly fitted.<br />

8. Check with the Base Station Controller (BSC) on the Operation <strong>and</strong><br />

Maintenance Terminal (OMT) that no external alarms remain.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1640A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>16<strong>01</strong>A<br />

9. Check the DC power to the <strong>RBS</strong>. Ensure that the DC power indicator is on.<br />

10. Check that the DC on/off switch on the <strong>RBS</strong> is on.<br />

21 (22)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

Ericsson AB<br />

SE-164 80 Stockholm<br />

Sweden<br />

asq.us@ericsson.com<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

No part of this document may be reproduced in any form without<br />

the written permission of the copyright owner.<br />

The contents of this document are subject to revision without<br />

notice due to continued progress in methodology, design <strong>and</strong><br />

manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any error or<br />

damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.<br />

© Ericsson AB 2005 — All Rights Reserved<br />

22 (22) EN/LZT 720 0458 Uen R3A


E 1<br />

EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

Maintenance Instructions<br />

This document describes the procedure for maintenance of the External Battery<br />

Backup <strong>01</strong> (<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong>).<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1578A<br />

(38)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

Contents<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

1 Introduction 3<br />

1.1 Target Group 3<br />

1.2 Revision History 3<br />

2 Preconditions 5<br />

2.1 Health <strong>and</strong> Safety Information 5<br />

2.2 Tools 5<br />

3 Fault Identification 7<br />

4 Fault Localisation 11<br />

4.1 Search Procedure 11<br />

5 HW Replacement 15<br />

5.1 Preparations 15<br />

5.2 Replacing the Battery 15<br />

5.3 Replacing the Fuses 17<br />

5.4 Replacing the DC Backup Cable to the <strong>RBS</strong> 18<br />

5.5 Replacing the Alarm Cable 23<br />

5.6 Replacing the Sunshield 23<br />

5.7 Replacing the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> 24<br />

5.8 Performing Concluding Routines 31<br />

6 Miscellaneous Equipment 33<br />

6.1 MINI-LINK Equipment 33<br />

6.2 GPS Equipment 33<br />

7 Useful Battery-Backup Information 37<br />

2 (38) EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

1 Introduction<br />

1.1 Target Group<br />

This document describes the procedure for maintenance of the External Battery<br />

Backup <strong>01</strong> (<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong>).<br />

The target group for this document is maintenance personnel. To perform<br />

maintenance work in a safe <strong>and</strong> professional way, the work must be done by<br />

skilled personnel.<br />

The following qualifications are minimum requirements:<br />

• Good underst<strong>and</strong>ing of radio <strong>and</strong> telephone engineering<br />

• Good underst<strong>and</strong>ing of engineering English<br />

1.2 Revision History<br />

1.2.1 R1A to R2A<br />

1.2.2 R1A<br />

EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

Except for editorial changes, such as the correction of spelling, grammar, <strong>and</strong><br />

layout, this manual has been revised as follows:<br />

• Updated references to the User’s <strong>Guide</strong>s<br />

• Added new safety admonitions<br />

This is the first issue of this document.<br />

3 (38)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

4 (38) EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

2 Preconditions<br />

This section describes the preconditions that apply to the maintenance<br />

procedures, including tools <strong>and</strong> safety.<br />

2.1 Health <strong>and</strong> Safety Information<br />

2.2 Tools<br />

EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

Personnel should exercise care when working on or around electrical<br />

equipment. In addition to this safety information, the specific safety instructions<br />

for all products involved in the installation procedure should be adhered to.<br />

Caution!<br />

Improper h<strong>and</strong>ling of batteries can result in the batteries short-circuiting, which<br />

can result in serious injury due to high energy levels. Exercise the necessary<br />

care when working with batteries.<br />

Before starting the installation, see Chapter Safety Instructions in:<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 2109, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

The following tool set is required:<br />

• Maintenance Tool Set, LTT 6<strong>01</strong> 137/1<br />

For further information on tools, see:<br />

Torque Values<br />

St<strong>and</strong>ard Tools <strong>and</strong> Equipment<br />

Catalogue<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027<br />

EN/LZT 720 0090<br />

EN/LZT 720 0<strong>01</strong>3<br />

The recommended torque wrench settings are listed in the table below.<br />

5 (38)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

Table 1 Recommended Torque Wrench Settings<br />

Dimension Torque (Nm) Remark<br />

M8 15 General<br />

M6 6.0 General<br />

M4 1.5 General<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

6 (38) EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

3 Fault Identification<br />

Follow this procedure to determine the fault correction action required:<br />

1. Loosen the right side of the<br />

sunshield by pulling it outwards.<br />

Loosen the left side <strong>and</strong> let the<br />

sunshield hang in the safety<br />

string.<br />

The Fault indicator is illuminated<br />

to indicate that there is an<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> fault.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>16<strong>01</strong>A<br />

2. Use the tables below to identify the appropriate action required to resolve<br />

the fault.<br />

Table 2 Action Depending on Indicator Status <strong>and</strong> Alarm<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

Indicator<br />

Fault ON DC power OFF<br />

Check battery<br />

ON<br />

Operational ON<br />

Fault OFF<br />

Battery OFF<br />

EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> Indicator <strong>RBS</strong> Alarm Action<br />

DC power OFF<br />

DC power OFF<br />

External:<br />

• BATTERY<br />

BACKUP FAULT<br />

Unit:<br />

• SO CF RU:14<br />

External:<br />

• CHECK BATTERY<br />

Unit:<br />

• SO CF RU:14<br />

External:<br />

–<br />

Unit:<br />

• SO CF RU:14<br />

Follow the instructions in<br />

Section 5.7 Replacing the<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> on page 24.<br />

Check the battery switch <strong>and</strong><br />

the battery cable. If the fault<br />

remains, follow the instructions<br />

in Section 5.2 Replacing the<br />

Battery on page 15.<br />

Follow the instructions in<br />

Section 5.4 Replacing the DC<br />

Backup Cable to the <strong>RBS</strong> on<br />

page 18.<br />

7 (38)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

Table 2 Action Depending on Indicator Status <strong>and</strong> Alarm<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

Indicator<br />

Operational ON DC power ON<br />

– DC power OFF<br />

Operational ON DC power ON<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> Indicator <strong>RBS</strong> Alarm Action<br />

External:<br />

• CHECK BATTERY<br />

• BATTERY<br />

BACKUP FAULT<br />

• BATTERY<br />

BACKUP IS<br />

ABOUT TO END<br />

Unit:<br />

–<br />

External:<br />

• BATTERY<br />

BACKUP FAULT<br />

Unit:<br />

• SO CF RU:14<br />

External:<br />

• BATTERY<br />

BACKUP IS<br />

ABOUT TO END<br />

Unit:<br />

• SO CF RU:14<br />

Table 3 Action Depending on Visual HW Inspection<br />

Visual HW Inspection Action<br />

Follow the instructions in<br />

Section 5.5 Replacing the<br />

Alarm Cable on page 23.<br />

Follow the instructions in<br />

Section 4.1 Search Procedure<br />

on page 11.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

This alarm does not request<br />

an action. It informs that less<br />

than 30 s, <strong>and</strong> more than 10 s,<br />

of remaining backup time is<br />

available at present discharge<br />

level.<br />

Sunshield is damaged Follow the instructions in Section 5.6<br />

Replacing the Sunshield on page 23.<br />

8 (38) EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

Table 4 Action for Miscellaneous Equipment<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> Alarm <strong>RBS</strong> Indicator Action<br />

– Transmission OK OFF Follow the instructions in<br />

Section 6.1 MINI-LINK<br />

Equipment on page 33.<br />

Unit:<br />

• SO CF RU:48/49<br />

– Follow the instructions<br />

in Section 6.2 GPS<br />

Equipment on page 33.<br />

9 (38)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

10 (38) EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

4 Fault Localisation<br />

Follow this procedure to locate the faulty HW unit.<br />

Precondition<br />

The <strong>RBS</strong> has generated at least one of the following alarms:<br />

• CHECK BATTERY<br />

• BATTERY BACKUP FAULT<br />

• SO CF RU:14<br />

The alarm BATTERY BACKUP IS ABOUT TO END can also be generated, but<br />

it does not request an action. It informs that less than 30 s, <strong>and</strong> more than 10 s,<br />

of remaining backup time is available at present discharge level.<br />

4.1 Search Procedure<br />

EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

1. Loosen the 10 torx screws on the<br />

battery cabinet door.<br />

2. Open the battery cabinet door.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1604A<br />

11 (38)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

3. Switch off the AC on/off switch.<br />

4. Remove the fuseholder.<br />

5. Switch on the AC on/off switch.<br />

6. Use a digital multimeter to check<br />

the voltage at the fuseholder.<br />

If the multimeter shows<br />

110 – 230 V AC, continue<br />

with the next step. Otherwise, go<br />

to step 13.<br />

7. Switch off the AC on/off switch.<br />

8. Use the digital multimeter to check the fuses.<br />

If the fuses are broken, continue with the next step. Otherwise, go to<br />

step 11.<br />

9. Remove the two fuses from the fuseholder.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

12 (38) EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1810A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1729A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1830A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

10. Snap two new T 6.3 A H 440 V<br />

fuses (product number<br />

NGH 324 02/<strong>06</strong>30) onto the<br />

fuseholder.<br />

11. Switch on the AC on/off switch.<br />

12. Depending on the current situation, do one of the following:<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1724A<br />

• If the fault remains <strong>and</strong> the incoming AC power has not been checked,<br />

continue with step 13.<br />

• If the fault remains <strong>and</strong> the incoming AC power has been checked,<br />

follow the instructions in Section 5.7 Replacing the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> on page 24.<br />

• If the fault is cleared, follow the instructions from step 3 in Section 5.8<br />

Performing Concluding Routines on page 31.<br />

13. Use the digital multimeter to check the AC switch to the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> on the<br />

AC mains distribution central (if applicable).<br />

14. Check the fuses on the AC mains distribution central.<br />

15. Go back <strong>and</strong> repeat the search procedure from step 1.<br />

13 (38)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

14 (38) EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

5 HW Replacement<br />

5.1 Preparations<br />

This section describes how to replace HW units for the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong>.<br />

1. If the sunshield is not already<br />

removed, loosen its right side by<br />

pulling it outwards. Loosen the<br />

left side <strong>and</strong> let the sunshield<br />

hang in the safety string.<br />

2. Loosen the 10 torx screws on the<br />

battery cabinet door.<br />

3. Open the battery cabinet door.<br />

5.2 Replacing the Battery<br />

EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

The battery should only be replaced if the CHECK BATTERY alarm has been<br />

activated <strong>and</strong> the following is true:<br />

• The battery cable is properly fitted<br />

• The battery switch is on<br />

P<strong>01</strong>16<strong>01</strong>A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1604A<br />

15 (38)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

1. Loosen the four torx screws on<br />

the battery cover.<br />

Note:<br />

Steps 2 to 6 must be performed<br />

within 2 minutes.<br />

2. Switch off the battery on/off<br />

switch.<br />

3. Disconnect the battery cable,<br />

by pushing to release the cable<br />

locking device.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>1730A<br />

16 (38) EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1809A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1811A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

4. Remove the battery.<br />

5. Insert the new battery, <strong>and</strong> connect the battery cable.<br />

6. Switch on the battery on/off switch.<br />

7. Fasten the battery cover with the four screws.<br />

8. Follow the instructions in Section 5.8 Performing Concluding Routines<br />

on page 31.<br />

5.3 Replacing the Fuses<br />

EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

The fuses should only be replaced if the following is true:<br />

• The AC power to the <strong>EBB</strong>–<strong>01</strong> has been checked<br />

• All indicators on the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> are off<br />

• The DC Power indicator on the <strong>RBS</strong> is off<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1725A<br />

17 (38)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

1. Switch off the AC on/off switch.<br />

2. Remove the fuseholder.<br />

3. Remove the two fuses from the fuseholder.<br />

4. Snap two new T 6.3 A H 440 V<br />

fuses (product number<br />

NGH 324 02/<strong>06</strong>30) onto the<br />

fuseholder.<br />

5. Follow the instructions in Section 5.8 Performing Concluding Routines<br />

on page 31.<br />

5.4 Replacing the DC Backup Cable to the <strong>RBS</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>1810A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1729A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1724A<br />

The DC backup cable to the <strong>RBS</strong> should only be replaced if the following is true:<br />

18 (38) EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

• There is DC power from the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong>, but the <strong>RBS</strong> indicates that the DC<br />

power is off<br />

• The DC switch on the <strong>RBS</strong> is on<br />

Danger!<br />

Electric shock risk. Avoid both direct <strong>and</strong> indirect contact with parts connected<br />

to mains power as this is likely to be fatal. Switch off the mains power before<br />

starting work.<br />

Danger!<br />

Improper electrical installation may cause fire or electric shock that is likely to<br />

be fatal. Only a qualified <strong>and</strong> authorized electrician is permitted to install or<br />

modify electrical installations.<br />

19 (38)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

1. Switch off the AC on/off switch.<br />

2. Switch off the battery on/off<br />

switch.<br />

3. Switch off the AC power to the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

4. Disconnect the DC cable at the <strong>RBS</strong>. See:<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 2109, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0027<br />

EN/LZT 720 0090<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

20 (38) EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1810A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1809A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

5. Disconnect the DC cable at the<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong>.<br />

6. Mounting of the DC cable to the<br />

interface box can be simplified<br />

by loosening the gl<strong>and</strong> plate. Do<br />

this by unscrewing the two torx<br />

screws.<br />

7. Remove the DC cable from the cable gl<strong>and</strong>.<br />

8. Remove the cable insulation <strong>and</strong><br />

strip the conductors from the new<br />

DC cable.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1623A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1644A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1925A<br />

21 (38)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

9. Mount all cable inlet parts.<br />

10. Route the new DC cable into the cable gl<strong>and</strong>.<br />

11. Connect the new DC cable to the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong>.<br />

Note:<br />

The −48 V DC wire is black <strong>and</strong> the −48 V DC_RTN wire is grey.<br />

12. If the gl<strong>and</strong> plate has been loosened, fasten it with the two screws.<br />

13. Tighten the cable gl<strong>and</strong>.<br />

14. Connect the new DC cable to the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

15. Follow the instructions in Section 5.8 Performing Concluding Routines<br />

on page 31.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>1926A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1927A<br />

16. Switch on the <strong>RBS</strong> according to the instructions in chapter Site Installation<br />

Tests in:<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 2109, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0027<br />

EN/LZT 720 0090<br />

22 (38) EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

5.5 Replacing the Alarm Cable<br />

The alarm cable should only be replaced if the following is true:<br />

• All the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> alarms are activated at the <strong>RBS</strong><br />

• Only the Operational indicator on the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> is illuminated<br />

1. Disconnect the alarm cable at the<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong>.<br />

2. Disconnect the alarm cable at the<br />

<strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

3. Connect the new alarm cable to the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> secure it.<br />

4. Connect the new alarm cable to the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

5. Follow the instructions in Section 5.8 Performing Concluding Routines<br />

on page 31.<br />

5.6 Replacing the Sunshield<br />

EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

The sunshield should only be replaced if one of the following is true:<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1619A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1930A<br />

23 (38)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

• It is not intact<br />

• There is mechanical damage<br />

• There is a risk that the sunshield will fall off<br />

1. Loosen the right side of the<br />

sunshield by pulling it outwards,<br />

then loosen the left side.<br />

2. Remove the safety string from the<br />

lower-left side of the wallplate.<br />

3. Take the new sunshield <strong>and</strong> fasten the attached safety string on the<br />

wallplate.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>16<strong>01</strong>A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1640A<br />

4. Hold the sunshield with both h<strong>and</strong>s. Push the left side of the sunshield<br />

towards the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> until it snaps into position on the left side of the<br />

wallplate. Pull the right side of the sunshield outwards <strong>and</strong> then attach it<br />

the same way.<br />

5. Ensure that the sunshield is properly fitted.<br />

5.7 Replacing the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

The <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> should only be replaced if at least one of the following is true:<br />

• The BATTERY BACKUP FAULT alarm is activated<br />

• The Fault indicator on the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> is illuminated<br />

24 (38) EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

• The fuses <strong>and</strong> the AC mains power to the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> has been checked,<br />

but the <strong>EBB</strong>–<strong>01</strong> does not power up<br />

Danger!<br />

Electric shock risk. Avoid both direct <strong>and</strong> indirect contact with parts connected<br />

to mains power as this is likely to be fatal. Switch off the mains power before<br />

starting work.<br />

Danger!<br />

Improper electrical installation may cause fire or electric shock that is likely to<br />

be fatal. Only a qualified <strong>and</strong> authorized electrician is permitted to install or<br />

modify electrical installations.<br />

Note: Protective Earth must be connected to the earth terminal when<br />

connecting power supply.<br />

The protective earth terminal is located in the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong>, indicated by the earth<br />

symbol, see figure below.<br />

Figure 1 Protective Earth<br />

Note: Protective Earth connection is essential.<br />

25 (38)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

1. Switch off the AC on/off switch.<br />

2. Switch off the battery on/off<br />

switch.<br />

3. Disconnect the AC power at the AC mains distribution central.<br />

4. Loosen the gl<strong>and</strong> plate by<br />

unscrewing the two torx screws.<br />

5. Disconnect the AC terminal, <strong>and</strong> remove the protective earth.<br />

6. Disconnect the MINI-LINK terminal (if applicable).<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

26 (38) EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1810A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1809A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1813A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

7. Disconnect the DC backup <strong>RBS</strong><br />

cable.<br />

8. Disconnect the earth cable at the lower-left corner of the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong>.<br />

9. Disconnect the alarm cable.<br />

10. Disconnect the Global Positioning System (GPS) cable (if applicable).<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1819A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1619A<br />

27 (38)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

11. Loosen the two screws in the<br />

lower corners of the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong>.<br />

12. Unhook the upper part of the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> from the wallplate, <strong>and</strong> remove<br />

the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong>.<br />

13. Hook the new <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> onto the<br />

wallplate.<br />

14. Secure the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> with the two screws in the lower corners.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

28 (38) EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1603A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1599A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

15. Loosen the 10 torx screws on the battery cabinet door, <strong>and</strong> then open<br />

the door.<br />

16. Reconnect the site earthing to the<br />

lower-left corner of the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong>.<br />

17. Remove the terminals for AC <strong>and</strong> MINI-LINK.<br />

18. Loosen the gl<strong>and</strong> plate by<br />

unscrewing the two torx screws.<br />

15 Nm<br />

19. Fasten the previously removed gl<strong>and</strong> plate with the two screws.<br />

20. Connect the AC cable to the dedicated terminal.<br />

Note:<br />

Ensure that the protective earth is properly connected.<br />

21. Connect the MINI-LINK cable to the dedicated terminal (if applicable).<br />

22. Connect the DC backup <strong>RBS</strong> cable to the dedicated terminals.<br />

Note:<br />

The −48 V DC wire is black <strong>and</strong> the −48 V DC_RTN wire is grey.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1683A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1644A<br />

29 (38)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

23. Connect the alarm cable <strong>and</strong> secure it.<br />

24. Connect the GPS cable <strong>and</strong> secure it (if applicable).<br />

25. Connect the battery cable.<br />

26. Reconnect the AC power at the AC mains distribution central.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>1622A<br />

27. Switch on the <strong>RBS</strong> according to the instructions in chapter Site Installation<br />

Tests in:<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 2109, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0027<br />

EN/LZT 720 0090<br />

28. Follow the instructions in Section 5.8 Performing Concluding Routines<br />

on page 31.<br />

30 (38) EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

5.8 Performing Concluding Routines<br />

1. Make sure that the battery on/off<br />

switch is on.<br />

2. Make sure that the AC on/off<br />

switch is on.<br />

3.<br />

EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

Check that the indicators are in<br />

the following states:<br />

Fault<br />

Operational<br />

Charging<br />

Check battery<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

ON or OFF<br />

OFF<br />

Fault<br />

Operational<br />

Charging<br />

Check<br />

battery<br />

4. Close the battery cabinet door <strong>and</strong> fasten the 10 torx screws.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1639A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1602A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1616A<br />

31 (38)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

5. Fasten the sunshield’s attached<br />

safety string onto the lower-left<br />

side of the wallplate.<br />

6. Hold the sunshield with both<br />

h<strong>and</strong>s. Push the left side of the<br />

sunshield towards the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

until it snaps into position on the<br />

left side of the wallplate. Pull<br />

the right side of the sunshield<br />

outwards <strong>and</strong> then attach it the<br />

same way.<br />

7. Ensure that the sunshield is properly fitted.<br />

8. Check with the Base Station Controller (BSC) on the Operation <strong>and</strong><br />

Maintenance Terminal (OMT) that no external alarms remain.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>1640A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>16<strong>01</strong>A<br />

9. Check the DC power to the <strong>RBS</strong>. Ensure that the DC power indicator is<br />

illuminated.<br />

10. Check that the DC on/off switch on the <strong>RBS</strong> is on.<br />

32 (38) EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

6 Miscellaneous Equipment<br />

6.1 MINI-LINK Equipment<br />

If the <strong>EBB</strong> power supplies a MINI-LINK <strong>and</strong> the <strong>RBS</strong> indicates transmission<br />

failure, there is a possibility that the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> is faulty.<br />

1. Use a digital multimeter to check the voltage at the MINI-LINK unit.<br />

If the multimeter shows 0 V DC, continue with the next step. Otherwise,<br />

use the applicable MINI-LINK manual to locate the fault.<br />

2. Use the digital multimeter to check the voltage at the MINI-LINK terminals<br />

on the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong>.<br />

6.2 GPS Equipment<br />

EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

If the multimeter shows approximately −48 V DC, replace the MINI-LINK<br />

power cable. Use the same procedure as in Section 5.4 Replacing the<br />

DC Backup Cable to the <strong>RBS</strong> on page 18.<br />

If the multimeter shows 0 V DC, remove the MINI-LINK cable <strong>and</strong> check<br />

both the MINI-LINK cable <strong>and</strong> the MINI-LINK unit for short circuits.<br />

Resolve the fault by taking the appropriate action, as follows:<br />

• If the cable is broken, replace it<br />

• If the MINI-LINK is broken, search it for fault<br />

• Otherwise replace the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

If the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> is connected to a GPS antenna <strong>and</strong> the following is true, there<br />

is a possibility that the GPS equipment is broken:<br />

• The <strong>RBS</strong> alarms SO CF RU:48, SO CF RU:49 <strong>and</strong> GPS RECEIVER are<br />

activated<br />

• The Operational indicator on the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> is illuminated<br />

33 (38)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

1. Disconnect the GPS antenna<br />

cable from the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong>.<br />

2. Disconnect the GPS/AUX cable<br />

from the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

3. Connect the GPS antenna cable to the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>1923A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1930A<br />

4. If the transmission starts, use a digital multimeter to check the GPS/AUX<br />

cable between the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

If the GPS cable is broken, replace it. Otherwise, replace the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

according to the instructions in Section 5.7 Replacing the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> on<br />

page 24.<br />

5. If the transmission does not start, search for fault on the <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>and</strong> the<br />

GPS antenna. See:<br />

GPS Solution Synchronization,<br />

Installation Instructions<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0435<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027<br />

34 (38) EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 2109, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0090<br />

35 (38)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

36 (38) EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

7 Useful Battery-Backup Information<br />

EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A<br />

When replacing the battery, the level of pre-charging defines the time remaining<br />

until full backup can be provided. After the battery has been replaced it takes<br />

up to 24 hours to achieve full backup capacity.<br />

If the battery has performed a backup, it can take some time before it is cool<br />

enough to start charging.<br />

If the battery has performed a full backup (that is, the battery is empty) it takes<br />

approximately 30 minutes of charging before the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> can provide backup<br />

power.<br />

In very warm environments, the heat can prohibit the battery from charging.<br />

37 (38)


External Battery Backup <strong>01</strong><br />

Ericsson AB<br />

SE-164 80 Stockholm<br />

Sweden<br />

asq.us@ericsson.com<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong><br />

No part of this document may be reproduced in any form without<br />

the written permission of the copyright owner.<br />

The contents of this document are subject to revision without<br />

notice due to continued progress in methodology, design <strong>and</strong><br />

manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any error or<br />

damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.<br />

© Ericsson AB 2005 — All Rights Reserved<br />

38 (38) EN/LZT 720 0463 Uen R2A


E 1<br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Installation Instructions<br />

This document describes the procedure for installing the External Battery<br />

Backup <strong>06</strong> (<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong>) for the <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>and</strong> <strong>RBS</strong> 2109.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2300A<br />

(48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Contents<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

1 Introduction 3<br />

1.1 Target Group 3<br />

1.2 Revision History 3<br />

2 Preconditions 3<br />

2.1 Health <strong>and</strong> Safety Information 4<br />

2.2 Preparations 4<br />

2.3 Documents 5<br />

2.4 Tools 6<br />

2.5 Torque Settings 6<br />

2.6 Space Requirements 6<br />

3 Installation Procedure 7<br />

3.1 Unpacking 8<br />

3.2 Installing the Wall Bracket 10<br />

3.3 Installing the MBU-02 14<br />

3.4 Connecting the External Cables 19<br />

3.5 Installing the Battery Cabinet 30<br />

3.6 Mounting the Sunshields 41<br />

3.7 Starting Up the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> 44<br />

3.8 Concluding Routines 46<br />

2 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

1 Introduction<br />

1.1 Target Group<br />

This document describes how to mount <strong>and</strong> install the External Battery Backup<br />

<strong>06</strong> (<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong>).<br />

The target group for these instructions is <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> installation personnel.<br />

1.1.1 Qualifications for Installation Personnel<br />

Ericsson recommends that personnel performing the installation procedure<br />

possess the following:<br />

• Technical college, or equivalent education, with emphasis on electrical<br />

engineering<br />

• Familiarity with the equipment used during installation<br />

• An underst<strong>and</strong>ing of technical English<br />

1.2 Revision History<br />

1.2.1 R1A to R2A<br />

1.2.2 R1A<br />

Except for editorial changes, such as the correction of spelling, grammar, <strong>and</strong><br />

layout, this manual has been revised as follows:<br />

• Updated the references to the User’s <strong>Guide</strong>s<br />

• Updated the concluding routines<br />

This is the first issue of this document.<br />

2 Preconditions<br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

This section provides information to be read, <strong>and</strong> conditions to be met, before<br />

starting the installation procedure.<br />

3 (48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

2.1 Health <strong>and</strong> Safety Information<br />

2.2 Preparations<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

Personnel should exercise care when working on or around electrical<br />

equipment. In addition to this safety information, the specific safety instructions<br />

for all products involved in the installation procedure must be adhered to.<br />

Caution!<br />

Improper h<strong>and</strong>ling of batteries can result in the batteries short-circuiting, which<br />

can result in serious injury due to high energy levels. Exercise the necessary<br />

care when working with batteries.<br />

Before starting the installation, see Chapters System Safety Information <strong>and</strong><br />

Personal Health <strong>and</strong> Safety Information in:<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 2109, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Ensure that the following conditions are met:<br />

• Site access permission received<br />

EN/LZT 720 0027<br />

EN/LZT 720 0090<br />

• Ordered <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong>, equipment, specified tools, <strong>and</strong> other necessary facilities<br />

have been delivered<br />

• Electrical ducting is ready <strong>and</strong> AC mains power is available<br />

• When the cabinet is mounted outdoors, or if the ambient temperature<br />

changes between hot <strong>and</strong> cold, it must not be left without power for more<br />

than 48 hours due to the risk of condensation<br />

• Earth terminal is available<br />

• During bad weather conditions it may be necessary to protect the cabinet<br />

during installation<br />

• Always use an approved ESD wrist strap to avoid damage to components<br />

mounted on printed board assemblies<br />

4 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

2.3 Documents<br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

Figure 1 Connecting the ESD Wrist Strap<br />

Preparations for Wall-Mounted <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

These conditions are in addition to those described above.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2465A<br />

• Ensure that the selected wall bolt is suitable for the type of wall material on<br />

which the cabinet is to be mounted<br />

• Ensure that the wall surface is even<br />

Preparations for Pole-Mounted <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

These conditions are in addition to those described above.<br />

• The pole must have the required dimensions (60 – 114 mm in diameter)<br />

Ensure that the following documents are available:<br />

• Completed <strong>and</strong> approved record prepared during site preparation<br />

• Site installation documentation prepared by Installation Engineering<br />

personnel<br />

St<strong>and</strong>ard Site Material<br />

Installation Instructions<br />

EN/LZT 720 0<strong>01</strong>4<br />

5 (48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

2.4 Tools<br />

The following tools are required:<br />

• Tool set with hammer drill<br />

• Personal Tool Kit, LTT 6<strong>01</strong> 135/1<br />

2.5 Torque Settings<br />

The recommended torque wrench settings are listed in the table below.<br />

Table 1 Recommended Torque Values<br />

Dimension<br />

Torque<br />

Ncm Nm lbf-in lbf-ft<br />

M3 110 +/- 7 – 9.7 +/- 0.6 – –<br />

Notes<br />

M3 80 +/- 7 – 7.1 +/- 0.6 – Reduced torque for plastic<br />

covers<br />

M4 260 +/- 15 – 23.1 +/- 1.3 – –<br />

M4 170 +/- 15 – 15.1 +/- 1.3 – Reduced torque for captive<br />

screws<br />

M5 540 +/- 30 – 47.8 +/- 2.6 – Torque for battery poles<br />

M6 – 8.8 +/- 0.5 – 6.5 +/- 0.4 –<br />

M8 – 21 +/- 1.3 – 15.5 +/- 1 –<br />

M10 – 41 +/- 2.5 – 30.2 +/- 1.8 –<br />

2.6 Space Requirements<br />

The <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> has a minimum space requirement to provide sufficient working<br />

area.<br />

Note: Space for future site expansion must be considered when installing<br />

an <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> unit.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

6 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

1000<br />

2850<br />

990<br />

<strong>RBS</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong><br />

290<br />

575<br />

640<br />

715<br />

Minimum space requriements. Units of measurement: mm<br />

Figure 2 Space Requirements<br />

2070<br />

<strong>EBB</strong><br />

640<br />

Optional<br />

placement<br />

<strong>EBB</strong><br />

77<br />

275<br />

250<br />

59 229 137<br />

The DC cable is 2.5 m / 5 m in length, depending upon the configuration.<br />

Consequently, the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> cannot be placed more than 2 m or 4 m from the<br />

<strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

The limit for the total cable length between the <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>and</strong> the last <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

in the chain is 10 m.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2435A<br />

Note: Before installation, ensure that the cabinets are not positioned too far<br />

apart for the cable length.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong><br />

<strong>RBS</strong><br />

4 m 4 m<br />

<strong>EBB</strong> <strong>EBB</strong><br />

5 m 5 m<br />

4 m 2 m 2 m<br />

<strong>EBB</strong> <strong>EBB</strong> <strong>EBB</strong><br />

5 m 2,5 m 2,5 m<br />

Figure 3 Maximum Distance Between Cabinets<br />

3 Installation Procedure<br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

This section provides instructions for how to install the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong>.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2464A<br />

7 (48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

3.1 Unpacking<br />

Figure 4 Work Process for Installation of <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

Caution!<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

Stop! This product contains components sensitive to ESD. Use an approved<br />

ESD wrist strap, connected to the product grounding point, to avoid damaging<br />

these components.<br />

To avoid damage to components due to electrostatic discharge during<br />

unpacking, avoid contact with the connectors on the battery cabinet.<br />

1. Unpack the equipment <strong>and</strong> check that the correct items have been<br />

delivered. If any equipment is damaged, then make an immediate<br />

complaint to the supervisor or transport company.<br />

8 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

Figure 5 Unpacking the St<strong>and</strong>ard Equipment<br />

DC cable<br />

Batteries<br />

Fixture<br />

Figure 6 Unpacking the Optional Equipment<br />

P004231B<br />

9 (48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

3.2 Installing the Wall Bracket<br />

This section describes how to install the wall bracket, which is used as a<br />

complement to the mounting interface of the wallplate.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

Note: If the installation site is elevated <strong>and</strong> work cannot be carried out without<br />

aid, a skylift or scaffold must be used.<br />

Figure 7 Mounting the Wall Bracket<br />

3.2.1 Installing the Wall Bracket on a Wall (Alternative)<br />

35_0331B<br />

1. Place the wall bracket drilling template in the position where the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

is to be situated.<br />

Figure 8 Marking the Holes<br />

UP<br />

DRILL TEMPLATE FOR WALL BRACKET<br />

10 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

- <strong>RBS</strong> 2302<br />

- <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong><br />

- PBC <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong><br />

Recomended holes<br />

For Wall Bracket<br />

Alternate holes<br />

For Wall Bracket<br />

Only for <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong><br />

mounted without Wall Bracket<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2493A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

2. Use a spirit level to check that the drilling template is horizontal.<br />

3. Use a pen to mark the required hole positions.<br />

4. Remove the template, <strong>and</strong> drill the holes for the fasteners best suited to<br />

the wall material.<br />

Note: The wall bracket must not be used as a drilling template in order to<br />

avoid damaging the rust protection surface.<br />

5. Mount the wall bracket <strong>and</strong> secure it in position, using all the screws<br />

provided.<br />

Figure 9 Wall Bracket<br />

UP<br />

35_0331C<br />

6. Loosen the four nuts on which the Mounting Base Unit 02 (MBU-02) is to<br />

be hung, until only a few threads remain in the nut.<br />

3.2.2 Installing the Wall Bracket on a Pole (Alternative)<br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

The wall bracket can be mounted on a horizontal or a vertical pole by using<br />

different holes.<br />

11 (48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 10 Wall Bracket on a Horizontal or a Vertical Pole<br />

1. Choose the appropriate holes. See Figure below.<br />

A<br />

Figure 11 Holes Used for Horizontal or Vertical Poles<br />

A Holes used for vertical poles<br />

B Holes used for horizontal poles<br />

2. Ensure that the washers are mounted correctly. See figure below.<br />

B<br />

B<br />

UP<br />

A<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

12 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

P003699A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1589B


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

Figure 12 Fastening Mast-Mounting Fixtures to the Wall Bracket<br />

UP<br />

Recess<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>71A<br />

3. Fasten the two clamps with the screws <strong>and</strong> washers. For the correct torque<br />

setting, see Table 1 on page 6.<br />

Note: Ensure that the recess is attached in the correct position.<br />

Recess<br />

Figure 13 Fitting the Wall Bracket on the Pole<br />

4. Position the wall bracket at the correct height on the pole <strong>and</strong> mount the<br />

clamps.<br />

5. Ensure that the washers are mounted correctly. See figure above.<br />

P<strong>01</strong><strong>01</strong>70B<br />

13 (48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

6. Mount the screws <strong>and</strong> tighten them, alternating between the left <strong>and</strong> right<br />

sides to avoid bending the screws. For the correct torque setting, see<br />

Table 1 on page 6.<br />

7. Loosen the four nuts on which the MBU-02 is to be hung, leaving a few<br />

threads protruding.<br />

3.3 Installing the MBU-02<br />

1. Mount the Mounting Base Unit 02 (MBU-02) on the four screws on the<br />

wall bracket. Ensure that the fastening screws are properly fitted in the<br />

key holes.<br />

Figure 14 Mounting the MBU-02 on the Wall Bracket<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2470A<br />

2. Use a spirit level to check that the MBU-02 is vertical. If it is vertical, then<br />

go to step 5, otherwise proceed to the next step.<br />

3. Remove the MBU-02 from the wall bracket.<br />

Do not loosen the inner nuts. The lock nuts secure the bolts in the wall<br />

bracket.<br />

14 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Locking Nut<br />

Fastening screws<br />

Figure 15 Adjusting the Distance Nuts<br />

Distance Nut<br />

Inner Nut<br />

Fastening<br />

screws<br />

Locking Nut<br />

Distance Nut<br />

Inner Nut<br />

4. Adjust the vertical inclination using the four distance nuts, then return to<br />

step 1.<br />

P003484A<br />

5. Tighten the four lock nuts. For the correct torque setting, see Table 1 on<br />

page 6.<br />

3.3.1 Mounting the Installation Box Door<br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

Figure 16 Mounting the Installation Box Door<br />

P005103A<br />

15 (48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

1. Hook the lower left-h<strong>and</strong> corner of the door on to the installation box.<br />

2. Press down the spring locking pin on the upper right-h<strong>and</strong> corner of the<br />

installation box.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

3. Insert the installation box door by pushing the upper left-h<strong>and</strong> corner of the<br />

door into position. Ensure that the spring locking pin snaps into position.<br />

4. Connect the earth cable to the installation box door by screwing the torx<br />

screw into position.<br />

Figure 17 Connecting the Earth Cable<br />

3.3.2 Fitting the Fuses<br />

P005104B<br />

1. Remove the protection cover by unscrewing the two torx screws <strong>and</strong> allow<br />

the cover to hang by the earth wire.<br />

16 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

Figure 18 Removing the Protection Cover<br />

2. Fit the recommended fuses, according to the table below.<br />

Table 2 Recommended Fuses<br />

Voltage Fuses Data Dimension<br />

100 – 127 V AC Ceramic Slow Blow 8 A T, 250 V (1)<br />

200 – 250 V AC Ceramic Slow Blow 4 A T, 250 V (1)<br />

(1) Fuse rating according to st<strong>and</strong>ard EN 6<strong>01</strong>27.<br />

6.3 x 32 mm<br />

5 x 20 mm<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2468A<br />

17 (48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 19 Fitting the Fuses<br />

3. Put back the protection cover.<br />

230V<br />

115V<br />

Note: Ensure that the lens for the optical indicators is not damaged.<br />

3.3.3 Connecting Earth <strong>and</strong> Lightning Protection<br />

Earth<br />

Figure 20 Connecting Earth <strong>and</strong> Lightning Protection<br />

Protect the equipment from lightning as follows:<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

18 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

P004136B<br />

P003168A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

1. Route the earth cable through the cable inlet down right at the bottom<br />

of the rear sunshield.<br />

2. Connect the earth cable on the MBU-02, using the earthing kit. See:<br />

St<strong>and</strong>ard Site Material<br />

Installation Instructions<br />

EN/LZT 720 0<strong>01</strong>4<br />

3. Connect the other end of the earth cable to the existing lightning protection<br />

system close to the equipment.<br />

Note: If there is no lightning protection system, then connect the earth<br />

cable to the earth collection bar. See:<br />

St<strong>and</strong>ard Site Material<br />

Installation Instructions<br />

3.4 Connecting the External Cables<br />

This section describes the connections to the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong>.<br />

3.4.1 Opening the Interface Box<br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

EN/LZT 720 0<strong>01</strong>4<br />

Before the connection procedure can begin, the interface box must be opened.<br />

1. Loosen the screws securing the interface box on the MBU-02 <strong>and</strong> pull<br />

down the interface box.<br />

19 (48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 21 Pulling Down the Interface Box<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>2469A<br />

2. Unscrew the nine torx screws on the interface box cover. Allow the cover<br />

to hang by the strap.<br />

20 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 22 Opening the Interface Box<br />

3.4.2 Connecting AC Mains<br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

This section describes how to connect the AC mains cable.<br />

Danger!<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2467A<br />

Electric shock risk. Avoid both direct <strong>and</strong> indirect contact with parts connected<br />

to mains power as this is likely to be fatal. Switch off the mains power before<br />

starting work.<br />

Danger!<br />

Improper electrical installation may cause fire or electric shock that is likely to<br />

be fatal. Only a qualified <strong>and</strong> authorized electrician is permitted to install or<br />

modify electrical installations.<br />

21 (48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Protective Earth<br />

A reliable incoming Protective Earth (PE) must be connected to the earth<br />

terminal when connecting power supply.<br />

The earth terminal is located in the interface box, indicated by PE <strong>and</strong> the<br />

earth symbol.<br />

Figure 23 Protective Earth<br />

Note: A Protective Earth connection is essential.<br />

Connecting AC<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

The gl<strong>and</strong> plate for the AC cable can not be loosened from the interface box, so<br />

the AC cable must be connected during installation.<br />

Follow the procedure below to connect the AC mains power cable.<br />

Note: Ensure the AC mains is switched off before beginning the AC<br />

installation procedure.<br />

1. Route the AC mains cable to the interface box, leaving enough cable to<br />

allow the interface box to be pulled back up into the battery cabinet.<br />

If a flexible conduit is to be used, replace the AC mains cable inlet (feed<br />

through) with the flexible conduit <strong>and</strong> its fastening device.<br />

22 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

Figure 24 Example of Use of Flexible Conduit<br />

2. Cut the cable to the appropriate length.<br />

Note: Remember that extra cable is required to allow the interface box to<br />

be mounted back on the MBU-02.<br />

Figure 25 Dismantling <strong>and</strong> Mounting the Cable Inlet<br />

3. Prepare the cable end.<br />

4. Adjust the sealing grommet to the cable diameter.<br />

23 (48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

5. Mount all cable inlet components, see figure above.<br />

6. Route the cable into the inlet <strong>and</strong> tighten the cable gl<strong>and</strong>.<br />

Figure 26 Connecting the AC Mains <strong>and</strong> Protective Earth<br />

7. Connect the AC mains cable.<br />

8. Ensure that the PE is properly connected.<br />

3.4.3 Routing the DC Power <strong>and</strong> External Alarm Cables<br />

Loosening the cable gl<strong>and</strong> plate simplifies the fitting of cables.<br />

The following cables, if used, are to be routed through the cable gl<strong>and</strong> plate<br />

before it is put back:<br />

• <strong>RBS</strong> 1<br />

• <strong>RBS</strong> 2<br />

• <strong>RBS</strong> 3<br />

• AUX EQUIP<br />

• Outgoing external alarm<br />

• Incoming external alarm<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

24 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

Note: Ericsson recommends that, whenever possible, cable inlets <strong>and</strong><br />

terminal blocks are fitted <strong>and</strong> terminated at ground level. This should<br />

be done before the cabinet is raised to an inaccessible height.<br />

Routing Cables to <strong>RBS</strong><br />

1. Loosen the cable gl<strong>and</strong> plate by unscrewing the two torx screws.<br />

Figure 27 Loosening the Gl<strong>and</strong> Plate<br />

2. Cut the applicable cables to the appropriate length.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2439A<br />

Note: Remember that extra cable is required to allow the interface box to<br />

be mounted back on the MBU-02.<br />

3. Route the cables to the <strong>RBS</strong>, leaving enough cable to allow the interface<br />

box to be pulled back up into the battery cabinet.<br />

Routing Cables through Cable Gl<strong>and</strong> Plate<br />

The following procedure is to be repeated for each cable:<br />

25 (48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 28 Assembling the Cable Gl<strong>and</strong><br />

1. Prepare the cable end.<br />

2. Remove the sleeve <strong>and</strong> plug from the cable gl<strong>and</strong>. Discard the plug.<br />

3. Fit the sleeve over the cable, <strong>and</strong> route the cable into the cable gl<strong>and</strong>.<br />

4. Adjust the cable length, <strong>and</strong> tighten the sleeve.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>2489A<br />

5. Go back to step 1 <strong>and</strong> repeat the procedure for the next cable, if applicable.<br />

6. Put back the cable gl<strong>and</strong> plate <strong>and</strong> secure it with the two screws.<br />

3.4.4 Connecting the DC Backup Power to <strong>RBS</strong><br />

This section describes the procedure for connecting the −48 V DC backup<br />

power supply to the <strong>RBS</strong>.<br />

Note: Ensure that both the AC <strong>and</strong> the battery switches are in the OFF<br />

position before working with the output power connections.<br />

1. Insert the cable wires into the dedicated terminal, <strong>and</strong> secure it.<br />

26 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 29 Connecting the −48 V DC Backup Power Supply<br />

2. Repeat step 1 for <strong>RBS</strong> 2 <strong>and</strong> <strong>RBS</strong> 3, if applicable.<br />

3.4.5 Connecting the −48 V DC to MINI-LINK Equipment (Optional)<br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

This section describes the procedure for connecting power to the optional radio<br />

link equipment. The <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> can supply −48 V DC to the optional radio link.<br />

Note: Ensure that both the AC <strong>and</strong> the battery switches are in the OFF<br />

position before working with the output power connections.<br />

1. Loosen the termination block.<br />

Figure 30 Loosening the Termination Block<br />

2. Insert the cables for outgoing <strong>and</strong> incoming external alarms.<br />

27 (48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 31 Connecting the −48 V DC Cable to MINI-LINK Equipment<br />

3.4.6 Connecting the Alarm Cables<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

The external alarm output from the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> is either connected directly to the<br />

<strong>RBS</strong>, or indirectly through an <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong>.<br />

The external alarm input is connected to the next <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> in the chain.<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 32 External Alarms for Two <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> Connected to One <strong>RBS</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>2436A<br />

1. Loosen the termination block. Use the same procedure as shown in Figure<br />

30 on page 27.<br />

2. Insert the cables for the outgoing external alarm.<br />

Note: For the last <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> in the chain, the jumper must remain in the two<br />

positions for the incoming alarm.<br />

28 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 33 Connecting the Alarm Cable from <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> 1<br />

3. If a second <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> is to be connected, then insert the incoming alarm<br />

cable from <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> 2.<br />

4. Refit the termination block.<br />

3.4.7 Closing the Interface Box<br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

1. Put back the interface box cover by screwing the nine torx screws back<br />

into position.<br />

2. Push the interface box upwards. Ensure that the AC cable from the<br />

installation box is not trapped between the interface box <strong>and</strong> the MBU-02.<br />

3. Tighten the two torx screws situated on the MBU-02.<br />

29 (48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 34 Closing the Interface Box<br />

3.5 Installing the Battery Cabinet<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>2467A<br />

To facilitate mounting, a lifting device can be used. Refer to the <strong>RBS</strong> Installation<br />

Instructions for details.<br />

Note: The lifting device is not dimensioned for lifting the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> with<br />

batteries fitted.<br />

1. If the lifting h<strong>and</strong>le (optional) is to be used, mount it on the battery cabinet.<br />

Figure 35 Mounting the Lifting H<strong>and</strong>le<br />

30 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

P003192A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

2. Lift the battery cabinet on to the MBU-02.<br />

Figure 36 Mounting the Battery Cabinet<br />

P003171A<br />

3. Align the left side of the battery cabinet with the MBU-02. Hold the battery<br />

cabinet a few centimeters above the MBU-02. Ensure that the hooks are<br />

positioned according to the figure below.<br />

Hook on the battery cabinet by pushing it against the MBU-02 <strong>and</strong> lowering<br />

it on to the hooks.<br />

30-40mm<br />

Align<br />

Figure 37 Mounting the Battery Cabinet on the MBU-02<br />

4. Ensure that the battery cabinet is properly mounted by checking the<br />

following:<br />

P003193A<br />

31 (48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

• The mounting screws in the installation box are aligned with the holes<br />

in the cabinet<br />

• The AC cable from the installation box is not trapped between the<br />

battery cabinet <strong>and</strong> the MBU-02<br />

5. Secure the locking cleats behind the cabinet by turning the torx screws<br />

clockwise, as far as possible.<br />

Secure<br />

(x2)<br />

Figure 38 Securing the Battery Cabinet<br />

6. Remove the lifting h<strong>and</strong>le, if it has been used.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

P003482B<br />

7. Fasten the installation box by turning each of the six torx screws until they<br />

engage the threads. When all screws have engaged their threads, tighten<br />

them.<br />

32 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 39 Fastening the Installation Box<br />

3.5.1 Connecting Internal Cables<br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

1. Ensure that the AC power <strong>and</strong> battery switches are in the OFF position.<br />

Operational Fault<br />

Up<br />

Down<br />

BATTERY<br />

Figure 40 Position of the AC Power <strong>and</strong> Battery Switches<br />

2. Connect the internal cables in the following order:<br />

• AC power cable<br />

• Display cable<br />

• DC/Alarm cable<br />

D1 D2 D3<br />

I<br />

O<br />

P003173A<br />

AC<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2437A<br />

33 (48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 41 Connecting Internal Cables<br />

3.5.2 Installing the Batteries<br />

DC/Alarm cable<br />

connectors<br />

Display<br />

cable connector<br />

AC power<br />

cable connector<br />

The batteries must be installed for the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> to be fully functional.<br />

The figure below shows the battery installation order.<br />

WARNING<br />

CONNECT THIS CABLE LAST<br />

1 LOAD<br />

2 LINE<br />

WARNING<br />

CONNECT THIS CABLE LAST<br />

2 4<br />

1 3<br />

1 LOAD<br />

2 LINE<br />

Figure 42 Battery Installation Order<br />

2<br />

1<br />

4<br />

3<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

34 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2492A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2495A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

When connecting the cables, it is important that the cable lugs are properly<br />

fitted. If fitted incorrectly, then the lugs can break.<br />

Figure 43 Connecting Cable Lugs to Batteries<br />

Caution!<br />

Improper h<strong>and</strong>ling of batteries can result in the batteries short-circuiting, which<br />

can result in serious injury due to high energy levels. Exercise the necessary<br />

care when working with batteries.<br />

1. Unscrew the 18 torx screws. Ensure that the screws are disengaged, then<br />

open the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> door.<br />

35 (48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 44 Opening the Battery Compartment<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

P003273A<br />

2. Ensure that the automatic circuit breaker is in the OFF position, according<br />

to the label. See Figure below.<br />

Figure 45 Automatic Circuit Breaker in OFF Position<br />

OFF<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2497A<br />

3. On all batteries, remove the precut tape covering the inlet to the ventilation<br />

hose.<br />

4. Place the first battery in compartment 1, then connect the cable leading<br />

from the battery switch panel to the positive (+) pole.<br />

Note: Ensure that the cable lugs are properly terminated.<br />

36 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

Figure 46 Installing Battery 1<br />

Note: Remember to fit the protective caps over the battery poles after each<br />

connection.<br />

5. Place the second battery in compartment 2, then connect the battery<br />

jumper cable between battery 1 <strong>and</strong> battery 2.<br />

Figure 47 Connecting the First <strong>and</strong> Second Batteries<br />

6. Connect the ventilation hose to batteries 1 <strong>and</strong> 2, <strong>and</strong> route it to the<br />

ventilation outlet, down the left side, at the bottom of the battery cabinet.<br />

37 (48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 48 Connecting the Ventilation Hose to Batteries 1 <strong>and</strong> 2<br />

7. Place the third battery in compartment 3, <strong>and</strong> the fourth battery in<br />

compartment 4. Then connect the battery jumper cable between battery<br />

3 <strong>and</strong> 4.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

Note: Do not connect the battery jumper cable between batteries 2 <strong>and</strong> 4.<br />

Figure 49 Connecting the Jumper Cable Between Batteries 3 <strong>and</strong> 4<br />

8. Connect the ventilation hose to batteries 3 <strong>and</strong> 4.<br />

38 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2500A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

Figure 50 Connecting the Ventilation Hose to Batteries 3 <strong>and</strong> 4<br />

9. Connect the negative (−) pole of battery 3.<br />

Figure 51 Connecting the Negative (-) Pole of Battery 3<br />

10. Connect the battery jumper cable from battery 2 to battery 4.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2509A<br />

39 (48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 52 Connecting Jumper Cable Between Batteries 2 <strong>and</strong> 4<br />

11. Ensure the following conditions are met:<br />

• All cables <strong>and</strong> hoses are in the correct positions, allowing the door<br />

to be closed<br />

• All protective caps are fitted over the battery poles<br />

• The ventilation hoses are not blocked<br />

Figure 53 Battery Cabinet with All Four Batteries<br />

12. Set the automatic circuit breaker in the ON position.<br />

13. Close the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> door <strong>and</strong> screw the 18 torx screws back into position.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

40 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2508A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>25<strong>01</strong>A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

3.6 Mounting the Sunshields<br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

The figure below shows the order in which the sunshields must be fitted.<br />

Figure 54 Sunshields<br />

41 (48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

3.6.1 Mounting the Upper Sunshield<br />

Figure 55 Mounting the Upper Sunshield<br />

1. Hook on the upper sunshield on the left side, then push it down until it<br />

snaps into position.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

P003199C<br />

2. Seal the two holes, intended for the h<strong>and</strong>le, with the supplied screw plugs.<br />

Note: The plugs are to be screwed, not pressed.<br />

3.6.2 Mounting the Left Sunshield<br />

Figure 56 Mounting the Left Sunshield<br />

1. Tilt the sunshield to the right <strong>and</strong> hook it on the battery cabinet.<br />

42 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

P003812A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

2. Push the sunshield forward so that it sits clear of the hinges.<br />

3. Push on the lower-left part of the sunshield until it snaps into position.<br />

3.6.3 Mounting the Lower Sunshield<br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

Note: The lower sunshield can only be fitted if the left sunshield is already<br />

fitted.<br />

1. Hook the lower sunshield on the left side of the battery cabinet, <strong>and</strong> push it<br />

up until it snaps into position. The fasteners are situated in the middle of<br />

the battery cabinet.<br />

Figure 57 Mounting the Lower Sunshield<br />

P0032<strong>01</strong>B<br />

43 (48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

3.6.4 Mounting the Front Sunshield<br />

Figure 58 Mounting the Front Sunshield<br />

1. Mount the short hinge-pin on the left side of the battery cabinet, <strong>and</strong> the<br />

long hinge-pin on the right side.<br />

2. Hook the front sunshield on the hinges <strong>and</strong> fold down the cover.<br />

3. Press on the lower left-h<strong>and</strong> corner so that the spring locking pin snaps<br />

into position.<br />

3.7 Starting Up the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

1. Switch on the following switches in the listed order:<br />

• AC mains power switch<br />

• AC switch<br />

• Battery switch<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

44 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

P003203A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

AC Mains<br />

Power switch<br />

1<br />

0<br />

BATTERY<br />

Figure 59 Switches for AC Mains Power, AC, <strong>and</strong> Battery<br />

Fault<br />

AC<br />

AC switch<br />

Battery switch<br />

2. Check that the indicators <strong>and</strong> the numerical fault code are according to<br />

the figure below. If not, then see:<br />

External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong>,<br />

Maintenance Instructions<br />

OPERATIONAL FAULT<br />

D1 D2 D3<br />

P004197A<br />

Figure 60 Fully Charged Batteries<br />

EN/LZT 720 0476<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2438A<br />

Note: The display enters power saving mode if no fault occurs or no button<br />

is pressed within three minutes. Reactivate the display by pressing<br />

any button.<br />

3. Secure the upper <strong>and</strong> lower sunshields by closing the installation box door.<br />

4. Lock the installation box door, using a key, <strong>and</strong> fasten the screws.<br />

45 (48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 61 Closing the Installation Box Door<br />

3.8 Concluding Routines<br />

Before leaving the site, ensure the following:<br />

Table 3 Checklist<br />

Check that: OK<br />

1 The following switches are in the ON position:<br />

• AC to <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

• AC in the installation box<br />

• Battery in the installation box<br />

• Automatic circuit breaker inside <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

2 All cables are connected<br />

3 The <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> has no alarms<br />

4 The <strong>RBS</strong> has no alarms<br />

5 All power output connections have the correct output power<br />

6 The <strong>RBS</strong> connected to the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> indicates that it has DC<br />

or battery voltage<br />

7 The “Operational” LED is on<br />

8 The sunshields are attached<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

46 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

P003166A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A<br />

Note: The <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> must be powered up within 48 hours of the installation,<br />

because if the battery cabinet is left without power there is a risk of<br />

humidity damage to the components in the battery cabinet, if ambient<br />

temperature changes between hot <strong>and</strong> cold.<br />

47 (48)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Ericsson AB<br />

SE-164 80 Stockholm<br />

Sweden<br />

asq.us@ericsson.com<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

No part of this document may be reproduced in any form without<br />

the written permission of the copyright owner.<br />

The contents of this document are subject to revision without<br />

notice due to continued progress in methodology, design <strong>and</strong><br />

manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any error or<br />

damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.<br />

© Ericsson AB 2005 — All Rights Reserved<br />

48 (48) EN/LZT 720 0475 Uen R2A


E 1<br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Maintenance Instructions<br />

This document describes the maintenance procedure for External Battery<br />

Backup <strong>06</strong> (<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong>).<br />

P<strong>01</strong>1872A<br />

(65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Contents<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

1 Introduction 3<br />

1.1 Target Group 3<br />

1.2 Revision History 3<br />

2 Preconditions 5<br />

2.1 Health <strong>and</strong> Safety Information 5<br />

2.2 Tools 6<br />

3 Fault Identification 9<br />

3.1 Control Panel 9<br />

3.2 Alarm Connected to the <strong>RBS</strong> 10<br />

3.3 Cable Connections Overview 11<br />

4 Fault Localisation 13<br />

4.1 Optical Indicators 13<br />

4.2 Fault Code List 15<br />

4.3 Fault Tracing Hints 21<br />

5 HW Replacement 25<br />

5.1 Shutting Down the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> 25<br />

5.2 Replacing the AC-Surge Board 26<br />

5.3 Replacing the Batteries 29<br />

5.4 Replacing the Battery Cabinet 35<br />

5.5 Replacing the Cables 40<br />

5.6 Replacing the DCC Board 42<br />

5.7 Replacing the EMC-IN Board 45<br />

5.8 Replacing the Incoming AC Mains Fuses 47<br />

5.9 Replacing the AUX EQUIP −48 V DC Fuse 49<br />

5.10 Replacing the MBU-02 52<br />

5.11 Replacing the Sunshields 57<br />

5.12 Starting Up the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> 60<br />

6 Preventive Maintenance for the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> 63<br />

6.1 Sunshields 63<br />

6.2 Cooling Flanges 63<br />

6.3 Batteries 63<br />

7 Performing Concluding Routines 65<br />

2 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

1 Introduction<br />

1.1 Target Group<br />

This document describes the maintenance procedure for External Battery<br />

Backup <strong>06</strong> (<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong>).<br />

The target group for this document is maintenance personnel. To perform<br />

maintenance work in a safe <strong>and</strong> professional way, the work must be done by<br />

skilled personnel.<br />

The following are minimum requirements:<br />

• Good underst<strong>and</strong>ing of radio <strong>and</strong> telephone engineering<br />

• Good underst<strong>and</strong>ing of engineering English<br />

1.2 Revision History<br />

1.2.1 R1A to R2A<br />

1.2.2 R1A<br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

Except for editorial changes, such as the correction of spelling, grammar, <strong>and</strong><br />

layout, this manual has been revised as follows:<br />

• Updated the references to the User’s <strong>Guide</strong>s<br />

• Updated the references to the Spare Parts Catalogue<br />

• Updated the instructions for Temp Sensor Fault<br />

• Updated the instructions for Low Battery Voltage<br />

This is the first issue of this document.<br />

3 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

4 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

2 Preconditions<br />

This section describes the preconditions that apply to the maintenance<br />

procedures, including safety <strong>and</strong> tools.<br />

2.1 Health <strong>and</strong> Safety Information<br />

Personnel must exercise care when working on or around electrical equipment.<br />

In addition to this safety information, the specific safety instructions for all<br />

products involved in the installation procedure must be adhered to.<br />

Caution!<br />

Improper h<strong>and</strong>ling of batteries can result in the batteries short-circuiting, which<br />

can result in serious injury due to high energy levels. Exercise the necessary<br />

care when working with batteries.<br />

Before starting the installation, see Chapters System Safety Information <strong>and</strong><br />

Personal Health <strong>and</strong> Safety Information in the relevant document:<br />

2.1.1 Electrostatic Discharge<br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 2109, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0027<br />

EN/LZT 720 0090<br />

To avoid damage to components mounted on printed board assemblies, always<br />

use an approved antistatic wrist strap.<br />

There are two ESD connection points on the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong>:<br />

• One in the interface box<br />

• One in the installation box, behind the installation box door<br />

5 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

2.2 Tools<br />

Figure 1 Connection Points for the ESD Wrist Strap<br />

The following tool set is required:<br />

• Maintenance Tool Set, LTT 6<strong>01</strong> 137/1<br />

Torque Settings<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>2465A<br />

When replacing units, tighten screws <strong>and</strong> nuts according to the table below. For<br />

captive screws, battery poles, <strong>and</strong> plastic covers inside installation boxes <strong>and</strong><br />

interface boxes, the screws must be tightened with a reduced torque.<br />

Table 1 Recommended Torque Values<br />

Dimension Torque<br />

Ncm Nm lbf-in lbf-ft<br />

M3 110 +/− 7 – 9.7 +/− 0.6 – –<br />

Notes<br />

M3 80 +/− 7 – 7.1 +/− 0.6 – Reduced torque for<br />

plastic covers<br />

M4 260+/− 15 – 23.1 +/− 1.3 – –<br />

M4 170 +/− 15 – 15.1 +/− 1.3 – Reduced torque for<br />

captive screws<br />

M5 540 +/− 30 – 47.8 +/− 2.6 – Reduced torque for<br />

battery poles<br />

M6 – 8.8 +/−<br />

0.5<br />

– 6.5 +/−<br />

0.4<br />

6 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Table 1 Recommended Torque Values<br />

Dimension Torque<br />

Ncm Nm lbf-in lbf-ft<br />

M8 – 21 +/−<br />

1.3<br />

M10 – 41 +/−<br />

2.5<br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

– 15.5 +/−<br />

1<br />

– 30.2 +/−<br />

1.8<br />

Notes<br />

–<br />

–<br />

7 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

8 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

3 Fault Identification<br />

3.1 Control Panel<br />

3.1.1 Fault Codes<br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

This chapter contains information regarding the user interface of the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong>.<br />

Explanations are given on how to read the alarms, <strong>and</strong> execute comm<strong>and</strong>s<br />

using the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong>.<br />

The control panel is located behind the installation box door. The panel consists<br />

of optical indicators, a display for fault codes, control buttons, <strong>and</strong> switches for<br />

battery <strong>and</strong> AC.<br />

Operational Fault<br />

Up<br />

Down<br />

BATTERY<br />

Figure 2 Control Panel Location in the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

D1 D2 D3<br />

I<br />

O<br />

AC<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2437A<br />

The alarms consist of a three digit fault code (representing segments D1, D2<br />

<strong>and</strong> D3), showing the origin of the fault, the alarm class, <strong>and</strong> the fault.<br />

Figure 2 on page 9 shows a display with no faults.<br />

If no fault occurs or no button is pressed within three minutes, then the display<br />

enters power saving mode. The display is reactivated when an alarm is<br />

generated, or if any button is pressed.<br />

When the power is switched on, the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> display starts flashing. The power<br />

up takes about 5 seconds, then the active system status appears on the display.<br />

With the exception of temperature alarms, all fault codes originate from current<br />

faults, that is, no fault history is displayed.<br />

9 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Origin of the Fault (D1)<br />

Table 2 Fault Codes on Display Element 1 (D1)<br />

Code Fault Origin<br />

0 <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

Alarm Class (D2)<br />

Table 3 Alarm Codes on Display Element 2 (D2)<br />

Code Alarm Class<br />

0 Not classified<br />

1 Severe<br />

2 Warning<br />

Fault (D3)<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

If the decimal point in segment D3 is illuminated, then this means that more<br />

than one alarm is present. Use the Up <strong>and</strong> Down push buttons to step through<br />

the fault codes.<br />

Table 4 Fault Codes on Display Element 3 (D3)<br />

Code Fault<br />

0 AC fault (no mains)<br />

1 AC/DC fault<br />

2 Temp sensor fault<br />

3 Heater fault<br />

4 Battery fault<br />

5 Battery disconnected<br />

6 Low battery voltage<br />

7 Over temperature<br />

8 Continuous DC overloaded<br />

3.2 Alarm Connected to the <strong>RBS</strong><br />

The <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> alarm is connected to an <strong>RBS</strong> external alarm input. All alarms<br />

transmitted to the <strong>RBS</strong> are active alarms. Ericsson recommends that external<br />

alarms are defined in the <strong>RBS</strong>, according to the table below:<br />

10 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Table 5 Alarm Connected to the <strong>RBS</strong><br />

Inlet<br />

Usage<br />

External<br />

Alarm<br />

Type Id Severity Comment<br />

Breaking (1) Level 2 BATTERY BACKUP FAULT<br />

Note: The external alarm inputs to the <strong>RBS</strong> must be defined at installation,<br />

see:<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 2109, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0027<br />

EN/LZT 720 0090<br />

The external alarm is active if the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> is shut down, or if one of the following<br />

alarms is present:<br />

• Temp sensor fault<br />

• Heater fault<br />

• Battery fault<br />

• Battery disconnected (must be active for 15 minutes before the external<br />

alarm is triggered)<br />

• Low battery voltage<br />

• Over temperature<br />

3.3 Cable Connections Overview<br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

The schematic diagram below shows the cable connections, including the<br />

options, depending upon the configuration at a particular site.<br />

11 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 3 <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> Cable Connections<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

12 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

4 Fault Localisation<br />

This section describes how to identify a fault, using optical indicators, fault<br />

codes, <strong>and</strong> fault tracing hints.<br />

To access the optical indicators <strong>and</strong> the fault codes, the installation box door<br />

must be opened. This is done as follows:<br />

1. Loosen the eight screws securing the installation box door.<br />

2. Unlock the installation box door, using the key, then open the door.<br />

Figure 4 Sealing Screws <strong>and</strong> Key for the Installation Box Door<br />

4.1 Optical Indicators<br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

This section explains the different combinations of illuminated <strong>and</strong> not<br />

illuminated indicators for the ‘‘Fault’’ <strong>and</strong> ‘‘Operational’’ optical indicators.<br />

Both Operational <strong>and</strong> Fault On<br />

The red "Fault" <strong>and</strong> green<br />

"Operational" LEDs indicate a<br />

warning. If both LEDs are illuminated,<br />

then one or more units require service<br />

or replacement. See Section 4.2 Fault<br />

Code List on page 15, to solve the<br />

problem.<br />

OPERATIONAL FAULT<br />

P003166A<br />

P004240A<br />

13 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Operational On <strong>and</strong> Fault Off<br />

No alarms are active if only the green<br />

"Operational" LED is illuminated.<br />

Both Operational <strong>and</strong> Fault Off<br />

If neither of the two LEDs "Operational"<br />

or "Fault" are illuminated, then there<br />

are three possible causes:<br />

• The battery cabinet has no<br />

power, <strong>and</strong> the batteries have<br />

been discharged.<br />

Check that 115/230 V is<br />

present in the battery cabinet by<br />

measuring the internal AC cable.<br />

• Fuses in the installation box<br />

(behind the protective cover) are<br />

broken, <strong>and</strong> the batteries have<br />

been discharged.<br />

Switch off the Mains power<br />

switch <strong>and</strong> the AC switch on the<br />

battery cabinet. Measure the<br />

resistance of the fuses, using a<br />

multimeter, to check that they<br />

are not broken. (The resistance<br />

must be low.)<br />

OPERATIONAL FAULT<br />

OPERATIONAL FAULT<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

14 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

230V<br />

115V<br />

V<br />

V<br />

P004239A<br />

P004241A<br />

P004270A<br />

P003944B


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

• The display cable is faulty.<br />

4.2 Fault Code List<br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

If 115/230 V is present in the<br />

battery cabinet, check that<br />

the display cable is properly<br />

connected <strong>and</strong> functional.<br />

This is done by measuring<br />

the resistance from pin to pin.<br />

Replace the cable if necessary,<br />

see Section 5.5 Replacing the<br />

Cables on page 40.<br />

0<br />

1 2 3 4 5 6<br />

7 8 9 10 11 12<br />

1 2 3 4 5 6<br />

7 8 9 10 11 12<br />

This section presents the fault codes, <strong>and</strong> the procedures used to find faulty<br />

units.<br />

Note: If no fault occurs, or no button is pressed within three minutes, then<br />

the display enters power saving mode. Reactivate the display by<br />

pressing any button.<br />

Operational<br />

No alarms are present.<br />

OPERATIONAL FAULT<br />

D1 D2 D3<br />

P004271A<br />

P004197A<br />

15 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

AC Fault<br />

115/230 V is not present in the battery<br />

cabinet.<br />

1. Check that 115/230 V is present<br />

at the incoming AC terminal<br />

block, on the AC-Surge board<br />

in the interface box, using a<br />

multimeter.<br />

2. Check that 115/230 V is present<br />

at the upper AC terminal block,<br />

on the AC-Surge board, to verify<br />

that the AC-Surge board is not<br />

faulty.<br />

For more information, see<br />

Section 5.2 Replacing the<br />

AC-Surge Board on page 26.<br />

3. Check that 115/230 V is present<br />

at the incoming AC terminal<br />

block, on the EMC-IN board, to<br />

verify that the cables are not<br />

faulty.<br />

For more information, see<br />

Section 5.7 Replacing the<br />

EMC-IN Board on page 45.<br />

OPERATIONAL FAULT<br />

V<br />

D1 D2 D3<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

16 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

V<br />

V<br />

P004<strong>01</strong>7A<br />

P004244A<br />

P004246A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2605A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

4. Confirm that both the Mains<br />

power switch <strong>and</strong> the AC switch<br />

on the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> are ON.<br />

AC Mains<br />

Power switch<br />

1<br />

BATTERY<br />

0<br />

Fault<br />

AC<br />

AC switch<br />

Battery<br />

switch<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2552A<br />

5. Switch off the Mains power<br />

switch <strong>and</strong> the AC switch on the<br />

230V<br />

115V<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong>. Measure the resistance<br />

of the fuses in the installation<br />

box (behind the protective<br />

cover), using a multimeter, to<br />

check that they are not broken.<br />

(The resistance must be low.)<br />

Switch the power back on if<br />

there is no fault. P003944B<br />

6. Check that 115/230 V is present<br />

at the connector to the internal<br />

AC cable, to verify that the<br />

EMC-IN board is not faulty.<br />

For more information, see<br />

Section 5.7 Replacing the<br />

EMC-IN Board on page 45.<br />

V<br />

V<br />

P004245A<br />

17 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

7. Check that 115/230 V is present<br />

at the connector of the internal<br />

AC cable, attached to the battery<br />

cabinet, to verify that the internal<br />

AC cable is not faulty. If voltage<br />

is present, then replace the<br />

battery cabinet. See Section 5.4<br />

Replacing the Battery Cabinet<br />

on page 35.<br />

AC/DC Fault<br />

1. Replace the battery cabinet.<br />

See Section 5.4 Replacing the<br />

Battery Cabinet on page 35.<br />

Temp Sensor Fault<br />

1. Check the temperature sensors<br />

for damage. The sensors are<br />

located on the negative (−) pole<br />

of the lower-right battery, <strong>and</strong> on<br />

the heater in the middle of the<br />

battery cabinet (see the figure<br />

under alarm 023).<br />

2. Reset the cabinet. If the fault<br />

goes away, it is an intermittent<br />

fault. Replace the cabinet. State<br />

“intermittent fault” on the blue<br />

tag.<br />

3. If the fault remains, then replace<br />

the battery cabinet. See Section<br />

5.4 Replacing the Battery<br />

Cabinet on page 35. State<br />

“constant fault” on the blue tag.<br />

OPERATIONAL FAULT<br />

V<br />

V<br />

D1 D2 D3<br />

OPERATIONAL FAULT<br />

D1 D2 D3<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

18 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

P004270A<br />

P004<strong>01</strong>8A<br />

P004<strong>01</strong>9A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

Heater Fault<br />

1. Check that the cables to the<br />

heater in the battery cabinet are<br />

not short circuited.<br />

2. Restart the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong>.<br />

3. If the cables are intact, then<br />

replace the battery cabinet.<br />

See Section 5.4 Replacing the<br />

Battery Cabinet on page 35.<br />

Battery Fault<br />

Defective batteries or charging circuits<br />

are malfunctioning.<br />

1. Replace the batteries. See<br />

Section 5.3 Replacing the<br />

Batteries on page 29<br />

2. Replace the battery cabinet.<br />

See Section 5.4 Replacing the<br />

Battery Cabinet on page 35.<br />

OPERATIONAL FAULT<br />

D1 D2 D3<br />

OPERATIONAL FAULT<br />

D1 D2 D3<br />

P004020A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2607A<br />

P004021A<br />

19 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Battery Disconnected<br />

1. Check that all battery cables<br />

are properly connected <strong>and</strong> not<br />

damaged.<br />

2. Check that the automatic circuit<br />

breaker is in the ON position.<br />

3. Check that the battery switch in<br />

the installation box is in the ON<br />

position.<br />

4. Check that the display cable<br />

is properly connected <strong>and</strong> not<br />

damaged.<br />

5. If the fault remains, then replace<br />

the battery cabinet. See Section<br />

5.4 Replacing the Battery<br />

Cabinet on page 35.<br />

6. If the fault remains, replace<br />

MBU-02. See Section 5.10<br />

Replacing the MBU-02 on page<br />

52.<br />

Low Battery Voltage<br />

The battery cabinet is in backup mode<br />

<strong>and</strong> running out of battery power.<br />

1. Reconnect the AC mains supply.<br />

Overtemp Active<br />

The ambient temperature is above<br />

45 C.<br />

1. If the ambient temperature<br />

is normal, then replace the<br />

battery cabinet. See Section 5.4<br />

Replacing the Battery Cabinet<br />

on page 35.<br />

OPERATIONAL FAULT<br />

D1 D2 D3<br />

OPERATIONAL FAULT<br />

D1 D2 D3<br />

OPERATIONAL FAULT<br />

D1 D2 D3<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

20 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

P004022A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2655A<br />

P004023A<br />

P004024A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Continuous DC Overloaded<br />

1. Check that the <strong>RBS</strong> outlets are<br />

not loading the battery cabinet.<br />

2. Check that the AUX equipment<br />

outlet is not overloaded.<br />

3. Start up the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong>. See<br />

Section 5.12 Starting Up the<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> on page 60.<br />

• If no alarm appears, then put<br />

the site into service according<br />

to the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> Installation<br />

Instruction<br />

• If alarm appears, then replace<br />

the battery cabinet. See<br />

Section 5.4 Replacing the<br />

Battery Cabinet on page 35.<br />

4.3 Fault Tracing Hints<br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

This section describes how to h<strong>and</strong>le faults that are not indicated by the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong>.<br />

No DC Power to <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>and</strong> No Alarms Generated in <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

1. Check the power on the <strong>RBS</strong> outlet in the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> interface box.<br />

• If the power is within the range −46 to −59 V DC,<br />

then check that the cable at the <strong>RBS</strong> is properly<br />

connected <strong>and</strong> not damaged.<br />

• If the power is not within the range −46 to −59 V DC,<br />

then continue with the next step.<br />

2. Check that the DC/alarm cable is properly connected <strong>and</strong> not damaged.<br />

• If the DC/alarm cable is properly connected <strong>and</strong> not<br />

damaged, then replace the battery cabinet. See<br />

Section 5.4 Replacing the Battery Cabinet on page<br />

35.<br />

• If the DC/alarm cable is faulty, then replace it. See<br />

Section 5.5 Replacing the Cables on page 40.<br />

No DC Power to AUX Equipment <strong>and</strong> No Alarms Generated in <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

1. Check the power to the AUX EQUIP outlet in the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> interface box.<br />

21 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

• If the power is within the range –46 to –59 V DC,<br />

then check that the cable at the AUX equipment is<br />

properly connected <strong>and</strong> not damaged.<br />

• If the power is not within the range –46 to –59 V DC,<br />

then continue with the next step.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

2. Measure the resistance of the fuse in the interface box, using a multimeter.<br />

(The resistance must be low.)<br />

Figure 5 Location of the Fuse in the Interface Box<br />

• If the fuse is broken, then replace it. See Section<br />

5.9 Replacing the AUX EQUIP −48 V DC Fuse on<br />

page 49.<br />

• If the fuse is not broken, then continue with the next<br />

step.<br />

3. Check that the DC/alarm cable is properly connected <strong>and</strong> not damaged.<br />

• If the DC/Alarm cable is properly connected <strong>and</strong><br />

not damaged, then replace the battery cabinet. See<br />

Section 5.4 Replacing the Battery Cabinet on page<br />

35.<br />

• If the DC/Alarm cable is faulty, then replace it. See<br />

Section 5.5 Replacing the Cables on page 40.<br />

External Alarm Behaviour Not as Expected in <strong>RBS</strong><br />

1. Check that the cables in the interface box are properly connected <strong>and</strong><br />

functioning.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2604A<br />

2. For the last <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> in chain, check that the jumper is fitted in the positions<br />

for incoming alarm.<br />

22 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

3. In the <strong>RBS</strong>, ensure that the external alarm cable is properly connected.<br />

4. Ensure that the <strong>RBS</strong> IDB is correctly configured, according to Table 5 on<br />

page 11.<br />

23 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

24 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

5 HW Replacement<br />

This section describes how to replace hardware units in the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong>.<br />

5.1 Shutting Down the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

The <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> must be shut down before any component is replaced.<br />

Danger!<br />

Electric shock risk. Avoid both direct <strong>and</strong> indirect contact with parts connected<br />

to mains power as this is likely to be fatal. Switch off the mains power before<br />

starting work.<br />

Note: Dangerous voltages remain on the AC-Surge board, in the interface<br />

box, after AC power to the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> is switched off at the AC power<br />

switch. Dangerous voltages also remain on the EMC-IN board, in the<br />

installation box, up to the power switch.<br />

1. Loosen the eight screws securing the installation box door. Unlock the<br />

door, using the key, then open the door.<br />

Figure 6 Opening the Installation Box Door<br />

2. Switch off the following switches in the listed order:<br />

P003166A<br />

25 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

• Battery switch<br />

• AC switch<br />

• AC Mains Power switch<br />

Note: When turning off the AC Mains Power switch, ensure that only the<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> is switched off.<br />

AC Mains<br />

Power switch<br />

1<br />

0<br />

BATTERY<br />

Figure 7 Switches for Battery, AC, <strong>and</strong> AC Mains Power<br />

5.2 Replacing the AC-Surge Board<br />

Fault<br />

Danger!<br />

AC<br />

AC switch<br />

Battery switch<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>2438A<br />

Electric shock risk. Avoid both direct <strong>and</strong> indirect contact with parts connected<br />

to mains power as this is likely to be fatal. Switch off the mains power before<br />

starting work.<br />

1. Follow the instructions in Section 5.1 Shutting Down the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> on page<br />

25.<br />

2. Loosen the screws securing the interface box on the MBU-02, <strong>and</strong> pull<br />

the box down.<br />

26 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

Figure 8 Loosening the Interface Box<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2469A<br />

3. Unscrew the nine torx screws on the interface box cover. Allow the cover<br />

to hang by the strap.<br />

27 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 9 Loosening the Interface Box Cover<br />

4. Check that there is no incoming AC power, using a multimeter.<br />

Caution!<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>2467A<br />

Stop! This product contains components sensitive to ESD. Use an approved<br />

ESD wrist strap, connected to the product grounding point, to avoid damaging<br />

these components.<br />

5. Connect the ESD wrist strap to the ESD connection point in the interface<br />

box. See Figure 1 on page 6.<br />

6. Disconnect the AC In <strong>and</strong> the AC Out terminal blocks connected to the<br />

AC-Surge board.<br />

Note: Do not remove the Protective Earth (PE) connection.<br />

7. Remove the AC-Surge board by unscrewing the four torx screws. Save the<br />

washer for later use.<br />

28 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 10 Removing the AC-Surge Board<br />

8. Mount the new AC-Surge board, using the washer <strong>and</strong> the four torx screws.<br />

9. Put back the AC In <strong>and</strong> AC Out terminal blocks.<br />

10. Remove the ESD wrist strap.<br />

11. Put back the interface box cover by screwing the nine torx screws back<br />

into position.<br />

12. Push the interface box upwards. Ensure that the AC cable from the<br />

installation box is not trapped between the interface box <strong>and</strong> the MBU-02.<br />

13. Follow the instructions in Section 5.12 Starting Up the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> on page 60.<br />

5.3 Replacing the Batteries<br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

Caution!<br />

Improper h<strong>and</strong>ling of batteries can result in the batteries short-circuiting, which<br />

can result in serious injury due to high energy levels. Exercise the necessary<br />

care when working with batteries.<br />

Removing the Batteries<br />

1. Loosen the eight screws securing the installation box door. Unlock the<br />

door, using the key, then open the door.<br />

29 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 11 Opening the Installation Box Door<br />

2. Switch off the battery switch. See Figure 7 on page 26.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

P003166A<br />

3. Remove the front sunshield by pushing the spring locking pin located in the<br />

lower left h<strong>and</strong> corner, <strong>and</strong> carefully bending the right top side off the hinge.<br />

Figure 12 Location of the Spring Locking Pin<br />

4. Unscrew the 18 screws securing the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> door, using a torx 20<br />

screwdriver. Ensure that the screws are disengaged, then open the door.<br />

30 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

Figure 13 Opening the Battery Compartment<br />

5. Switch off the automatic circuit breaker.<br />

Figure 14 Automatic Circuit Breaker in OFF Position<br />

OFF<br />

P003273A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2497A<br />

31 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

WARNING<br />

CONNECT THIS CABLE LAST<br />

1 LOAD<br />

2 LINE<br />

WARNING<br />

CONNECT THIS CABLE LAST<br />

2 4<br />

1 3<br />

1 LOAD<br />

2 LINE<br />

Figure 15 Battery Position Overview<br />

2<br />

1<br />

6. Disconnect the battery jumper cable from between the batteries in<br />

compartments 2 <strong>and</strong> 4.<br />

7. Disconnect the battery jumper cable from between the batteries in<br />

compartments 3 <strong>and</strong> 4.<br />

8. Disconnect the negative (-) pole of the battery in compartment 3.<br />

9. Remove the battery from compartment 4.<br />

10. Remove the battery from compartment 3.<br />

11. Remove the ventilation hoses from the batteries.<br />

4<br />

3<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

32 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2495A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

Figure 16 Removing the Ventilation Hoses<br />

12. Disconnect the battery jumper cable between the batteries in compartments<br />

1 <strong>and</strong> 2.<br />

13. Disconnect the positive (+) pole of the battery in compartment 1.<br />

14. Remove the battery from compartment 2.<br />

15. Remove the battery from compartment 1.<br />

Installing the Batteries<br />

Note: Ericsson recommends that all four batteries be replaced at the same<br />

time.<br />

Batteries must be approved according to the Spare Parts Catalogue.<br />

See:<br />

Spare Parts Catalogue <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>,<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> 2109, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0028<br />

1. Remove the precut tape covering the inlet to the ventilations hose on all<br />

batteries.<br />

2. Place the first battery in compartment 1, <strong>and</strong> connect the cable from the<br />

battery switch panel to the positive (+) pole.<br />

Note: Ensure that the cable lugs are properly connected.<br />

33 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 17 Connecting Cable Lugs to Batteries<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

3. Place the second battery in compartment 2, <strong>and</strong> connect the battery jumper<br />

cable between battery 1 <strong>and</strong> battery 2.<br />

4. Connect the ventilation hose to batteries 1 <strong>and</strong> 2, <strong>and</strong> route it to the<br />

ventilation outlet located in the lower left side of the battery cabinet.<br />

5. Place the third battery in compartment 3, <strong>and</strong> the fourth battery in<br />

compartment 4. Connect the battery jumper cable between batteries 3<br />

<strong>and</strong> 4.<br />

Note: Do not connect battery jumper cable between batteries 2 <strong>and</strong> 4.<br />

6. Connect the ventilation hose to batteries 3 <strong>and</strong> 4.<br />

7. Connect the negative (-) pole of battery 3.<br />

8. Connect the battery jumper cable from battery 2 to battery 4.<br />

9. Ensure that the following conditions are met:<br />

• All cables <strong>and</strong> hoses are in the correct positions, allowing the door to<br />

be closed without trapping cables<br />

• All protective caps are fitted to cover the battery poles<br />

• The ventilation hoses are not blocked<br />

10. Set the automatic circuit breaker to the ON position.<br />

11. Close the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> door <strong>and</strong> screw the 18 torx screws back into position.<br />

Note: Ensure that no cables are trapped.<br />

12. Put back the front sunshield.<br />

13. Follow the instructions in Section 5.12 Starting Up the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> on page 60.<br />

34 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

5.4 Replacing the Battery Cabinet<br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

A lifting device can be used when replacing the cabinet, see:<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2308</strong>, <strong>RBS</strong> <strong>2309</strong>, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

<strong>RBS</strong> 2109, <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>01</strong> <strong>and</strong> <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

User’s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0027<br />

EN/LZT 720 0090<br />

Note: The lifting device is not dimensioned for the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> with batteries<br />

installed.<br />

1. Follow the instructions in Section 5.1 Shutting Down the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> on page<br />

25.<br />

2. Remove the sunshields (front, lower, left, <strong>and</strong> upper), see Section 5.11<br />

Replacing the Sunshields on page 57.<br />

3. Check that there is no incoming AC power, using a multimeter.<br />

4. Disconnect the following cables from the battery cabinet:<br />

• DC Power cable<br />

• AC Power cable<br />

• Alarm cable<br />

• Display cable<br />

35 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

DC/Alarm cable<br />

connectors<br />

Display<br />

cable connector<br />

AC power<br />

cable connector<br />

Figure 18 Loosening the DC/Alarm Cable, Display Cable, <strong>and</strong> AC Power<br />

Cable<br />

5. Free the installation box from the cabinet, by loosening the six screws.<br />

Figure 19 Loosening the Installation Box<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>2492A<br />

P003173A<br />

6. Remove the batteries according to Section 5.3 Replacing the Batteries on<br />

page 29. Ignore Step 3 on page 30 since the front sunshield has already<br />

been removed.<br />

36 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

7. Loosen the two screws holding the battery cabinet.<br />

Note: The two locking parts may become jammed together, causing the<br />

screw to move downwards, instead of the wedge part moving up.<br />

Correct this by striking the back of the torx screwdriver with the<br />

h<strong>and</strong>, when the screw has been screwed down approximately<br />

20 mm.<br />

Unsecure<br />

Secure<br />

Figure 20 Loosening the Battery Cabinet<br />

P003172A<br />

8. If the lifting h<strong>and</strong>le (optional) is to be used, then mount it at the top of the<br />

cabinet.<br />

37 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 21 Mounting the Optional Lifting H<strong>and</strong>le<br />

9. Remove the cabinet by lifting it up <strong>and</strong> away from the MBU-02.<br />

Figure 22 Unhooking the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

P003192A<br />

10. Hook on the new battery cabinet by pushing it against the MBU-02 <strong>and</strong><br />

lowering it on to the hooks. Ensure that the battery cabinet is properly<br />

mounted by verifying the following:<br />

• The mounting screws in the installation box correspond to the holes<br />

in the cabinet<br />

• The AC cable from the installation box is not trapped between the<br />

battery cabinet <strong>and</strong> the MBU-02<br />

11. Secure the locking cleats behind the cabinet by turning the torx screws<br />

clockwise until they stop.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

38 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

P003800A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

Secure<br />

(x2)<br />

Figure 23 Securing the Battery Cabinet<br />

12. Remove the lifting h<strong>and</strong>le, if used.<br />

P003482B<br />

13. Unscrew the 18 screws securing the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> door, using a torx 20<br />

screwdriver. Ensure that the screws are disengaged <strong>and</strong> open the door.<br />

Figure 24 Opening the Battery Compartment<br />

14. Install the batteries according to steps 1 – 11 on Page 33.<br />

P003273A<br />

39 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

15. Fasten the installation box by turning each of the six torx screws until they<br />

engage in the threads, then tighten them.<br />

Figure 25 Fastening the Installation Box<br />

P003173A<br />

16. Reconnect the DC/Alarm Cable, Display Cable, <strong>and</strong> the AC Power Cable to<br />

the cabinet.<br />

17. Put back the sunshields according to Section 5.11 Replacing the<br />

Sunshields on page 57.<br />

18. Follow the instructions in Section 5.12 Starting Up the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> on page 60.<br />

5.5 Replacing the Cables<br />

Danger!<br />

Electric shock risk. Avoid both direct <strong>and</strong> indirect contact with parts connected<br />

to mains power as this is likely to be fatal. Switch off the mains power before<br />

starting work.<br />

40 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

Figure 26 Overview of the Cables<br />

DC/Alarm cable<br />

connectors<br />

Display<br />

cable connector<br />

AC power<br />

cable connector<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2492A<br />

1. Follow the instructions in Section 5.1 Shutting Down the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> on page<br />

25.<br />

2. Check that there is no incoming AC power, using a multimeter.<br />

Caution!<br />

Stop! This product contains components sensitive to ESD. Use an approved<br />

ESD wrist strap, connected to the product grounding point, to avoid damaging<br />

these components.<br />

3. Connect the ESD wrist strap to the ESD connection point in the installation<br />

box. See Figure 1 on page 6.<br />

4. Disconnect the faulty cable <strong>and</strong> connect the new cable.<br />

5. Disconnect the ESD wrist strap.<br />

6. Follow the instructions in Section 5.12 Starting Up the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> on page 60.<br />

41 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

5.6 Replacing the DCC Board<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

1. Follow the instructions in Section 5.1 Shutting Down the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> on page<br />

25.<br />

2. Loosen the screws securing the interface box on the MBU-02 <strong>and</strong> pull<br />

the box down.<br />

Figure 27 Loosening the Interface Box<br />

3. Open the cover of the interface box by removing the nine torx screws.<br />

42 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2469A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

Figure 28 Loosening the Interface Box Cover<br />

4. Check that there is no incoming AC power, using a multimeter.<br />

Caution!<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2467A<br />

Stop! This product contains components sensitive to ESD. Use an approved<br />

ESD wrist strap, connected to the product grounding point, to avoid damaging<br />

these components.<br />

5. Connect the ESD wrist strap to the ESD connection point in the interface<br />

box. See Figure 1 on page 6.<br />

6. On the DCC board, remove the three orange terminal blocks.<br />

7. On the DCC board, note the cable positions of the top left eight cables.<br />

Then unscrew the cable connectors <strong>and</strong> remove the cables.<br />

8. On the DCC board, note the cable positions of the <strong>RBS</strong> -48 V DC cables.<br />

Then unscrew the cable connectors <strong>and</strong> remove the cables.<br />

9. Remove the cable gl<strong>and</strong> plate by unscrewing the two torx screws.<br />

43 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 29 Loosening the Cable Gl<strong>and</strong> Plate<br />

10. Remove the DCC board by unscrewing the eight screws.<br />

Figure 30 Removing the DCC Board<br />

11. Fit the new DCC board <strong>and</strong> tighten the screws.<br />

12. Put back the cable gl<strong>and</strong> plate.<br />

13. Reinstall the cables to the DCC board.<br />

14. Reconnect the terminal blocks.<br />

15. Remove the ESD wrist strap.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

44 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2600A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2555A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

16. Put back the interface box cover <strong>and</strong> secure it in position with the nine<br />

torx screws.<br />

17. Push the interface box up <strong>and</strong> secure it in the upper position with the two<br />

torx screws.<br />

18. Follow the instructions in Section 5.12 Starting Up the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> on page 60.<br />

5.7 Replacing the EMC-IN Board<br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

1. Follow the instructions in Section 5.1 Shutting Down the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> on page<br />

25.<br />

2. Remove the protection cover by removing the two torx screws, <strong>and</strong> allow<br />

the cover to hang by the earth wire.<br />

Figure 31 Removing the Protection Cover<br />

3. Check that there is no incoming AC power, using a multimeter.<br />

Caution!<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2468A<br />

Stop! This product contains components sensitive to ESD. Use an approved<br />

ESD wrist strap, connected to the product grounding point, to avoid damaging<br />

these components.<br />

45 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

4. Connect the ESD wrist strap to the ESD connection point in the interface<br />

box. See Figure 1 on page 6.<br />

5. Disconnect the following cables connected to the EMC-IN board:<br />

• Display cable<br />

• AC Power cable<br />

• Incoming AC cable<br />

Figure 32 Loosening the Display Cable <strong>and</strong> the AC Power Cable<br />

Figure 33 Loosening the Incoming AC Cable<br />

Display cable<br />

AC power cable<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

46 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

P003693A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>26<strong>06</strong>A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

6. Remove the DC/Alarm cable from the three clamps on the EMC-IN board.<br />

7. Remove the EMC-IN board by removing the seven screws <strong>and</strong> the<br />

st<strong>and</strong>-off.<br />

Figure 34 Removing the EMC-IN Board<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2610A<br />

8. Fit the new EMC-IN board <strong>and</strong> tighten the screws <strong>and</strong> the st<strong>and</strong>-off. Ensure<br />

that the clamps are refitted according to the figure above.<br />

9. Refit the DC/Alarm cable to the three clamps on the EMC-IN board.<br />

10. Reconnect the cables to the EMC-IN board.<br />

11. Move the fuses from the old EMC-IN board to the new EMC-IN board.<br />

12. Remove the ESD wrist strap.<br />

13. Refit the protective cover, securing it with the two torx screws.<br />

Note: Ensure that the lens on the optical indicators is not damaged.<br />

14. Follow the instructions in Section 5.12 Starting Up the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> on page 60.<br />

5.8 Replacing the Incoming AC Mains Fuses<br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

1. Follow the instructions in Section 5.1 Shutting Down the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> on page<br />

25.<br />

2. Remove the protection cover by removing the two torx screws, <strong>and</strong> allow<br />

the cover to hang by the earth wire.<br />

47 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 35 Removing the Protection Cover<br />

3. Check that there is no incoming AC power, using a multimeter.<br />

Caution!<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>2468A<br />

Stop! This product contains components sensitive to ESD. Use an approved<br />

ESD wrist strap, connected to the product grounding point, to avoid damaging<br />

these components.<br />

4. Connect the ESD wrist strap to the ESD connection point in the interface<br />

box. See Figure 1 on page 6.<br />

5. Replace faulty fuses with new fuses, according to the table below.<br />

Table 6 Recommended AC Mains Fuses<br />

Voltage Fuses Data Dimension<br />

100 – 127 V AC Ceramic Slow Blow 8 A T, 250 V (1)<br />

200 – 250 V AC Ceramic Slow Blow 4 A T, 250 V (1)<br />

(1) Fuse rating according to st<strong>and</strong>ard EN 6<strong>01</strong>27.<br />

6.3 x 32 mm<br />

5 x 20 mm<br />

48 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 36 Replacing AC Mains Fuses<br />

6. Remove the ESD wrist strap.<br />

7. Refit the protective cover by securing the two torx screws.<br />

230V<br />

115V<br />

Note: Ensure that the lens on the optical indicators is not damaged.<br />

P004136B<br />

8. Follow the instructions in Section 5.12 Starting Up the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> on page 60.<br />

5.9 Replacing the AUX EQUIP −48 V DC Fuse<br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

1. Follow the instructions in Section 5.1 Shutting Down the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> on page<br />

25.<br />

2. Loosen the screws securing the interface box on the MBU-02, <strong>and</strong> pull<br />

the box down.<br />

49 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 37 Loosening the Interface Box<br />

3. Open the cover of the interface box by removing the nine torx screws.<br />

Figure 38 Loosening the Interface Box Cover<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

50 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2469A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2467A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

4. Check that there is no incoming AC power, using a multimeter.<br />

Caution!<br />

Stop! This product contains components sensitive to ESD. Use an approved<br />

ESD wrist strap, connected to the product grounding point, to avoid damaging<br />

these components.<br />

5. Connect the ESD wrist strap to the ESD connection point in the interface<br />

box. See Figure 1 on page 6.<br />

6. Replace the faulty fuse with a new fuse, according to the table below.<br />

Table 7 Recommended AUX EQUIP −48 V DC Fuse<br />

Fuse Data Dimension<br />

Ceramic Slow Blow 2.5 A T, 250 V (1)<br />

(1) Fuse rating according to st<strong>and</strong>ard EN 6<strong>01</strong>27.<br />

Figure 39 Replacing the AUX EQUIP −48 V DC Fuse<br />

7. Remove the ESD wrist strap.<br />

5 x 20 mm<br />

8. Refit the interface box cover <strong>and</strong> secure it in position with the nine torx<br />

screws.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2604A<br />

9. Push the interface box up <strong>and</strong> secure it in the upper position with the two<br />

torx screws.<br />

10. Follow the instructions in Section 5.12 Starting Up the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> on page 60.<br />

51 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

5.10 Replacing the MBU-02<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

1. Follow the instructions in Section 5.1 Shutting Down the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> on page<br />

25.<br />

2. Remove the battery cabinet, see step 1 – 9 in Section 5.4 Replacing the<br />

Battery Cabinet on page 35.<br />

3. Loosen the screws securing the interface box on the MBU-02, <strong>and</strong> pull<br />

the box down.<br />

Figure 40 Releasing the Interface Box<br />

4. Open the cover of the interface box by removing the nine torx screws.<br />

52 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2469A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

Figure 41 Loosening the Interface Box Cover<br />

5. Check that there is no incoming AC power, using a multimeter.<br />

Caution!<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2467A<br />

Stop! This product contains components sensitive to ESD. Use an approved<br />

ESD wrist strap, connected to the product grounding point, to avoid damaging<br />

these components.<br />

6. Connect the ESD wrist strap to the ESD connection point in the interface<br />

box. See Figure 1 on page 6.<br />

7. Remove the AC connection terminal block, <strong>and</strong> remove the AC cables<br />

from the block.<br />

8. Loosen the PE in the AC section of the interface box.<br />

9. Loosen the two screws on the AC strain-relief clamp.<br />

10. Loosen the sleeve <strong>and</strong> pull out the AC cable.<br />

11. Remove the following terminal blocks:<br />

53 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

• AUX EQUIP –48 V DC<br />

• Alarm<br />

12. Unscrew the <strong>RBS</strong> –48 V DC cables.<br />

13. Remove the cable gl<strong>and</strong> plate by removing the two torx screws.<br />

Figure 42 Loosening the Cable Gl<strong>and</strong> Plate<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

P<strong>01</strong>2439A<br />

14. Remove the ESD wrist strap from the ESD connection point in the interface<br />

box.<br />

15. Remove the earth cable from the MBU-02.<br />

Earth<br />

Figure 43 Removing the Earth Cable from the MBU-02<br />

54 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

P003168A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

16. Remove the earth cable from the installation box door.<br />

Figure 44 Removing the Earth Cable from the Installation Box Door<br />

17. Remove the installation box door the following way:<br />

P005104B<br />

• Press down the spring locking pin on the upper right-h<strong>and</strong> corner of the<br />

installation box door, then unhook the upper part of the door.<br />

• Unhook the lower part of the door.<br />

Figure 45 Removing the Installation Box Door<br />

18. Loosen the four nuts securing the MBU-02 to the wall bracket.<br />

19. Lift up the MBU-02 <strong>and</strong> unhook it by pulling it away from the wall bracket.<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2608A<br />

55 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

20. Mount the new MBU-02 on the mounting plate. Ensure that the fastening<br />

screws are properly positioned in the key holes.<br />

Figure 46 Mounting the MBU-02 on the Wall Bracket<br />

21. Secure the MBU-02 by tightening the four nuts.<br />

22. Refit the installation box door, starting with the lower part of the door.<br />

Ensure that the spring locking pin snaps into position on the upper part<br />

of the door.<br />

23. Terminate the earth cable to the MBU-02.<br />

24. Terminate the earth cable to the installation box door.<br />

25. Connect the ESD wrist strap to the ESD connection point in the interface<br />

box.<br />

26. Refit the cable gl<strong>and</strong> plate <strong>and</strong> fasten the screws.<br />

27. Refit the <strong>RBS</strong> –48 V DC cables.<br />

28. Connect the AUX EQUIP –48 V DC <strong>and</strong> Alarm terminal block.<br />

29. Route the AC cable into the cable gl<strong>and</strong> <strong>and</strong> tighten the sleeve.<br />

30. Tighten the two screws on the AC strain-relief clamp.<br />

31. Reconnect the PE to the interface box.<br />

32. Refit the AC Connection terminal block <strong>and</strong> the AC cables.<br />

33. Remove the ESD wrist strap.<br />

34. Refit the interface box cover <strong>and</strong> secure it in position with the nine torx<br />

screws.<br />

56 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2470A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

35. Push the interface box up <strong>and</strong> secure it in the upper position with the two<br />

torx screws.<br />

36. Remount the battery cabinet, see step 10 – 18 in Section 5.4 Replacing the<br />

Battery Cabinet on page 35.<br />

5.11 Replacing the Sunshields<br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

The sunshields are inter-connected <strong>and</strong> must be removed <strong>and</strong> installed in a<br />

specific order. The figure below shows the order in which the sunshields are to<br />

be removed.<br />

Left sunshield<br />

1<br />

3<br />

Front sunshield<br />

Figure 47 Overview of Sunshields<br />

2<br />

Lower sunshield<br />

4<br />

Upper sunshield<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2085A<br />

For example, when replacing the left sunshield, the lower <strong>and</strong> front sunshields<br />

must be removed first. The sunshields are then installed in the following order:<br />

left, lower, <strong>and</strong> then front.<br />

Removing the Front Sunshield<br />

1. Loosen the eight screws securing the installation box door. Unlock the<br />

door, using the key, then open the door.<br />

57 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 48 Sealing Screws <strong>and</strong> Key for the Installation Box Door<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

P003166A<br />

2. Remove the front sunshield by pushing the spring locking pin, located in the<br />

lower left h<strong>and</strong> corner, <strong>and</strong> carefully bending the right top side off the hinge.<br />

Figure 49 Location of the Spring Locking Pin<br />

3. If more sunshields are to be removed, then remove the lower sunshield.<br />

Otherwise, follow the instructions for installing the sunshields given on<br />

Page 59.<br />

Removing the Lower Sunshield<br />

1. Pull down the lower sunshield by pressing the fasteners located on the<br />

middle of the sunshield, <strong>and</strong> unhooking the left side.<br />

2. If more sunshields are to be removed, then remove the left sunshield.<br />

Otherwise, follow the instructions for installing the sunshields given on<br />

Page 59.<br />

58 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Removing the Left Sunshield<br />

1. Remove the left sunshield by unsnapping its lower part, then pushing the<br />

sunshield back, until it is clear of the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> hinges.<br />

2. If more sunshields are to be removed, then remove the upper sunshield.<br />

Otherwise, follow the instructions for installing the sunshields given on<br />

Page 59.<br />

Removing the Upper Sunshield<br />

1. Remove the screw-plugs of the upper sunshield, <strong>and</strong> unsnap it by pressing<br />

the middle of the sunshield.<br />

Installing the Sunshields<br />

1. If the upper sunshield has been removed, then mount the new upper<br />

sunshield.<br />

2. If the left sunshield has been removed, then mount the new left sunshield<br />

by hooking it on the top left side of the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> <strong>and</strong> pushing the lower part<br />

until it snaps into position.<br />

3. If the lower sunshield has been removed, then mount the new lower<br />

sunshield in its cut-out on the left side of the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> <strong>and</strong> snap it into<br />

position.<br />

4. Mount the new front sunshield.<br />

5. Secure the upper <strong>and</strong> lower sunshields by closing the installation box door.<br />

6. Lock the installation box door using a key, then fasten the screws.<br />

5.11.1 Replacing the Rear Sunshield<br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

1. Remove the MBU-02, see step 1 – 19 in Section 5.10 Replacing the<br />

MBU-02 on page 52.<br />

2. Place the MBU-02 on the ground.<br />

3. Remove the four lock washers, using a screwdriver.<br />

59 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 50 Removing the Lock Washers<br />

4. Separate the rear sunshield from the MBU-02.<br />

5. Mount the new rear sunshield <strong>and</strong> the new lock washers.<br />

6. Remount the MBU-02, see step 20 – 36 in Section 5.10 Replacing the<br />

MBU-02 on page 52.<br />

5.12 Starting Up the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

1. Switch on the following switches in the listed order:<br />

• AC mains power switch<br />

• AC switch<br />

• Battery switch<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

60 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

P003676A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

AC Mains<br />

Power switch<br />

1<br />

0<br />

BATTERY<br />

Figure 51 Switches for AC Mains Power, AC, <strong>and</strong> Battery<br />

Fault<br />

AC<br />

AC switch<br />

Battery switch<br />

P<strong>01</strong>2438A<br />

2. Check that the indicators <strong>and</strong> the numerical fault code corresponds to the<br />

figure below. If it is not, see:<br />

External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong>,<br />

Maintenance Instructions<br />

OPERATIONAL FAULT<br />

D1 D2 D3<br />

P004197A<br />

Figure 52 Fully Charged Batteries<br />

EN/LZT 720 0476<br />

Note: If no fault occurs, or no button is pressed within three minutes, then<br />

the display enters power saving mode. Reactivate the display by<br />

pressing any button.<br />

3. Secure the upper <strong>and</strong> lower sunshields by closing the installation box door.<br />

4. Lock the installation box door, using a key, then fasten the screws.<br />

61 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Figure 53 Closing the Installation Box Door<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

62 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

P003166A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

6 Preventive Maintenance for the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

6.1 Sunshields<br />

This chapter provides information about the units requiring regular inspection at<br />

recommended intervals. Preventive Maintenance is performed to inspect <strong>and</strong><br />

correct faults before they cause serious damage to the equipment.<br />

The interval between inspections at each <strong>RBS</strong> site varies, depending upon the<br />

environmental conditions. Outdoor sites are exposed to larger amounts of<br />

contamination <strong>and</strong>, therefore, require more maintenance than indoor sites. The<br />

<strong>RBS</strong> operator may decide to increase or decrease the recommended interval<br />

between inspections as required.<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> Maintenance Schedule<br />

Table 8 <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> Maintenance Schedule<br />

1) Inspect the sunshields Every time the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> unit is controlled<br />

or repaired<br />

2) Clean the cooling flanges 3 – 5 years between cleaning<br />

3) Replace the batteries Replace the batteries at 5 year intervals,<br />

or when faulty battery alarm occurs<br />

Replace sunshields that are damaged, discoloured, or deformed.<br />

For information regarding the replacement of the sunshields, see Section 5.11<br />

Replacing the Sunshields on page 57.<br />

6.2 Cooling Flanges<br />

6.3 Batteries<br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

1. Remove the sunshields, see Section 5.11 Replacing the Sunshields on<br />

page 57.<br />

2. Clean cooling flanges on the front, using a soft brush.<br />

3. Clean sunshields, if necessary.<br />

4. Clean cooling flanges on the back of the battery cabinet.<br />

For information regarding replacement of the batteries, see Section 5.3<br />

Replacing the Batteries on page 29.<br />

63 (65)


External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

Table 9 Battery Checklist<br />

Check that: OK<br />

1 The batteries <strong>and</strong> battery compartment are free from dirt,<br />

excessive grease, oxidation, <strong>and</strong> corrosion<br />

2 The battery compartment is free from discolouration <strong>and</strong> is<br />

not deformed<br />

3 The batteries have not reached their replacement date<br />

4 The batteries do not leak acid<br />

Corrective Actions<br />

<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

1. Clean the batteries <strong>and</strong> battery box, with a mild detergent <strong>and</strong> a soft brush.<br />

Remove oxidation <strong>and</strong> corrosion.<br />

2. Replace deformed or discoloured batteries.<br />

3. Replace batteries with damaged poles.<br />

4. If the lifetime of the batteries expires before the next scheduled<br />

maintenance, then replace the batteries.<br />

64 (65) EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A


<strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> External Battery Backup <strong>06</strong><br />

7 Performing Concluding Routines<br />

EN/LZT 720 0476 Uen R2A<br />

Before leaving the site, ensure the following:<br />

Table 10 <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> Maintenance Checklist<br />

Check that OK<br />

The following switches are in the ON position:<br />

• AC to <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

• AC in the installation box<br />

• Battery in the installation box<br />

• Automatic circuit breaker inside <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong><br />

All cables are connected<br />

The <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> has no alarms<br />

The <strong>RBS</strong> has no alarms<br />

All power output connections have the correct output power<br />

The <strong>RBS</strong> connected to the <strong>EBB</strong>-<strong>06</strong> indicates that it has DC<br />

or battery voltage<br />

The “operational” LED is on<br />

The sunshields are attached<br />

65 (65)

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!